JP7386567B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with performance control means for controlling performances.

For example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a game ball enters the starting hole, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and after displaying special symbols in a variable manner, a special game that shows the result of the above determination is made. The pattern will be stopped and displayed. Some gaming machines of this type have a predetermined cut-in in the currently displayed performance image in response to the operation of the performance button during the valid period immediately before the winning notification performance (or loss notification performance) is executed. There is a device that executes an effect called cut-in in which images are displayed in a superimposed manner (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2020-80893A

By the way, it cannot be said that the effects performed on conventional gaming machines are necessarily sufficiently entertaining, and there is a need for further improvement in the entertainment.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is as follows:
an input means that allows input by a player;
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
A performance control means for controlling the performance based on the result of the determination,
The performance control means is
displaying a validity suggestion image in a first display mode that suggests that the input to the input means is valid during a predetermined period when the input is valid;
The input means operates in a predetermined operation direction in response to input to the input means,
The performance control means is
As inputs to the input means are continuously performed a plurality of times during the predetermined period , the valid suggestion image is displayed in a second display mode different from when it is displayed in the first display mode. It is possible to perform a change effect display that gradually changes in a common direction that is common to the movement direction ,
The second display mode is characterized in that it is a display mode that makes the player expect that the special game will be executed .

According to this invention, it is possible to perform highly entertaining performances.

Front view of gaming machine 1 Front view of game board 2 Enlarged view of main display 40 in FIG. 2 Explanatory diagram for explaining the opening/closing control of the second big prize opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 A block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1 Explanatory diagram to explain jackpot random numbers and pattern random numbers Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the gaming machine 1 Explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of various effects such as reach effects in the normal gaming state Screen diagram illustrating the performance in the normal gaming state (Part 1) Screen diagram illustrating the performance in the normal gaming state (Part 2) A screen diagram showing an example of production when a V winning is announced during a jackpot game Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of complex expectation performance An explanatory diagram to explain the characteristics of character standby effects and special cut-ins, and the reliability of jackpots. Screen diagram to explain related effects Explanatory diagram showing a specific example of related effects Flowchart for explaining the execution period of various related effects An explanatory diagram to explain the flow of a series of subjugation reaches. An explanatory diagram to explain the lottery performed according to the operation during subjugation reach. Explanatory diagram for explaining advance determination information Explanatory diagram for explaining provisional loss information and provisional win information Diagram showing a specific example of icon change production using a hold icon Screen diagram showing a specific example of special drawing 2 pending jackpot suggestion effect Explanatory diagram to explain the flow of chance production and suggestion production Explanatory diagram to explain the jackpot reliability and characteristics of chance production and suggestion production A screen diagram showing a specific example of the sense of discomfort notification effect A Screen diagram illustrating a specific example of discomfort-feeling failure notification effect B Screen diagram illustrating a specific example of the discomfort notification performance C Screen diagram for explaining the flow of the first change production and stage-related production Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability and characteristics of the first change production and stage-related production Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the precursor performance and the second change performance Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability of the second change effect and the omen effect Screen diagram showing a specific example of a precursor effect when the second change effect is not executed Screen diagram showing a specific example of a precursor effect and a second change effect that ends in the second stage Screen diagram showing a specific example of a precursor effect and a second change effect that ends at the third stage of the upper limit (Part 1) Screen diagram showing a specific example of a precursor effect and a second change effect that ends at the third stage of the upper limit (Part 2) Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of stage change performance and expectation performance A screen diagram illustrating a series of performances in which the stage change performance ends at the first stage and develops into the expected performance. Screen diagram (part 1) illustrating a series of performances in which the stage change performance ends at the third stage, which is the upper limit, and develops into the expected performance. Screen diagram illustrating a series of performances in which the stage change performance ends at the third stage at the upper limit and develops into the expected performance (Part 2) Explanatory diagram to explain the flow of special button effects Screen diagram showing a specific example of the first half of the special button press effect A screen diagram showing a specific example of the second half of the special button press performance that is executed prior to the hit notification performance. A screen diagram showing a specific example of the second half of the special button press performance that is executed prior to the loss notification performance. A screen diagram showing a specific example of a special button single press effect that is executed prior to the hit notification effect. A screen diagram showing a specific example of the second half of the special button press performance that is executed prior to the loss notification performance. Schematic diagram for explaining the first sub-liquid crystal 51 and the second sub-liquid crystal 52 Explanatory diagram to explain the flow of sub-LCD linked button press effect Screen diagram showing a specific example of the first half of the sub-LCD linked button press effect A screen diagram showing a specific example of the second half of the sub-liquid display linked button press performance (successful performance) A screen diagram showing a specific example of the second half of the sub-liquid display linked button press performance (failure performance) Explanatory diagram for explaining rotation permitted images and rotation restricted images Screen diagram showing a first specific example of rotation performance Explanatory diagram for explaining drawing processing related to rotation effect Screen diagram showing a second specific example of rotation effect Explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area of the main RAM 83 and information stored in each storage area Flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed in the main control board 80 Detailed flowchart of sensor detection processing in step S2 of FIG. 56 Detailed flowchart of special 2 preliminary determination process in step S210 of FIG. 57 Detailed flowchart of special 1 preliminary determination process in step S218 of FIG. 57 Detailed flowchart of special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 56 Detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 60 Detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S309 of FIG. 60 Detailed flowchart of special figure stop processing in step S317 of FIG. 60 Detailed flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 56 (Part 1) Detailed flowchart of the big prize opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 56 (Part 2) Detailed flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 56 (Part 3) Flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed in sub control board 90 Detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 of FIG. 67 Detailed flowchart of pending command reception processing in step S13 of FIG. 68 Flowchart illustrating special drawing 2 pending jackpot suggestion production process Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S16 of FIG. 68 Detailed flowchart of the variable effect pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. 71 Detailed flowchart of the preview effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. 71 Detailed flowchart of special cut-in effect pattern setting process in step S165 of FIG. 73 Detailed flowchart of character standby effect pattern setting process in step S166 of FIG. 73 Detailed flowchart of subjugation effect pattern setting process in step S167 of FIG. 73 Detailed flowchart of the chance effect pattern setting process in step S168 of FIG. 73 Detailed flowchart of the suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S169 of FIG. 73 Detailed flowchart of the production pattern setting process of the first change production/related production in step S173 of FIG. 73 Detailed flowchart of the production pattern setting process of the second change production/premonition production in step S174 of FIG. 73 Detailed flowchart of the production pattern setting process for special button production in step S177 of FIG. 73 Detailed flowchart of the production pattern setting process for the sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press production in step S178 of FIG. 73 Detailed flowchart of the production pattern setting process for stage change production/expected production in step S176 of FIG. 73 Detailed flowchart of related effect pattern setting process in step S172 of FIG. 73 Detailed flowchart of operation reception processing in step S30 of FIG. 67 (Part 1) Detailed flowchart of operation reception processing in step S30 of FIG. 67 (Part 2) Detailed flowchart of operation reception processing in step S30 of FIG. 67 (Part 3) Flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed in the image sound control board 100 Detailed flowchart of image display control processing in step S71 of FIG. 88

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1 according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Configuration example of gaming machine 1]
First, a configuration example of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 2. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 30 and a gaming board 2 attached within the gaming machine frame 30. The gaming machine frame 30 includes a front frame 31 having a decorative surface, a main body frame for attaching the gaming board 2, etc., and an outer frame for fixing the gaming machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. There is. The front frame 31 supports a glass plate arranged parallel to the game board 2 at a predetermined distance, and this glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 3 in which game balls can flow down. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame 31 includes a firing handle 32 for firing game balls, an upper tray 33 for storing game balls to be supplied to a firing device (not shown), and an upper tray. 33 is provided with a lower tray 34 for storing game balls that cannot be stored. When the player grips the firing handle 32 and rotates it clockwise, the game balls stored in the upper tray 33 are guided to the firing device and are fired with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32. After the launched game ball moves along the rail member 4 located on the left side of the game area 3, it is guided to the upper position of the game area 3, and comes into contact with game nails, windmills, etc. provided in the game area 3. As a result, it flows down the game area 3 along the game board 2 while changing its direction of movement.

A ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the end of the rail member 4, and this ball return prevention piece 6 prevents the game ball that has once entered the game area 3 from returning to the firing device side. Further, a stop button is provided in a position close to the firing handle 32, and by operating this stop button, the player can temporarily stop firing the game ball without returning the firing handle 32 to its initial position. It is possible to stop it.

When the player performs "left-handed hitting" by rotating the firing handle 32 by a small rotation angle, the game ball is fired with a relatively weak firing strength, and this game ball flows down the left game area 3L. On the other hand, when the player performs a "right-handed hit" in which the firing handle 32 is rotated by a large rotation angle, the game ball is fired with a relatively strong firing strength, and this game ball is positioned at the upper right of the center decoration 10. After moving along the rail member 4, it flows down the right gaming area 3R.

A first starting port 21, a second starting port 22, an opening/closing member 23, and three general winning ports 24 are provided in the passage path of the game ball in the left gaming area 3L as accessories related to winning and determination. (see Figure 2). In addition, in the passage route of the game ball in the right gaming area 3R, there are the second starting opening 22, the opening/closing member 23, one general winning opening 24, the gate 25, and the first big winning opening as accessories related to winning and judgment. 26, an opening/closing member 27, a second big prize opening 28, and an opening/closing member 29 are provided (see FIG. 2).

In the process of flowing down the game area 3 along the game board 2, the game ball fired from the launcher enters the first starting port 21, the second starting port 22, the general winning port 24, the first big winning port 26, and There is a possibility that a prize will be won in any of the second grand prize openings 28. In this case, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 33 or the lower tray 34 according to the winning spot. For example, each time one game ball enters the first starting port 21, four prize balls are paid out, and each time one game ball enters the second starting port 22, one prize ball is paid out. Five prize balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the general winning hole 24. In addition, 10 prize balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the first grand prize opening 26, and 10 prizes are paid out every time one game ball enters the second grand prize opening 28. The ball is paid out. Note that the game balls that do not win any prizes are discharged from the game area 3 through the discharge port formed at the lower end of the game board 2.

Note that a center decoration body 10 is provided in an opening formed in the center of the game board 2. This center decoration body 10 includes a stage part 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll, and a warp part 12 having warp entrances and warp exits as both ends. A game ball flowing down the left game area 3L may enter the warp section 12 from the warp entrance, and this game ball is discharged from the warp exit and guided to the stage section 11. A guide groove is formed at the center of the left and right sides of the stage section 11 to allow the game balls rolling on the stage section 11 to fall toward the first starting port 21. Therefore, the game ball guided to the stage part 11 via the warp part 12 is more likely to enter the first starting port 21 than the game ball which flows down the left game area 3L without passing through the warp part 12. easy.

The first starting port 21 is a starting area that is always open. The second starting port 22 is a starting area that is normally closed when the opening/closing member 23 as an electric accessory is not operating, and is opened when the opening/closing member 23 is operated. In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 (or the second starting hole 22), it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Then, on a first special symbol display 41 (or a second special symbol display 42), which will be described later, symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and a symbol (a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) indicating the result of the above determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed in which the first jackpot 26 and the second jackpot 28 are opened.

In addition, in the following explanation, the determination executed in response to the winning of a game ball in the first starting opening 21 will be referred to as the "first special symbol determination", and the determination executed in response to the winning of a gaming ball in the second starting opening 22 as "first special symbol determination". The judgment made by the player will be referred to as the "second special symbol determination," and these will be collectively referred to as the "special symbol determination."

The first big winning hole 26 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of special symbol determination. An opening/closing member 27, which is a plate for opening and closing the first large winning hole 26, is provided at the opening of the first large winning hole 26. The first big prize opening 26 is usually closed by the opening/closing member 27 because the opening/closing member 27 maintains a closed position in which the opening/closing member 27 forms the same plane as the game board 2. On the other hand, when the first special symbol (or second special symbol) as a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or second special symbol display 42), the opening/closing member 27 is activated. A jackpot game is executed in which the first jackpot opening 26 is opened. During this jackpot game, a long open round game is performed in which the opening/closing member 27 maintains the open position (see FIG. 2) in which the first big prize opening 26 is opened and then returns to the closed position in which the first big prize opening 26 is closed. be exposed. In addition, in the long open round game in which the first grand prize opening 26 is opened, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enters the first grand prize opening 26, or the first grand prize opening 26 is opened. The game continues until a predetermined time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the game (without a predetermined number of game balls entering the first big prize opening 26). In this way, during the jackpot game, a long-open round game is performed in which the first jackpot 26 is opened for a long time. Therefore, by hitting the right ball during a long open round game in which the first big prize opening 26 is opened long, the player can obtain more prize balls than when no jackpot game is being played. .

The second major winning hole 28 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of special symbol determination. An opening/closing member 29, which is a blade member that opens and closes the second big winning hole 28, is provided at the opening of the second big winning hole 28. The second big prize opening 28 is normally closed by this opening/closing member 29 (see FIG. 4(A)). On the other hand, when the first special symbol (or second special symbol) as a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or second special symbol display 42), the opening/closing member 29 is activated. A jackpot game is executed in which the second jackpot opening 28 is opened. During this jackpot game, the opening/closing member 29 maintains the open position of opening the second big prize opening 28 (see FIGS. 2, 4(B) and (C)), and then closes the second big winning opening 28. A round game is played in which the player returns to the closed position.

As will be detailed later, in the round game in which the second grand prize opening 28 is opened and closed, the second grand prize opening 28 is set such that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can easily enter the second grand prize opening 28. A long-open round game in which the opening 28 is left open for a long time, and a short-open round game in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened for a short time so that it is extremely difficult for a game ball to enter the second big prize opening 28 are prepared. There is. In a long open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened long, 100 prize balls (=10 balls x 10 counts) are paid out by the player hitting right. Therefore, by hitting the right ball during the long open round game in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened long, the player can obtain more prize balls than when no jackpot game is being played. .

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the main CPU 81 determines to execute a jackpot game, the operations of the opening/closing member 27 and the opening/closing member 29 are controlled, allowing the player to obtain game balls as game media. A jackpot game is executed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, regarding the short opening round game in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened for a short time, the opening time, which is the time during which the opening/closing member 29 maintains the open posture in which the second big winning opening 28 is opened, is 0.1. It is set to an extremely short time of seconds. For this reason, even if the player hits the right ball during a short open round game in the second grand prize opening 28, basically the game ball will not enter the second grand prize opening 28, and the prize ball will not be awarded. No payments are made either.

For convenience of explanation, FIG. 2 shows an example in which the opening/closing members 27 and 29 are in an open position to open the big prize openings 26 and 28 when the effect symbols are being displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 70 of the image display device 7. Although the opening/closing members 27 and 29 are not in the open position during the fluctuating display of the performance symbols. In addition, in each round game in the jackpot game, either the first big winning hole 26 or the second big winning hole 28 is used, so in reality, these big winning holes are used at the same time as shown in FIG. It will never be released.

An opening/closing member 23 (see FIG. 2) is arranged close to the second starting port 22. The opening/closing member 23 can change its posture between a closed position in which the opening/closing member 23 closes the second starting port 22 and an open position (see FIG. 2) in which the opening/closing member 23 opens the second starting port 22.

The second starting port 22 is normally closed by an opening/closing member 23. On the other hand, when a game ball hit right by the player passes through the gate 25, a determination is made as to whether or not to open the second starting port 22, although the prize ball is not paid out. Here, if it is determined that the second starting port 22 is to be opened, the opening/closing member 23 maintains the open position for a predetermined period of time and then returns to the closed position a prescribed number of times. In this way, when the opening/closing member 23 is not operating, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the second starting port 22, but when the opening/closing member 23 is activated, the second starting port 22 is in a state where it is easy for the game ball to pass through. Become.

In addition, in the following explanation, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 25 will be referred to as "normal symbol determination."

The general winning hole 24 is always open like the first starting hole 21, and is a winning hole from which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls are paid out when a game ball wins. However, unlike the first starting hole 21 and the like, even if a game ball wins in the general winning hole 24, no judgment is made.

[Example of configuration of main display 40]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the main display 40 in FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 3, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41, a second special symbol display 42, a normal symbol display 43, a first special symbol pending display 44, and a second special symbol display 44. It is configured with a hold display 45, a normal figure hold display 46, a round display 47, a game status display 48, a firing direction indicator 49, and the like.

The first special symbol display 41 is configured with eight LEDs indicated by "i to p", and when the first special symbol determination is performed, the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then the first special symbol is displayed. The determination result of the first special symbol determination is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the determination. Specifically, for example, by sequentially lighting up the eight LEDs described above, a variable display of symbols is performed, and each LED is activated for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 The pattern is stopped and displayed by turning it on (seconds).

The second special symbol display 42 is configured with eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and when the second special symbol determination is performed, the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then the second special symbol is displayed. The determination result of the second special symbol determination is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the determination. Specifically, for example, by sequentially lighting up the eight LEDs mentioned above, a variable display of symbols is performed, and each LED is activated for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 The pattern is stopped and displayed by turning it on (seconds).

The first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol 42) displays a "jackpot" symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination). ``Symbols'' or ``Loss patterns'' that notify you of a loss are stopped and displayed. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, a plurality of different jackpot symbols are prepared depending on the type of jackpot, and when a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the first jackpot 26 and the opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol are opened. A jackpot game is played in which the second jackpot opening 28 is opened.

The normal symbol display 43 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "s to t", and when a normal symbol determination is performed, it displays the symbols in a variable manner and then displays the determination result of the normal symbol determination. The determination result of the normal symbol determination is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol. Specifically, for example, the above two LEDs are alternately lit to display a variable pattern, and each LED is turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a lighting mode according to the determination result of the normal symbol determination. By lighting it up, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state. Here, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 22 is opened by operating the opening/closing member 23 in an opening pattern according to the current game state.

In the following explanation, the symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42 will be referred to as "special symbols," and the symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 43 will be referred to as "normal symbols." shall be called. In addition, the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is referred to as the "first special symbol", and the special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is referred to as the "second special symbol". There may be a distinction.

The first special symbol reservation display 44 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "uv", and displays the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination according to the lighting mode of these LEDs. The second special symbol reservation display 45 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "w~x", and displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination according to the lighting mode of these LEDs. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reservations is set to "4". The normal symbol holding display 46 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "qr", and displays the number of pending normal symbol determinations depending on the lighting mode of these LEDs.

The round display 47 is used when a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and in a jackpot game that is executed according to a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol. Displays the number of rounds indicating how many round games will be executed. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a jackpot game including three round games is executed, a jackpot game including five round games is executed, and a jackpot game including a ten round game. There are cases where this is executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the round indicator 47 is configured to include a 3R LED, a 5R LED, and a 10R LED, and the number of rounds is indicated by lighting any of these LEDs. be notified.

The gaming status display 48 is configured with three LEDs indicated by "a1 to a3", and displays the gaming status of the gaming machine 1 according to the lighting manner of these LEDs. The firing direction indicator 49 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "y to z", and displays the firing direction of the game ball depending on the lighting mode of these LEDs. That is, it displays whether the player should be hitting left-handed or right-handed.

[Example of configuration of presentation means included in gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2, the game board 2 and the front frame 31 include a decorative member 13, a movable decorative member 14, a frame lamp 37, a speaker 38, a performance display device 125, A first special figure holding display 126, a second special figure holding display 127, a first start lamp 215, etc. are provided. Further, an image display device 7 is provided behind the game board 2.

The decorative member 13 has a built-in panel lamp 5 (see FIG. 5) that includes a plurality of LEDs, and can change the lighting or blinking pattern of each LED, or change the emitted color of each LED. Various effects are created using light.

The movable decorative member 14 is arranged in front of the image display device 7 and behind the decorative member 13. This movable decorative member 14 has a plurality of LEDs built in, and the movable decorative member 14 performs a predetermined effect by the movement of the movable decorative member 14 itself and/or by light. In this embodiment, a predetermined space in which the movable decorative member 14 can operate is provided between the game board 2 and the display screen 70 of the image display device 7, and the movable decorative member 14 moves along the display screen 70. It is configured to be able to move up and down. The movable decorative member 14 is normally placed at an initial position (see FIG. 2), where most of the movable decorative member 14 is hidden behind the decorative member 13 and only the lower end of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. On the other hand, the movable decorative member 14 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern and displays the display screen 70 when the image display device 7 or the speaker 38 is used to execute a preview performance with relatively high jackpot reliability. It falls into a working position that covers most of the area.

The frame lamp 37 is configured with a plurality of LEDs built into various parts of the front frame 31, and the lighting and blinking pattern of each LED can be changed, and the emitted light color of each LED can be changed. Various effects are performed using light.

The image display device 7 is a liquid crystal display device that displays an effect image on its display screen 70, and the player can view the display screen 70 through an opening formed in the center of the game board 2. This display screen 70 includes performance symbols, characters and items that notify the judgment result of the special symbol judgment, and pending images (pending A performance image including various display objects such as a variation suggestion image (the icon) indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is displayed. Note that the image display device 7 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be another image display device such as an EL display device as long as it is capable of displaying an effect image.

The speaker 38 outputs performance sounds such as music, voices, and sound effects in synchronization with or asynchronously with the display performance performed on the display screen 70 to perform sound performance.

The performance display device 125 is configured with two LEDs, and displays the symbols in a variable manner as the special symbols and production symbols are displayed, and performs special symbol judgment as the special symbols and production symbols stop displaying. A symbol notifying the judgment result is displayed in a stopped state. This effect display 125 notifies the judgment result of the special symbol judgment by the combination of lighting/unlighting of each LED and the lighting color.

The performance first special figure holding display 126 is configured with two LEDs, and depending on the combination of lighting and extinguishing of each LED, the same number as that displayed on the first special figure holding display 44 is displayed. 1 Displays the number of pending special symbol judgments. The production second special figure holding display 127 is configured with two LEDs, and depending on the combination of lighting and extinguishing of each LED, the same number as that displayed on the second special figure holding display 45 is displayed. 2 Displays the number of pending special symbol judgments.

Furthermore, a first starting port lamp 215 (see FIG. 2) is provided directly below the first starting port 21 on the game board 2. The first starting port lamp 215 is configured with one color LED out of a large number of color LEDs that make up the panel lamp 5, and is a semi-transparent decoration provided directly below the first starting port 21. covered with parts. Therefore, when the first starting port lamp 215 emits light, it is possible to visually recognize the light through the decorative member, and the first starting port lamp 215 is illuminated by the color LED that constitutes the first starting port lamp 215. By changing the pattern (lit, flashing, blinking) and emitted light color, various effects can be created using light.

[Example of configuration of input means included in gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the front frame 31 is provided with a first performance button 35 and a second performance button 36 as input means through which input can be made by the player. The first performance button 35 is a push button that is pressed by the player to input operation information. The second performance button 36 is a push button for the player to input operation information by grasping the grip part of the second performance button 36 and pushing the second performance button 36. In the gaming machine 1, a performance may be performed depending on the operation of the first performance button 35 or the second performance button 36.

The first performance button 35 includes a pressing part that is pressed by the player, a first performance button body that supports the pressing part so that it can move up and down, and a coil spring that biases the pressing part upward. has been done. Since the depressed portion of the first production button 35 is urged upward by the elastic force of the coil spring, it is normally placed at a predetermined initial position. On the other hand, when the player presses down the push-down part with his/her hand, the coil spring is compressed and the push-down part moves to a push-down position below the initial position. That is, the pressed part of the first performance button 35 moves downward. When the player releases the pressed part, the pressed part returns from the pressed position to the initial position due to the increased elastic force of the coil spring as the pressed part is pushed down from the initial position to the pressed position. That is, the pressed part of the first effect button 35 moves upward. Therefore, the operating direction of the first effect button 35 includes both downward and upward directions, and when the player performs intermittent inputs (so-called "repeated hits") to the first effect button 35, The pressed part of the first performance button 35 moves back and forth (up and down) between the initial position and the pressed position.

Although not shown in FIG. 1, in addition to the first effect button 35 and the second effect button 36, an operating lever 98 is provided on the front frame 31. This operating lever 98 includes a grip portion and a lever button. The grip part can be tilted in any one of a plurality of directions including the front side, the back side, the left side, and the right side while being gripped by the player. The lever button is provided at the upper end of the grip, and when the player presses the lever button with his/her thumb while tilting the grip in either direction, operation information indicating that one of the directions has been selected is generated. (direction selection information) can be input. Further, by pressing the lever button without tilting the gripping portion in any direction from the initial posture, it is possible to input operation information indicating that no direction has been selected (direction non-selection information).

Note that the configuration of the input means is not limited to that exemplified in this embodiment, and may be other configurations. That is, for example, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the gaming machine 1 includes three input means, but the number of input means may be one, two, or four or more. In addition, the input means is not limited to push buttons and operation levers, but other input means such as a touch panel that can detect a player's touch operation, an optical sensor that can detect a player's hand held over the display screen 70, etc. It may be.

[Example of internal configuration of second prize opening 28]
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening/closing control of the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287. An opening/closing member 29 that opens and closes the second big winning hole 28 is provided at the opening of the second big winning hole 28 (see FIGS. 1 and 4(A)). In addition, as illustrated in FIGS. 4(A) to 4(C), inside the second big winning hole 28, a second big winning hole sensor 281, a V winning hole sensor 283, an outlet sensor 284, a slide member 285 etc. are provided.

The second big winning hole sensor 281 detects the game balls that have entered the second big winning hole 28, and in this embodiment, every time a game ball passes through the second big winning hole sensor 281, 10 game balls are detected. The prize ball is paid out. The V winning hole sensor 283 detects the passage of a game ball to the V winning hole 287 (an example of a special winning area) defined by the V winning hole sensor 283. The discharge port sensor 284 detects passage of the game ball to the discharge port defined by the discharge port sensor 284. The slide member 285 guides the game ball that has passed through the second large winning hole sensor 281 to the V winning hole 287 or the discharge port, and is slidable in the left and right direction in FIG. 4 (the width direction of the gaming machine 1). It is configured. 4(A) and (B) illustrate a state in which the slide member 285 is placed at the right position that closes the V winning hole 287, and FIGS. The state where it is arranged at the left position where the V winning a prize opening 287 is opened is illustrated.

When a jackpot game is not being played or during a long open round game in which the first jackpot 26 is opened long, the second jackpot 28 is closed by the opening/closing member 29, and the V winning slot 287 is closed. It is closed by a slide member 285 (see FIG. 4(A)). On the other hand, in a round game in which the second big winning hole 28 is opened and closed, the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 can be in the following state.

Specifically, in a round game in which the second grand prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in FIGS. 4(A) and 4(B), the opening/closing member is 29 may rotate and the second big prize opening 28 may be in an open state. In this case, although the second grand prize opening 28 is open, the V winning opening 287 is still blocked by the slide member 285, so even if the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 28, the game ball It does not pass through the V prize opening 287 but passes through the discharge port sensor 284.

In addition, in a round game in which the second grand prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in FIGS. There is a case where the player moves from the position to the left position and enters the open state in which the V winning hole 287 is opened. In this case, since both the second grand winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are open, the game ball that enters the second grand winning hole 28 passes through the V winning hole 287 (that is, the V winning hole (detected by sensor 283).

The V winning hole sensor 283 functions as a so-called probability change switch, and as mentioned above, when the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are both open, the game ball wins a V prize. In the case (the game ball is detected by the V winning hole sensor 283), after the jackpot game in which the V winning prize has been completed, the game will be controlled in a "probability variable gaming state" which will be described later. On the other hand, if the game ball does not win a V prize when both the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are in the open state, after the jackpot game ends, the "time saving game state" described later is entered. The game will be controlled by

In addition, in a round game in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in FIG. 4(D), the opening/closing member 29 is not operating, so the second big prize opening 28 is in a closed state. , and the slide member 285 may move from the right position to the left position and the V winning opening 287 may be in an open state. In this case, although the V winning hole 287 is open, the second big winning hole 28 is in a state where it is difficult to enter, so the game ball does not enter into the second big winning hole 28.

In addition, in the transparent member provided at the position corresponding to the area in which the second big winning hole sensor 281, V winning hole sensor 283, discharge port sensor 284, slide member 285, etc. are included, it corresponds to the V winning hole sensor 283. The letter "V" is written in the position shown in Figure 2. Therefore, the player can easily identify the position of the V winning hole sensor 283 (the position of the V winning hole 287) by looking at the letter "V".

[Configuration of control device included in gaming machine 1]
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.
A control device for controlling the operation of the gaming machine 1 is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2. As illustrated in FIG. 5, the control device of the gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 that controls the progress of games using game balls, and a subsystem that centrally controls the performance based on information from the main control board 80. It is comprised of a control board 90, an image and sound control board 100 that controls effects using images and sounds, a lamp control board 120 that controls effects using various lamps and movable members, and the like. In this embodiment, the main control board 80 functions as a game control unit that controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control board 90, the image and sound control board 100, and the lamp control board 120 function as a performance control unit that controls the performance. . Note that the configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the sub-control board 90, the image-acoustic control board 100, and the lamp control board 120 may be configured as one board.

<Example of configuration of main control board 80>
The main control board 80 includes a main CPU 81, a main ROM 82, and a main RAM 83. The main CPU 81 performs various calculation processes related to determination and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on programs stored in the main ROM 82 and the like. The main RAM 83 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 81 executes the above programs, and as a work area for data processing.

The main control board 80 includes a first starting hole sensor 211, a second starting hole sensor 221, a gate sensor 251, a first big winning hole sensor 261, a second big winning hole sensor 281, a V winning hole sensor 283, and a discharge port sensor. 284, general winning hole sensor 241, second starting hole solenoid 222, first big winning hole solenoid 262, second big winning hole solenoid 282, and V winning hole solenoid 286 are connected. Note that the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes four general winning opening sensors 241 corresponding to the four general winning openings 24, but in FIG. 5, for convenience of explanation, only one general winning opening sensor 241 is provided. It is written.

The first starting port sensor 211 detects that a game ball has entered the first starting port 21 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The second starting port sensor 221 detects that a game ball has entered the second starting port 22 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The gate sensor 251 detects passage of a game ball to the gate 25 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The first big winning hole sensor 261 detects that a game ball has won in the first big winning hole 26, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The second big winning hole sensor 281 detects that a game ball has won in the second big winning hole 28, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The V winning hole sensor 283 detects passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 287 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The discharge port sensor 284 detects passage of a game ball to the discharge port and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The general winning hole sensor 241 detects that a game ball has won in the general winning hole 24, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80.

The second starting port solenoid 222 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 23 so as to be able to transmit driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 23 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to perform the second starting. The mouth 22 is opened and closed. The first big prize opening solenoid 262 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 27 so as to be able to transmit driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 27 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to The big prize opening 26 is opened and closed. The second big prize opening solenoid 282 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 29 so as to be able to transmit a driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 29 based on the control signal from the main control board 80. The grand prize opening 28 is opened and closed. The V winning opening solenoid 286 is an electric solenoid connected to the sliding member 285 so as to be able to transmit driving force, and operates the sliding member 285 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to open the V winning opening 287. Open and close.

Although not shown in the figure, the game machine 1 supplies game balls to the upper tray 33 or the lower tray 34 by controlling a drive motor that sends game balls from a ball tank provided on the back side of the game board 2. Equipped with a payout control board. When the main CPU 81 receives a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 211, the second starting hole sensor 221, the first big winning hole sensor 261, the second big winning hole sensor 281, or the general winning hole sensor 241, The payout control board is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the location where the game balls have won, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on information from the payout control board.

Further, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers as acquired information at the timing when the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 211 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Further, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers as acquired information at the timing when the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 221 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Here, the various random numbers are specifically jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuating pattern random numbers.

The jackpot random number is a random number for determining jackpot or loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game, etc.) when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform a reach effect or a no reach effect when it is determined that the game is a loss. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The main CPU 81 acquires these random numbers at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 (or the second starting hole 22), and first, the acquired jackpot random number is converted into a predetermined random number stored in the main ROM 82. Based on whether or not the value matches the numerical value (winning value), it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game. Here, if it is determined to execute a jackpot game based on the jackpot random number matching the winning value, the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number is stored in the main ROM 82 (compared with the symbol random number). ) The type of jackpot is determined based on which random number of predetermined random numbers matches.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines not to execute the jackpot game based on the fact that the obtained jackpot random number does not match the winning value, the reach random number obtained together with the jackpot random number is stored in the main ROM 82. Based on whether or not the random number matches a predetermined random number (compared with a reach random number), it is determined whether to perform a reach effect or a no reach effect. In addition, the main CPU 81 determines a variation pattern of the special symbol when displaying the special symbol in a variable manner, based on the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, regardless of the result of the determination based on the jackpot random number. This will determine the variation time of the special symbol.

When the main CPU 81 determines to execute a jackpot game and determines the type of jackpot, the main CPU 81 opens and closes the first jackpot 26 via the first jackpot solenoid 262 (opening/closing member 27 ), controls the opening/closing of the second big winning hole 28 (operation of the opening/closing member 29 ) via the second big winning hole solenoid 282 , and controls the opening/closing of the V winning hole 287 via the V winning hole solenoid 286 . By controlling (the operation of the slide member 285), a jackpot game corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed.

Further, the main CPU 81 acquires a random number (normal symbol random number) at the timing when the detection signal from the gate sensor 251 is input, and executes normal symbol determination using the acquired normal symbol random number. If it is determined that the second starting port 22 is to be opened as a result of this normal symbol determination, by controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 22 (operation of the opening/closing member 23) via the second starting port solenoid 222, An auxiliary game to open the second starting port 22 is executed.

The main control board 80 also includes a first special symbol display 41, a second special symbol display 42, a normal symbol display 43, a first special symbol pending display 44, a second special symbol pending display 45, and a normal symbol display 43. A figure holding display 46, a round display 47, a game status display 48, and a firing direction display 49 are connected. The main CPU 81 controls these displays 41 to 49 forming the main display 40 to execute the display processing described above based on FIG. 3.

<Configuration example of sub-control board 90>
The sub control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91 , a sub ROM 92 , a sub RAM 93 , and an RTC (real time clock) 94 . The sub CPU 91 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the effects based on a program stored in the sub ROM 92. The sub RAM 93 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub CPU 91 executes the above programs, and as a work area for data processing. The RTC 94 measures the current date and time (date and time).

A first performance button detection sensor 96, a second performance button detection sensor 97, and an operation lever 98 are connected to the sub-control board 90. The first performance button detection sensor 96 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating this to the sub-control board 90 when the first performance button 35 (see FIG. 1) is operated. The second performance button detection sensor 97 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating this to the sub-control board 90 when the second performance button 36 (see FIG. 1) is operated. The operating lever 98 includes a detection sensor (not shown) that detects the direction in which the grip is tilted, and the lever button, and when the operating lever 98 is operated, operation information indicating the fact is generated. The direction selection information and direction non-selection information are output to the sub control board 90.

The sub CPU 91 sets performance contents (performance patterns) based on game information (various commands) related to special symbol determination, normal symbol determination, jackpot game, etc. transmitted from the main control board 80. At this time, input of operation information from the first effect button 35 or the second effect button 36 may be accepted, and the effect contents may be set in accordance with the operation information. The sub CPU 91 transmits a command to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 to instruct execution of the set performance contents.

<Configuration example of image sound control board 100>
Although not shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a first sub-liquid crystal 51 and a second sub-liquid crystal 52 in addition to the image display device 7 as image display means. The image and sound control board 100 controls the image display by the image display device 7, the first sub-liquid crystal 51, and the second sub-liquid crystal 52), and controls the output of sound effects by the speaker 38. In this embodiment, the image and sound control board 100 includes an image and sound control CPU 101, a control ROM 102, a control RAM 103, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 104, a CGROM 105, a VRAM 106, and an audio DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 10. 7, audio ROM108, SDRAM109, and an amplifier 110.

The control ROM 102 is composed of a mask ROM, and stores various tables such as a control program for the image-acoustic control CPU 101, a display list generation program for generating a display list, and a display list generation table used in the process of generating a display list. is memorized. Here, the display list consists of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing in frame units, including the type of image to draw, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, display priority, display magnification, and rotation. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The control RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the image-acoustic control CPU 101 executes the control program, and as a work area for data processing.

The image sound control CPU 101 transmits the image data stored in the CGROM 105 to the VDP 104 to the image display device 7 based on the control program, various tables such as the display list creation table, commands received from the sub-control board 90, etc. Also, instructions are given to cause the first sub-liquid crystal 51 and second sub-liquid crystal 52 to display. This instruction is mainly performed by outputting a display list. Further, the image sound control CPU 101 instructs the sound DSP 107 to output sound data stored in the sound ROM 108 from the speaker 38.

The CGROM 105 stores performance data necessary for executing variable performances associated with variable display of special symbols, performances associated with jackpot games, and the like. This CGROM 105 is composed of a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, etc., and includes sprite data (one image data) consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 x 32 pixels), and a plurality of image data. It compresses and stores movie data, etc. consisting of a collection of files. Note that the pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 105 stores, without compression, palette data in which color number information specifying a color number is associated with display color information for actually displaying the color.

Note that only part of the image data stored in the CGROM 105 may be compressed. Further, as a method for compressing movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 106 is composed of an SRAM that can write and read image data at high speed, and although not shown in the figure, it is composed of a display list storage area, an expansion storage area, a frame buffer, etc. ing.

The display list storage area is for temporarily storing the display list output from the image and sound control CPU 101. The expansion storage area stores image data that has been read out from the CGROM 105 and expanded. The frame buffer is used for drawing and displaying image data displayed on the display screen 70, the first sub-screen 510 which is the display screen of the first sub-liquid crystal 51, and the second sub-screen 520 which is the display screen of the second sub-liquid crystal 52. This is a shared frame buffer.

The VDP 104 expands the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 105 and stores the expanded image data in an expanded storage area. Further, the VDP 104 performs drawing processing on the frame buffer based on the display list stored in the display list storage area, using the image data stored in the expansion storage area. The VDP 104 also generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the frame buffer, and transmits the generated RGB signal to the image display device 7, the first sub-liquid crystal 51, and the second sub-liquid crystal. 52.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes, in addition to the image display device 7, a first sub-liquid crystal 51 and a second sub-liquid crystal 52 whose display screens are smaller than the display screen 70 of the image display device 7. These first sub-liquid crystal 51 and second sub-liquid crystal 52 are configured to be movable along the display screen 70 in front of the display screen 70. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the first sub-liquid crystal 51 and the second sub-liquid crystal 52 work together to prompt the player to repeatedly press the first effect button 35, and to prompt the player to repeatedly press the first effect button 35. A sub-liquid crystal interlocking button continuous press effect is executed to perform a corresponding operation corresponding effect. This sub-liquid crystal linked button press effect will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 46 to 50.

An audio ROM 108, an SDRAM 109, and an amplifier 110 are connected to the audio DSP 107. The audio ROM 108 stores various types of audio data regarding songs, voices, sound effects, warning sounds, and the like. The SDRAM 109 is used as a work area for data processing, etc. by the audio DSP 107. The audio DSP 107 reads audio data corresponding to an instruction from the image audio control CPU 101 from the audio ROM 108 to the SDRAM 109, executes data processing, and outputs the audio data after data processing to the speaker 38 (via the amplifier 110). The amplifier 110 adjusts the volume according to an instruction regarding the volume obtained from the image sound control CPU 101 via the audio DSP 107 and causes the speaker 38 to output audio data.

Note that in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the VDP is responsible for drawing management and the audio DSP is responsible for sound management, but in other embodiments, a configuration in which the VDP is responsible for both drawing management and sound management is adopted. You may. In this case, there is no need to separately provide an audio DSP.

<Configuration example of lamp control board 120>
The lamp control board 120 includes a lamp CPU 121, a lamp ROM 122, and a lamp RAM 123. A figure hold display 127 and a sub liquid crystal drive control circuit 57 are connected. The lamp ROM 122 stores programs executed by the lamp CPU 121, light emission pattern data, operation pattern data, and the like. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating the respective light emission patterns of the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the LED built in the movable decorative member 14, and the like. The first sub-liquid crystal 51 and the second sub-liquid crystal 52 described above are both arranged in front of the display screen 70 and configured to be movable along the display screen 70, and the movement pattern data is based on the movable decorative member. 14, the first sub-liquid crystal 51, the second sub-liquid crystal 52, etc.

Based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 122, the lamp CPU 121 displays the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, the production display 125, the production first special figure reservation display 126, and the production second special figure reservation. Performs arithmetic processing when controlling the operation of the display 127 and the like.

The lamp CPU 121 reads out the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 from among the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 to the lamp RAM 123, and reads out the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 to the lamp RAM 123, and reads out the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub control board 90, Controls the light emission of the LED built in 14. The lamp CPU 121 also reads out the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 from among the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 to the lamp RAM 123, and controls the motor for operating the movable decorative member 14. Control the drive. The sub-liquid crystal drive control circuit 57 is a dedicated circuit that controls the driving of the first sub-liquid crystal motor and the second sub-liquid crystal motor, which are connected to the first sub-liquid crystal 51 and the second sub-liquid crystal 52 so as to be able to transmit drive. The lamp CPU 121 controls the driving of the first sub-liquid crystal motor and the second sub-liquid crystal motor based on the operation pattern data read from the lamp ROM 122.

Further, the lamp CPU 121 controls the variable display and static display of symbols on the effect display 125 based on commands from the sub-control board 90. In addition, based on the command from the sub-control board 90, the lamp CPU 121 displays the number of reservations related to the first special symbol determination on the performance first special symbol reservation display 126, and displays the number of reservations related to the first special symbol determination on the performance second special symbol reservation display 127. 2. Controls the display of the number of reservations related to special symbol determination.

[About gaming status]
Next, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the game is controlled in one of three gaming states: "normal gaming state", "variable probability gaming state", and "time-saving gaming state".

In the "normal game state", special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state where the probability of executing a jackpot game is relatively low, and a support function (so-called This is a gaming state in which a function called "Electric Support" etc.) is not provided. In the normal game state, the probability of executing a jackpot game based on special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/210) (see FIG. 6(A)). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 22 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a relatively long time (for example, 20 seconds). , and when it is determined that the second starting port 22 is to be opened, the opening time of the second starting port 22 is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 seconds x 1 time).

The "variable probability game state" is a game state in which special symbol determination is performed in a high probability state where the probability of executing a jackpot game is relatively high, and the support function described above is provided. That is, in the variable probability game state, the probability of determining that a jackpot game will be executed by special symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 1/60) (see FIG. 6(A)). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 22 is determined to be opened by normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 11/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a relatively short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and the opening time of the second starting port 22 when it is determined to open the second starting port 22 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.5 seconds x 3 times).

The "time saving game state" is a game state in which special symbol determination is performed in the above-mentioned low probability state and an electric chew support function is provided. That is, in the time-saving game state, the probability that it is determined that a jackpot game will be executed by special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/210). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 11/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a relatively short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and the opening time of the second starting port 12 when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.5 seconds x 3 times).

Comparing these gaming states regarding the variation time of special symbols, we find that the variation time of special symbols in the "probable variable gaming state" and "time-saving gaming state" is relatively longer than that in the "normal gaming state". It is easy to set it to a short period of time. In addition, as shown in the explanation of each game state, the probability that it will be determined that a special game will be executed (jackpot probability), the probability that it will be determined that the second starting port 22 will be opened (probability of winning in normal symbol determination), and the fluctuation of normal symbols. It goes without saying that the time and the opening time of the second starting port 22 are merely examples, and other probabilities and times may be used.

In addition, in the following explanation, the state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 22 because the support function is provided will be referred to as the "high base state", and the state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 22 because the support function is not provided will be referred to as the "high base state". A state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 22 is referred to as a "low base state." In this embodiment, the "normal gaming state" corresponds to the low base state, and the "probability variable gaming state" and the "time-saving gaming state" correspond to the high base state.

[Game flow]
A game ball hit to the right by a player may not win a prize in the first starting hole 21 but can win a prize in the second starting hole 22. However, in the low base state, the second starting port 22 is difficult to open, and even if it is opened, the opening time is short. Therefore, when the game is controlled in a low base state (which corresponds to the "normal gaming state" in this embodiment), the player plays the game by hitting the left hand aiming at the first starting opening 21. Become.

When a game ball hit to the left enters the first starting slot 21 during the normal gaming state, the main CPU 81 executes the first special symbol determination, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41. After that, the jackpot symbol or the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination.

Here, if the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game will not be played and the gaming state will not change. On the other hand, when a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a jackpot game in which a predetermined number of round games are played according to the jackpot symbol is executed, and after the jackpot game is finished, a "probable variable game state" or a "time-saving game" is executed. The game will be controlled by the state.

In addition, when the gaming state shifts to the "probability variable gaming state" or "time-saving gaming state" triggered by the end of the jackpot game, that is, when the gaming state shifts from the low base state to the high base state, the game ball to the second starting port 22 Due to the above-mentioned support function that makes it easier to win a prize, it is easier to win a game ball in the second starting hole 22 than in the first starting hole 21. Therefore, when the game is controlled in a high base state, the player plays the game by hitting the ball to the right, aiming at the second starting opening 22. In addition, when both the right of first special symbol determination and the right of second special symbol determination are reserved, the second special symbol determination is executed with priority over the first special symbol determination. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the variable probability game state or the time saving game state, the second special symbol determination is basically performed.

As will be described in detail later, the jackpot symbols that are stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 in the variable probability game state or the time saving game state include a variable probability jackpot symbol and a normal jackpot symbol, and after the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability game The game is controlled in the state or time-saving game state. Note that the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured as a so-called ST machine. Therefore, if a jackpot cannot be won in the variable probability gaming state or the time saving gaming state, the gaming state will be returned from the variable probability gaming state (or the time saving gaming state) to the normal gaming state.

[About special symbol determination using random numbers]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a determination process using jackpot random numbers and symbol random numbers will be described. Here, FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining jackpot random numbers and symbol random numbers. Note that in the explanatory diagrams for each random number illustrated in FIG. 6 and subsequent figures, the possible range of the random number is set to be smaller than the actual range in order to facilitate explanation. In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the first starting port 21 (or the second starting port 22), the main CPU 81 obtains information such as a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variable pattern random number.

<Processing based on jackpot random numbers>
The jackpot random numbers illustrated in FIG. 6(A) are random numbers used in the jackpot determination process (step S308 in FIG. 60) to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot game, and the probability that the jackpot game will be executed is A low probability state with a relatively low probability and a high probability state with a relatively high probability of executing a jackpot game are individually set.

In this embodiment, regarding the low probability state, as illustrated in the upper part of FIG. and are stored in the main ROM 82. The main CPU 81 controls the first starting port 21 (or the second starting port 22) when the game is controlled in a low probability state (in this embodiment, "normal gaming state" and "time saving gaming state" correspond to this state). ), when the jackpot random number obtained in response to the game ball passing matches any of these four winning values, it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed. On the other hand, when the game is controlled in a low probability state, if the acquired jackpot random number matches any of the 836 failure values, it is determined that the jackpot game will not be executed.

In addition, regarding the high probability state (in this embodiment, "variable probability gaming state" corresponds to this), as illustrated in the lower part of FIG. 6(A), 14 winning values from "0" to "13", 826 rejected values from "14" to "839" are stored in the main ROM 82. When the game is controlled in a high probability state, the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot random numbers obtained in response to the game ball passing through the first starting port 21 (or the second starting port 22) are used to determine these 14 winnings. If it matches any of the values, it is determined that a jackpot game will be executed. On the other hand, when the game is controlled in a high probability state, if the acquired jackpot random number matches any of the 826 failure values, it is determined that the jackpot game will not be executed.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number can take on 840 values from "0" to "839" in both the low probability state and the high probability state (see FIG. 6(A)). Therefore, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/210 (=4/840), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/60 (=14/840).

<Processing based on pattern random numbers>
When the main CPU 81 determines to execute a jackpot game, the main CPU 81 determines which random number among the random numbers set in advance for each type of jackpot matches the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used for the judgment. Determine the type of jackpot based on. In the gaming machine 1, different jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42) depending on the type of jackpot. Therefore, the type of jackpot is determined by selecting the first special symbol (or second special symbol) to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or second special symbol display 42) as the jackpot symbol. That will happen.

(Types of jackpots related to the first special symbol determination)
As illustrated in FIG. 6(B), in this embodiment, the types of jackpots (jackpot symbols) that can be won in response to the game ball hitting the first starting port 21 during the normal gaming state are as follows: Two types are available: "5R fixed variation" and "5R normal".

“5R Guaranteed Variation” (see FIG. 6(B)) is one long opening in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened long in response to the jackpot symbol X1 being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41. A total of 5 long games including a round game (1st round round game) and 4 long open round games (2nd to 5th round round games) in which the first big prize opening 26 is opened long. This is a jackpot in which a jackpot game consisting of open round games is executed.

If this "5R probability change" is won, both the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are opened long in the first round game. Therefore, the player can pass the game ball through the V-winning hole 287 by simply hitting the ball to the right, and even if one game ball is detected by the V-winning hole sensor 283 during the first round of playing, If detected, the game will be controlled in the "probability variable gaming state" after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game related to "5R probability variation", the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) and the variation of the second special symbol (or first special symbol) are performed in the "probability variation gaming state". The number of times the display is executed (ST number in FIG. 6(B)) is set to 100, and if no jackpot is determined during the process, the variable probability game is played until the special symbol determination is executed 100 times. The condition continues. If all of these 100 special symbol determinations are losses, then the game is controlled in the "normal game state".

On the other hand, "5R normal" (see FIG. 6(B)) is a one-time operation in which the second big prize opening 28 is briefly opened in response to the jackpot symbol X2 being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41. A total of 5 times, including a short open round game (1st round round game) and 4 long open round games (2nd to 5th round round games) in which the first big prize opening 26 is opened long. This is a jackpot in which a jackpot game consisting of round games is executed. If this "5R normal" is won, the prize ball will not be paid out because basically no game ball enters the second grand prize opening 28 in the first round game. Therefore, in the case of winning "5R normal", the number of long open round games executed during the jackpot game is 4, and it can be said that it is actually a jackpot of 4 rounds.

If this "5R normal" is won, a short open round game in which the second big prize opening 28 is briefly opened is executed as the first round game, as described above. Therefore, the game ball does not win a V prize during the jackpot game related to the 5R normal, and after the jackpot game related to the "5R normal" ends, the game is controlled in the "time-saving gaming state". In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the time saving number for "5R normal" is set to 100 times, and the jackpot symbol X2 (notifying that "5R normal" has been won) is displayed on the first special symbol display 41. When a jackpot game is executed in response to the stop display, if no jackpot is determined during the jackpot game, 100 second special symbol determinations (or first special symbol determinations) are executed after the jackpot game ends. The game is controlled in a time-saving gaming state until the game is played.

By the way, even though you have acquired the right to control the game in the "probable variation gaming state" after the jackpot game ends by winning "5R fixed variation", for example, due to a ball jam in the game area 3, etc., one round It is conceivable that a situation may occur in which the game ball is not detected by the V winning a prize hole sensor 283 during the eye round game. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if such a situation occurs, in order to create a situation in which the player can easily aim for a jackpot after the end of the jackpot game, the game machine 1 according to the "5R probability change" If the game ball does not win a V prize during the first round of play, the second special symbol judgment (or first special symbol judgment) will be made 100 times in the same way as after the end of the jackpot game related to "5R normal". The game is controlled in a time-saving gaming state until the game is executed.

In this embodiment, the main ROM 82 stores a random number value for determining the type of jackpot when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment in the normal gaming state is a jackpot. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 6(B), 50 random numbers are stored for "5R definite variation" and 50 random numbers are stored for "5R normal". There is.

In this embodiment, the possible range of the pattern random number is set to 100 from "0" to "99", and the jackpot random number is based on the jackpot random number obtained in response to the game ball winning in the first starting hole 21. If it is determined to be a jackpot, "5R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 50% (=50/100 x 100) as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, and "5R normal" is selected at a rate of 50% (=50/100 x 100). =50/100×100) (see FIG. 6(B)).

Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, the probability that the jackpot symbol X1 indicating "5R probability variation" will be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and the probability that the jackpot symbol X1 indicating "5R normal" will be displayed are determined. The probability that the jackpot symbol X2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is 50%.

In this way, if the result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "3R Probable Variable A" or "3R Normal", in either case, after the jackpot game ends, the player will be in a high base state. , a right-handed game aiming at the gate 25 and the second starting port 22 will be played.

(Type of jackpot related to second special symbol determination)
As illustrated in FIG. 6(C), the types of jackpots related to the second special symbol determination executed in response to the game ball entering the second starting hole 22 are "10R probability variation", "3R probability variation", and "3R probability variation". ” and “3R normal” are available.

Here, "10R probability change" (see FIG. 6(C)) is generated in response to the stop display of the jackpot symbol Y1 on the second special symbol display 42. ) in a long open round game (1st round round game), and 9 long open round games in which the first big prize opening 26 is opened long (2nd round to 10th round round game) ), and a jackpot game consisting of a total of 10 long open round games is executed.

“3R Guaranteed Hen” (see FIG. 6(C)) is a program that causes the second big winning hole 28 (and V winning hole 287) to lengthen in response to the jackpot symbol Y2 being stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42. One long open round game (first round round game) in which the first big prize opening 26 is opened long, two long open round games (second to third round round game) in which the first big prize opening 26 is opened long, This is a jackpot game in which a jackpot game consisting of a total of three long open round games is executed.

In this way, when winning the "10R probability variation" or "3R probability variation", both the second grand prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 are opened long during the first round of the game. Therefore, as long as the player hits right during the first round game related to these jackpot games, the player can easily acquire the right to play the game in the "probability variable gaming state" after the jackpot game ends. be able to.

“3R Normal” (see FIG. 6(C)) shortens the second big winning hole 28 (and V winning hole 287) in response to the jackpot symbol Y3 being stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42. One short open round game to open (first round round game), and two long open round games to open the first big prize opening 26 long (second to third round round game), This is a jackpot game in which a jackpot game consisting of a total of three long open round games is executed. If this "3R normal" is won, the prize ball will not be paid out because basically no game ball enters the second grand prize opening 28 in the first round game. Therefore, when winning the "3R normal", the number of long open round games executed during the jackpot game is two, and it can be said that it is actually a two-round jackpot.

In addition, if the "3R normal" is won, a short opening round game in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened for a short period of time is executed as the first round game as described above. Therefore, the game ball will not win a V prize during the jackpot game related to 3R normal, and after the jackpot game related to ``3R normal'' ends, the game will be controlled in the ``time-saving gaming state.'' This is the same as in the case of winning the above "5R normal".

In this embodiment, a random number value for determining the type of jackpot when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot is stored in the main ROM 82. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 6(C), 80 random numbers are stored for "10R probability variation", 10 random numbers are stored for "3R probability variation", and " Ten random numbers are stored for "3R Normal".

In this embodiment, as mentioned above, the possible range of the pattern random number is set to 100 from "0" to "99", and the number is acquired in response to a game ball entering the second starting hole 21. When a jackpot is determined based on the jackpot random number, "10R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 80% (=80/100 x 100) as the type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination, and "3R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 80% (=80/100 x 100). They are selected at a rate of 10% (=10/100×100), and “3R normal” is selected at a rate of 10% (=10/100×100) (see FIG. 6(C)).

Therefore, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, the probability that the jackpot symbol Y1 indicating "10R probability variation" will be stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is 80%, and "3R The probability that the jackpot symbol Y2 indicating "probable variation" will be stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is 10%, and the probability that the jackpot symbol Y3 indicating "3R normal" will be permanently displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is 10%. is 10%.

<Processing based on reach random number>
The main CPU 81 determines that when the jackpot random number acquired in response to the game ball passing through the first starting port 21 (or the second starting port 22) matches the rejection value (see FIG. 6(A)), that is, the jackpot If it is determined that the game is not to be played, the reach random number obtained together with the jackpot random number used for that determination matches either the random value corresponding to the reach effect or the random value corresponding to the reach effect. It is determined whether to perform a reach effect or a reach-less effect based on whether the reach effect is performed or not.

Although not shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the main ROM 82 stores 10 random numbers for the reach effect, and the main CPU 81 stores the obtained reach random numbers as these 10 random numbers. If it matches any of the above, it is determined that a reach effect will be performed. In addition, 90 random numbers are stored for the no-reach performance, and if the obtained reach random number matches any of these 90 random numbers, the main CPU 81 performs the no-reach performance. decide. In this embodiment, the possible range of the reach random number is set to "0" to "99", and when it is determined that the jackpot game is not executed, the ratio of the reach effect is 10% (=10/ 100×100), and the percentage of no reach effect (proportion of non-reach effect) is 90% (=90/100×100).

When the main CPU 81 determines to perform the ready-to-reach presentation, the main CPU 81 selects a variation pattern in which a variation presentation pattern of presentation symbols accompanied by a ready-to-reach presentation is selected by the sub-control board 90 as a special symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, when it is decided to perform a no-reach performance, a variation pattern is selected as a special symbol variation pattern in which a variation performance pattern of performance symbols without a reach performance is selected by the sub-control board 90.

[About the flow of the game]
Next, the flow of the game will be explained with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the gaming machine 1. Due to the board structure of the game board 2, a game ball launched into the left gaming area 3L can win a prize in the first starting opening 21, while a gaming ball launched into the right gaming area 3R can win a prize in the first starting opening 21. Never. In addition, in the normal gaming state, the second starting port 22 is difficult to open, and even if it does, the opening time of the second starting port 22 is extremely short, and the game ball does not enter the second starting port 22. The chance of winning is extremely low. For this reason, there is no advantage for the player to play right-handed during the normal gaming state. As is clear from these, the normal gaming state is a left-sided advantageous state in which it is easier to hit the jackpot by launching the game ball into the left gaming area 3L than by launching it into the right gaming area 3R (special symbol determination is easier to execute). It is. Therefore, the player plays left-handed during the normal gaming state.

When a game ball hit to the left during the normal gaming state enters the first starting hole 21, the first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41, , the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "lost", the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot", any of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 (see FIG. 6(B)) is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, and the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is A jackpot game corresponding to is executed. These jackpot games are as described above based on FIG. 6(B).

When the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment in the normal gaming state is "jackpot", when the jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol )) and when the jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X2: see FIG. 6(B)) that normally informs the jackpot is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 7(D)).

Here, when the jackpot symbol X1 notifying the probability variable jackpot is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game described above is executed based on FIG. 6(B). When this jackpot game is executed, on the condition that the game ball has won a V prize during the long open round game (during the first round round game) in which the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are long opened, After the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled in a variable probability game state (see FIG. 7(B)). As described above, this variable probability gaming state continues until the special symbol determination (and the variable display of the special symbol) is performed 100 times, unless a jackpot is determined midway through. On the other hand, even though a jackpot game including the above-mentioned long open round game has been executed, if the game ball does not win the V prize due to, for example, a ball jam in the game area 3, then after the jackpot game ends, , the game is controlled in a time-saving gaming state that can continue until the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) is executed 100 times (see FIG. 7(C)).

Here, in the variable probability game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol determination performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 25 is set to a relatively high probability (11/11 in this embodiment), and The opening time of the second starting port 22 when the symbol determination is won is set to a relatively long time (1.5 seconds x 3 times in this embodiment). Therefore, the variable probability game state is a right-side advantageous state in which it is easier to get a jackpot by hitting the game ball into the right game area 3R than by hitting it into the left game area 3L (special symbol determination is more likely to be executed). For this reason, when the game is controlled in a variable probability gaming state, the player plays right-handed. This is the same when the game is controlled in the time saving gaming state which is a high base state as well as the variable probability gaming state.

When a game ball hit to the right enters the second starting hole 22 while the game is being controlled in a variable probability gaming state, a second special symbol determination is executed, and a second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 42. After being variably displayed, a second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "lost", the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "Jackpot", any of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y2 (see Fig. 6(C)) is stopped and displayed, resulting in a probability-variable jackpot (Fig. 7(F)). (see FIG. 7(G)) and when the jackpot symbol Y3 (see FIG. 6(C)) is stopped and displayed, resulting in a normal jackpot (see FIG. 7(G)).

If the game ball wins a V prize during the jackpot game related to the above-mentioned probability variable jackpot, the game is controlled again in the probability variable game state after the jackpot game ends (see Fig. 7 (B)), and the game ball wins a V prize during the jackpot game. If not, the game is controlled in a time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game (see FIG. 7(C)). On the other hand, since the game ball does not win a V prize during the jackpot game related to the normal jackpot, the game is controlled in a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 7(E)).

When a game ball hit to the right enters the second starting slot 22 while the game is controlled in the time-saving gaming state, a second special symbol determination is executed, and a second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 42. After being variably displayed, a second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "lost", the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "jackpot", any of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y3 (see FIG. 6(C)) will be stopped and displayed, resulting in a probability-variable jackpot or a normal jackpot, and the probability-variable game will be played. In this state, the jackpot game is executed in the same way as when any of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y3 is stopped and displayed. Here, if any of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y2 related to the probability variable jackpot is displayed in a stopped state (see FIG. 7 (I)), on the condition that the game ball has won V during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, The game is controlled in the variable probability game state (see FIG. 7 (J)), and if the game ball does not win a V prize during the jackpot game (see FIG. 7 (K)), the time saving game state is started again after the jackpot game ends. The game will be controlled.

On the other hand, if the jackpot symbol Y3 related to the normal jackpot is stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state (see FIG. 7 (M)), the game ball will not enter the V prize during the jackpot game, so after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game state will return. The game is controlled (see FIG. 7(E)).

In addition, if a jackpot is not determined even once in the time-saving gaming state that continues until 100 special symbol judgments (and special symbol fluctuation display) are performed, the gaming state will be returned from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. (See FIG. 7(L)).

[About variable effects]
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, various effects are performed on the display screen 70 as the first special symbol (or second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The variable performance performed on the display screen 70 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol will be explained.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 and the first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and then the first special symbol is displayed. A first special symbol indicating the determination result of the symbol determination is stopped and displayed. The display screen 70 is provided with a performance symbol display area 73 (see FIG. 2) in which a performance symbol that notifies the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) is displayed. Then, along with the variable display of the first special symbol, a variable performance including a variable display of the performance symbol is performed (see FIG. 2). Then, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a variable time corresponding to the variable pattern selected when the first special symbol determination is executed, as this first special symbol is stopped and displayed, The performance symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination.

During such variable display of performance symbols, a so-called ready-to-reach performance may be performed. Specifically, in the effect pattern display area 73 of the display screen 70, for example, part of a pattern row of effect patterns in which numbers 1 to 9 are written vertically consecutively from bottom to top is displayed horizontally. Three columns are displayed, and when the variable display of the first special symbol starts, these symbol columns are displayed in a variable manner (scroll display) so as to scroll from top to bottom. On the other hand, when a reach effect is performed, before all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed, first, for example, the effect symbols in the left column (left symbol) and the effect symbols in the right column (right symbol). pseudo-stop in order or at the same time so as not to stop completely. FIG. 2 shows an example of a state in which three symbols are pseudo-stopped as left symbols, three symbols are pseudo-stopped as right symbols, and the middle symbol row continues to be scrolled. In addition, a pseudo-stop is a performance in which the performance symbols are swung on the spot without moving much, and in the following explanation, the actual stop (sometimes simply referred to as a "stop display") in which the performance symbols are completely still is used. ), it may be called a pseudo-stop.

When the same performance symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol come to a pseudo-stop on the effective line, a ready-to-win performance is established, and a reach-for-win performance is performed that makes the player expect that three identical performance symbols will line up. In this reach effect, the reach symbols (left and right symbols) are pseudo-stopped, and the performance symbols (middle symbols) that make up the middle row of symbols are scrolled at a low speed so that the player can identify them, and finally , This is an effect in which a medium symbol that is common to the reach symbol or a medium symbol that is different from the reach symbol is stopped on the active line to notify a win or loss.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, other display objects such as characters and items are used in addition to the presentation symbols for such ready-to-reach presentation. In addition, in the following explanation, in a variable performance in which a reach performance is performed, the performance performed until the reach is established may be referred to as a "pre-reach performance".

The type of reach effect will be explained in detail later, but if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lose", the three effect symbols indicating the reach loser (for example, "323") will pseudo-stop to notify you of the loss. However, as the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, these three production symbols come to a final stop. On the other hand, when the reach effect is not performed, the three effect symbols indicating the winning number (for example, "629") will pseudo-stop to notify you of the loss, and the losing symbol will be stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. At the same time, these three performance symbols come to a standstill. In this way, when it is determined that the jackpot game will not be executed, the three production symbols are pseudo-stopped at the reach loss mark or the breakout mark indicating a loss, and then the actual stop is made to notify the loss (that the jackpot game will not be executed). A loss notification performance is executed.

If this loss notification performance is executed, the jackpot game will not be executed, and if the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the first special symbol and performance symbol will be displayed for a predetermined confirmation period (for example, 0.5 seconds). After being stopped and displayed, the suspended first special symbol determination is performed, and the next variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to this determination is started.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "jackpot", a reach effect is usually executed during the variable display of the first special symbol, and a double number (for example, "333") is shown to notify the jackpot. The three performance symbols come to a pseudo stop, and as the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, these three performance symbols come to a real stop. In this way, when it is determined that a jackpot game is to be executed, a hit notification effect is executed in which the three effect symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot, and then the actual stop is made to notify a jackpot (that a jackpot game will be executed). executed. When this winning notification performance is executed, a jackpot game is executed.

Up to this point, we have described a variable performance including a performance in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped as the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped.However, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Even when the display is stopped after being displayed, a similar fluctuating effect is performed.

[Screen configuration of display screen 70]
FIG. 2 exemplifies the screen configuration of the display screen 70 in the normal gaming state. When the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, a pending icon display area 71, the icon display area 72, and an effect symbol display area 73 are formed on the display screen 70, as illustrated in FIG. As described above, the production symbol display area 73 displays the left symbols constituting the left symbol column, the middle symbols constituting the middle symbol column, and the right symbols constituting the right symbol column. This is the display area.

<Pending icon display area 71>
The pending icon display area 71 is a display area where a pending icon indicating that the first special symbol determination is pending is displayed. In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 in a situation where special symbol determination and special symbol fluctuation display cannot be started immediately, such as during a special symbol fluctuation display or during a jackpot game, the first special The right to judge symbols is reserved up to a predetermined number (four in this embodiment).

In this way, when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the reservation icon display area 71 displays the same number of reservation icons as the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination indicated by the first special symbol reservation display 44. be done. In FIG. 2, a state in which two pending icons are displayed in the pending icon display area 71 is illustrated to indicate that the pending number of the first special symbol determination is "2".

Note that if a hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 while a highly reliable reach effect such as SPSP reach, which will be described later, is being performed, not only will the display area used for the reach effect be restricted, but also the hold icon display area 71 will be restricted. The display of icons may reduce the interest of reach performance. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the display object (in this embodiment, the pedestal of the pending icon) and the pending icon that make up the pending icon display area 71 is displayed during normal reach or SP reach, while the display object (in this embodiment, the pedestal of the pending icon) and the pending icon are displayed. As the reach performance develops from reach to SPSP reach, the display objects and pending icons that make up the pending icon display area 71 are erased from the display screen 70, and after the SPSP reach ends, the pending icon display area 71 is configured. A configuration is adopted in which display objects and pending icons are displayed again.

Moreover, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, basically no game ball enters the second starting port 22. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, basically, the right to determine the second special symbol is not suspended, and a pending icon related to the second special symbol determination is displayed on the display screen 70, or this pending icon is displayed on the display screen 70. A display area for display is not formed.

<The icon display area 72>
The icon display area 72 is a display area that displays the icon as a variation suggestion image suggesting that the first special symbol is displayed in a variation manner. The icon is displayed in the icon display area 72 with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and is erased from the icon display area 72 at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, for example. However, the timing of erasing the icon is not limited to this, and the icon may be erased during the variable display of the first special symbol. For example, when the SPSP reach develops or in the middle of the SPSP reach, which will be described later. The icon may be deleted.

By the way, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 in a state where the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and the right to judge the special symbol is not reserved, the first special symbol will not be displayed in a variable manner. Accordingly, the icon is displayed in the icon display area 72. On the other hand, when the pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71 and the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is finished, the icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71. A first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon (the pending icon displayed in the position closest to the icon display area 72) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in accordance with the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest pending icon shifts from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72, It will be displayed as a new icon. In this way, the hold icon (here, the icon) shifted to the icon display area 72 is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (see FIG. 2). Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 rather than the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71.

Note that if another hold icon different from the above-mentioned first hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, as the first hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 72, the hold icon display area 71 , the other pending icons are shifted in the direction closer to the icon display area 72. As is clear from the explanation so far, in the gaming machine 1, the icon corresponding to the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 may be displayed in the icon display area 72, so the following explanation will be given. In this case, when the pending icon and the icon are not distinguished, they may be collectively referred to simply as "icon."

(About icon change effect)
By the way, the hold icon is normally displayed as a white hold icon (default hold icon). On the other hand, when a pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71, an icon change effect may be performed in which the color of the pending icon changes. When this icon change effect is performed, the white pending icon changes to a pending icon of a color such as blue, green, or red that indicates the jackpot reliability. The colors suggesting jackpot reliability illustrated here are arranged in order from lowest to highest jackpot reliability. Red is when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the red pending icon is a "jackpot", or when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively long time even though it is a "loss". easy to be selected. Green is likely to be selected when the variation time of the special symbol is set to a medium time for a "big hit" or a "loss". Blue is likely to be selected when the game is a "lose" or when the special symbol variation time is set to a relatively short time. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the white pending icon is set to approximately 1%, the jackpot reliability of the blue pending icon is set to approximately 3%, and the jackpot reliability of the green pending icon is approximately 15%. The jackpot reliability of the red pending icon is set to about 45%.

Here, an example has been described in which an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of a pending icon changes only once when it is displayed in the pending icon display area 71, but the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment In this case, other icon change effects may be performed. That is, for example, when a white hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, it changes to a blue hold icon, and then changes to a green hold icon. An icon change effect may be performed in which the display color of the pending icon changes multiple times. Further, when a white pending icon shifted from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72 is displayed as the icon, an icon change effect in which the display color changes may be performed.

Further, the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 changes, and then when the hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 72 and displayed as the icon, the display color changes. In some cases, an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the icon changes in both the pending icon display area 71 and the icon display area 72. In addition, an icon change effect may be performed in which the pending icon is initially displayed in a display color other than white (for example, blue), or an icon change effect may be performed in which the display color of the pending icon whose initial color is other than white is changed. .

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment displays on the display screen 70 reservation information indicating that the right to judge a special symbol is reserved, and is capable of changing the display mode of the reservation information. . In the following explanation, hold icons and icons whose display color is other than white will be referred to as "special icons" to distinguish them from "normal icons" such as normal hold icons whose display color is white and the relevant icons. There are cases where

(About luminous effects)
In the game machine 1 of this embodiment, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, a light emission effect using the first starting port lamp 215 (see FIG. 2) may be executed. This light-emitting effect is performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 and the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, and the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved. This is a so-called pending look-ahead effect that may occur at the winning timing based on the result of the determination process.

The light emitting effect has a feature that the first starting port lamp 215 blinks in the same color as the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 21, a blue light flashes. If the hold icon is displayed, the first starting port lamp 215 starts flashing blue, and if the green pending icon is displayed at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 21, the first starting port lamp 215 starts flashing blue. The lamp 215 starts flashing green. Further, when a red pending icon is displayed at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 21, the first starting port lamp 215 starts blinking in red.

In addition, in the light emitting effect, an icon change effect is executed for the currently displayed pending icon (or the relevant icon), and as the display color of the pending icon (or the relevant icon) changes, A feature is that the emitted light color of the first starting port lamp 215 changes similarly. For example, when a blue hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 and the first starting gate lamp 215 is flashing blue, as the display color of this hold icon changes from blue to green, 1 start port lamp 215 changes from blinking blue to blinking green. For example, when the green icon is displayed in the icon display area 72 and the first starting port lamp 215 is blinking in green, as the display color of the icon changes from green to red. , the first starting port lamp 215 changes from blinking green to blinking red.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned special icon may be temporarily hidden and then displayed again depending on the effect executed on the display screen 70; During this period, the first starting port lamp 215 blinks in the same color as the special icon before it is hidden. Therefore, even when the special icon is not displayed, the player can easily recognize the display color of the special icon (i.e., jackpot reliability) based on the first starting port lamp 215. be.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the special icon is not displayed in the pending icon display area 71 (or the icon display area 72), the first starting port lamp 215 is off, and the pending icon display area 71 (or the icon display area 72) is not lit. Or, as the special icon begins to be displayed in the icon display area 72), the above-mentioned light emitting effect using the first starting port lamp 215 is started.

In addition, the emitted light color of the first starting port lamp 215 suggests the jackpot reliability similarly to the display color of the special icon, and the position corresponding to the first starting port lamp 215 (in this embodiment, the first starting port lamp 215 A special icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71 and the icon display area 72 above the lamp 215. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the level of jackpot reliability based on both the special icon and the first starting port lamp 215 that are in a predetermined positional relationship.

[Flow of the production accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol]
FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of various effects such as a reach effect in the normal gaming state. When the first special symbol determination is executed in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then is stopped and displayed in a manner showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination. On the other hand, on the display screen 70, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the production symbols (scrolling display of three symbol rows) is started in the production symbol display area 73 ( (See FIG. 8(A)).

Here, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lose", for example, different performance symbols as left symbols and right symbols will pseudo-stop on the effective line, and in this non-reach mode, the symbol row in the middle row A no-reach effect (see FIG. 8(B)) may be performed in which the only scrolling information is displayed. When this no-reach effect (variable effect that does not include a reach effect) is performed, the three effect symbols that show the winning result are pseudo-stopped at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol. Along with the stop display, a loss notification performance (see FIG. 8(C)) is performed in which these three performance symbols are stopped.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "jackpot" or if it is decided to perform a reach effect (variable effect including a reach effect) even though it is a "loss", the first special symbol During the variable display, for example, a pre-reach effect in which a predetermined left symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line of the effect symbol display area 73, and then the right symbol, which is the same effect symbol as the left symbol, is moved onto the effective line. (See FIG. 8(D)). Then, when the same left symbol and right symbol come to a pseudo stop on the active line, a reach is established (see FIG. 8(E)). When a reach is established in this way, the player expects that the middle symbol, which is the same effect symbol as the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol), will stop on the active line and the symbols will be aligned. A performance will be held.

In this embodiment, there are four types of reach effects that can be executed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol: normal reach, character reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach (see FIG. 8).

The normal reach (see FIG. 8(F)) is the reach effect with the lowest jackpot reliability (for example, jackpot reliability: approximately 2%) among the four types of reach effects described above. When a reach is established, a normal reach is first performed (see Figures 8 (E) and (F)), and during the normal reach, the middle row that was scrolling at high speed between the two reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) The scrolling speed of the symbol row gradually decreases.

Here, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lose" and, for example, a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds is selected at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, what is the reach symbol? By pseudo-stopping different middle symbols on the effective line, the effect symbols of reach losing eyes (for example, "434") are displayed, and a loss notification effect (see Fig. 8 (G)) is performed in which these effect symbols are actually stopped. .

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "Jackpot" and, for example, a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds is selected at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, then if the variation pattern is the same as the reach symbol, By pseudo-stopping the symbols on the activated line, a zero-number (for example, "444") performance symbol is displayed, and a hit notification performance (see FIG. 8(H)) is performed in which these performance symbols are actually stopped.

In addition, if a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time of the first special symbol is selected, there will be no hit notification performance or loss notification performance in normal reach, and other reach performances with higher jackpot reliability than normal reach will be performed. develops into A reach that develops from a normal reach is a character reach, a SP reach, or a SPSP reach.

Character reach (see Figure 8 (I)) is the reach effect with the second lowest jackpot reliability after normal reach among the four types of reach effects mentioned above (for example, jackpot reliability: approximately 4%), and this character reach When the game develops, the anime character performs a predetermined action to stop the middle symbol that is the same as the reach symbol, and the success or failure of this action will notify the winner or loser.

In addition, in this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 8(I), there is a character A reach where character A performs the above action, a character B reach where character B performs the above action, and a character C reach where character C performs the above action. There are three types of character reaches, including character C reach, which performs actions, and no matter which character reach develops, the jackpot reliability is about 4%. However, the jackpot reliability of these character reaches does not necessarily have to be the same; for example, the jackpot reliability increases in the order of character A reach, character B reach, and character C reach. A configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot reliability varies depending on the type of the jackpot.

When it develops into character reach, the reliability of the jackpot is relatively low at about 4%, so in most cases, a loss notification performance is performed at character reach without developing from character reach to other reach performances. (See FIGS. 8(I) and (C)). On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is "jackpot", a hit notification effect may be performed in character reach (see FIGS. 8(I) and (H)). In addition, if the judgment result of this first special symbol judgment is "Jackpot" or "Lose" and a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, from the character reach The reach effect will develop into SP reach (see FIG. 8(J)) or SPSP reach (see FIG. 6(K)).

SP reach (see Figure 8 (J)) is a reach effect with higher jackpot reliability than character reach (for example, jackpot reliability: approximately 15%), and wins and losses depend on the outcome of the battle between the main character and the enemy character. be notified. Regarding this SP reach, there are cases in which normal reach develops into SP reach via character reach (see Figure 8 (F), (I), and (J)), and cases where SP reach develops from normal reach through character reach. There are cases where this directly develops (Fig. 8 (F) and (I)).

In addition, in this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 8(J), three types of SP reach are prepared: a first SP reach, a second SP reach, and a third SP reach. Here, the first SP reach is the SP reach where the main character battles enemy character A, the second SP reach is the SP reach where the main character battles enemy character B, and the third SP reach is the SP reach where the main character battles enemy character B. This is an SP reach that battles with character C. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is approximately 15% regardless of which of these three types of SP reach develops, but for example, the jackpot reliability increases in the order of 1st SP reach, 2nd SP reach, and 3rd SP reach. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the reliability of a jackpot differs depending on the type of enemy character that battles with the main character.

In this embodiment, when the SP reach develops into any of these reach effects, the SP reach does not develop into other reach effects, and the win or loss is announced at the final stage of the SP reach. Specifically, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of this symbol change is "Jackpot", a victory representing the protagonist character winning the battle with the enemy character at the end of SP reach. A performance is performed, and then a winning notification performance (see FIG. 8(H)) is performed. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of this symbol change is "Loss", a defeat effect showing the main character losing the battle with the enemy character at the end of SP reach will be displayed. After that, a loss notification effect (see FIG. 8(C)) is performed.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot", a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. On the contrary, it is difficult to select a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time. In addition, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lost", it is difficult to select a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time as the variation pattern of the first special symbol; Therefore, a short variation pattern is likely to be selected.

As described above, since the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has the above-mentioned characteristics regarding the selection of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the game machine 1 has the characteristics described above regarding the selection of the variation pattern of the first special symbol. However, it can be said that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the normal reach develops directly to the SP reach without going through the character reach.

On the other hand, SPSP reach (see Figure 8 (K)) is a reach effect with the highest jackpot reliability among the above four types of reach effects (for example, jackpot reliability: approximately 35%), and it is a reach effect that has the highest jackpot reliability (for example, jackpot reliability: about 35%). Win or lose will be announced based on the outcome of the battle.

In this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 8(K), three types of SPSP reaches are prepared: a first SPSP reach, a second SPSP reach, and a third SPSP reach. Here, the first SPSP reach is an SPSP reach in which the main character battles enemy character D, the second SPSP reach is an SPSP reach in which the main character battles enemy character E, and the third SPSP reach is an SPSP reach in which the main character battles enemy character E. This is SPSP Reach who battles with Character F. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is approximately 35% regardless of which of these three types of SPSP reach develops, but for example, the jackpot reliability increases in the order of 1st SPSP reach, 2nd SPSP reach, and 3rd SPSP reach. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the reliability of a jackpot differs depending on the type of enemy character that battles with the main character.

In this embodiment, when the SPSP reach develops into any of these reach effects, the SPSP reach does not develop into other reach effects, and the win or loss is announced at the final stage of the SPSP reach. Specifically, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment carried out at the start of this symbol change is "Jackpot", it is a victory that represents the main character winning the battle with the enemy character at the end of SPSP Reach. A performance is performed, and then a winning notification performance (see FIG. 8(H)) is performed. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of this symbol change is "Loss", a defeat effect showing the main character losing the battle with the enemy character at the end of SP reach will be displayed. After that, a loss notification effect (see FIG. 8(C)) is performed.

There are two ways to reach this SPSP reach: one that develops from normal reach to SPSP reach via character reach (see Figure 8 (F), (I), and (K)), and one that develops from normal reach to SPSP reach without passing through character reach. There are two cases: (see FIGS. 8(F) and (K)), and the latter case has a higher jackpot reliability than the former case.

Although not shown in FIG. 8, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, after the reach is established (see FIG. 8(E)), the character reach (see FIG. 8(F)) is not performed. There are also variable performance patterns that directly develop into any of SP reach (see FIG. 8(J)), SP reach (see FIG. 8(K)).

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, each production pattern is colored so that each production pattern of symbols 1 to 9 can be classified by color. Odd-numbered symbols (in this embodiment, 1 symbol, 3 symbol, 5 symbol, 7 symbol, and 9 symbol) that are composed of Even numbered symbols (in this embodiment, 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, and 8 symbols) that are colored blue are classified as blue symbols.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as the first special symbol in the normal gaming state starts to be displayed in a variable manner, as described above with reference to FIG. 8(A), three Scroll display of the symbol row starts. After that, as a result of pseudo-stopping the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol in a predetermined order, for example, a blue chance effect is executed in which three blue symbols such as "246" and "468" are pseudo-stopped. (See Figure 8(L)). When this green chance effect is executed, it develops into a special button continuous press effect that notifies a win or loss in response to the player's repeated presses of the first effect button 35 (see FIG. 8(M)). Here, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the current symbol variation is a "jackpot", a hit notification performance is executed following the special button continuous press performance (Fig. 8 (M) and (N)). On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the current symbol variation is "Loss", a loss notification performance is executed following the special button continuous press performance (Fig. 8 (M) and (See (O)).

In addition, after the scrolling display of the three symbol rows has started as shown in FIG. A red chance effect in which three red symbols such as "337" are displayed in a pseudo-stop manner may be executed (see FIG. 8(P)). When this red chance effect is executed, it develops into a special button single press effect that notifies a win or loss in response to a single press of the first effect button 35 by the player (see FIG. 8(Q)). Here, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the current symbol variation is "jackpot", a hit notification performance is executed following the special button single press performance (Figure 8 (Q ) and (N)). On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the current symbol variation is "Lose", a loss notification effect is executed following the special button single press effect (Fig. 8 (Q) and (C)).

The special button multiple press effect and the special button single press effect are special button effects among the button effects executed on the gaming machine 1, and when these special button effects are executed, the player can move without executing the reach effect. Wins and losses will be announced. These special button repeated press effects and special button single press effects will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 40 to 45.

Note that the types of ready-to-win effects and the way in which the ready-to-reach effects are developed are merely examples, and the types of ready-to-reach effects and the way in which they are developed may be other types. That is, for example, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which there are three types of reach effects for character reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach, but for example, there are five types, 1st SP reach to 5th SP reach. The types of each reach effect may be other than three types, such as the following ready-to-reach effects. Further, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the SP reach does not develop into the SPSP reach, but in other embodiments, a configuration in which the SP reach can develop into the SPSP reach may be adopted.

[About advance judgment processing]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game before the first special symbol determination is performed for that right. Pre-determination processing may be performed. Specifically, the main CPU 81 acquires a jackpot random number in response to the game ball winning in the first starting hole 21, and based on the acquired jackpot random number, the Prior to the jackpot determination process in the first special symbol determination (see step S308 in FIG. 60), similar jackpot determination processing is performed to determine whether or not it will be determined as a "jackpot" when the first special symbol determination is executed. Determine in advance whether Also, a process similar to the fluctuation pattern selection process (see step S309 in FIG. 60) is performed based on the fluctuation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, and which fluctuation pattern is selected when the first special symbol determination is executed. Determine in advance what will happen.

In this way, when the main CPU 81 performs the preliminary determination process in response to the suspension of the right to determine the first special symbol, the main CPU 81 sends a suspension command containing preliminary determination information indicating the preliminary determination result to the sub control board 90. Send. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the above-mentioned icon change effect based on the preliminary determination information included in the pending command. Then, when it is decided to perform the icon change effect, it is determined what kind of change pattern is used to change the display mode (in this embodiment, the color of the icon) of the icon (the pending icon or the relevant icon), and the decision result is The image and sound control board 100 is caused to perform an icon change effect based on the following. Further, when the sub CPU 91 determines to perform the icon change effect and determines the change pattern of the target icon, the sub CPU 91 also determines the light emission pattern of the first starting port lamp 215 based on the change pattern, The lamp control board 120 is caused to perform a light emission effect based on the determined result.

The preliminary determination process executed by the main CPU 81 to realize the pending look-ahead effects such as the icon change effect and the light emission effect will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 58 and 59.

[Specific example of performance in normal gaming state]
Next, a specific example of the performance in the normal game state will be explained with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. 9 and 10 are screen diagrams illustrating effects in the normal gaming state. Here, as a variation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, a winning notification effect is performed in the SPSP reach, which is directly developed from the normal reach. The effect executed when the variation pattern is selected will be explained.

FIG. 9A shows a state in which one hold icon (for example, a green hold icon) is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 on the display screen 70, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is In order to notify that the judgment result of the corresponding first special symbol judgment is "lost", the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and the effect symbol indicating the winning number of "526" is displayed. A state in which the display is stopped is illustrated. In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.6 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 A first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (here, the green pending icon) is executed. Then, the judgment result of this first special symbol judgment is a "jackpot", and a variation pattern is selected as a variation pattern of the first special symbol, in which a variation effect pattern that directly develops from normal reach to SPSP reach is selected. Then, the following performance will take place.

That is, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon, the earliest displayed in the pending icon display area 71 The pending icon is shifted to the icon display area 72, and scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 9A and 9B). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the scroll display of these three symbol rows was started, for example, a speech preview effect image showing a predetermined character speaking a speech is displayed on the display screen 70, and the speech is transmitted from the speaker 38. The dialogue preview to be output is executed. In this dialogue preview, the reliability of the jackpot is suggested based on the type of character speaking the dialogue, the content of the dialogue, the font color of the dialogue, etc.

Following the above dialogue preview, a pseudo continuous performance may be performed. Here, the pseudo-continuous performance is such that during the variable display of one special symbol (here, the first special symbol), the performance symbol displayed in the performance symbol display area 73 is variably displayed multiple times. It is a staged performance. Regarding this pseudo continuous effect, the following effects are displayed.

In other words, the scrolling speed of the symbol row in the left column decreases and the left symbol (for example, 6 symbols) pseudo-stops, and then the scrolling speed of the symbol column in the right column decreases (the left symbol that pseudo-stopped first and (Different) The right symbol (for example, 4 symbols) pseudo-stops, and then the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols decreases, and the 7 symbols pseudo-stop as the middle symbol (pseudo-continuous pattern) to notify the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. Stop (see FIG. 9(D)).

In this way, after the different performance symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol have pseudo-stopped, when the 7 symbols in the middle row have pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-second fluctuating performance that follows the pseudo-first fluctuating fluctuating performance is started. . Specifically, after the characters “×2” indicating the start of the second pseudo-variable effect are displayed in a large size in the center area of the display screen 70, the characters “×2” are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 70. Along with this, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIGS. 9(D) and (E)). When the second pseudo series of variable effects is being performed, for example, a dialogue preview may be executed in the same way as during the first pseudo series of variable effects (see FIG. 9(F)).

As mentioned above, when the dialogue preview is executed during the variable display of the second pseudo series, the second pseudo continuous display is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (see Fig. 9 (G)). ). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 9(G), the scrolling speed of the left symbol column decreases, the left symbol (for example, 2 symbols) comes to a pseudo-stop, and then the scroll speed of the left symbol column (for example, 2 symbols) stops. The scrolling speed decreases and the right symbols (for example, 5 symbols) pseudo-stop, and then the scrolling speed of the middle symbol row decreases and the 7 symbols pseudo-stop as the middle symbol.

When the second pseudo consecutive performance is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol, a pseudo third consecutive variable performance following the pseudo second consecutive fluctuating performance is started. Specifically, after the characters “×3” indicating the start of the pseudo third fluctuating performance are displayed in a large size in the center area of the display screen 70, the characters “×3” are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 70. Along with this, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIGS. 9(G) and (H)).

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the pseudo third fluctuating effect in this way, the scrolling speed of the symbol row in the left column decreases, the left symbol (for example, 3 symbols) pseudo-stops, and then , the scrolling speed of the right symbol column decreases (same as the left symbol), and the right symbols (here, 3 symbols) come to a pseudo stop, establishing a reach (see FIG. 9(I)).

Here, we have explained the case where the "pre-reach pseudo series" that restarts the scrolling display of each symbol row before the reach is established, but the "post-reach pseudo series" that restarts the scroll display of each symbol row after the reach is established. In some cases, a "continuation" is executed. Furthermore, both the pre-reach pseudo-run and the post-reach pseudo-run may be executed.

As described above, when the same performance symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped and reach is established, first, normal reach (see FIG. 8(E)) is executed (see FIG. 10(A)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 10(A), after the reach is established, the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols gradually decreases, and the reach symbols (here, 3 symbols on the left and 3 symbols on the right) and The same middle symbol (in this case, the middle 3 symbol) is placed on the active line defined by the reach symbol (a straight line extending in the left-right direction connecting the vertical center of the left 3 symbols and the vertical center of the right 3 symbols). An effect display is performed to show how the object is approaching.

Here, in order to develop from normal reach to SPSP reach, the following effects are displayed. In other words, when the middle row symbol row is being scrolled, the same middle symbol as the reach symbol (3 symbols in this case) passes over the active line, and accordingly, the scrolling speed of the middle row symbol row increases. increases, making it difficult to identify the middle symbol, and a development effect is performed that suggests that SPSP will develop into reach (see FIG. 10(B)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 10(B), in the process of moving the three symbols on the left to the upper left area of the display screen 70 while being reduced in size, the scroll direction is rotated once clockwise as the axis direction. Then, move to the upper left area, and at the same time, while moving to the upper right area of the display screen 70 while reducing the three right symbols, rotate once clockwise with the scroll direction as the axis direction, and then move to the upper right area. move to the other area. After that, until the end of the variable display of the first special symbol this time, the 3 symbols on the left are displayed in a pseudo-stop display in the upper left area, and the 3 symbols on the right are displayed in a pseudo-stop display in the upper right area (Fig. 10 (C) ~ (See (H)).

Next, when a development effect (see FIG. 10(B)) suggesting development to SPSP reach is performed as described above, a darkening effect is performed (see FIG. 10(C)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 10C, various display objects ( For example, while the characters (for example, characters) are hidden, only the ready-to-reach symbols (here, three symbols on the left and three symbols on the right) and the corresponding icon are displayed superimposed on a solid black background image.

Following this blackout effect, for example, a group preview may be performed as a preview effect that foretells the possibility of a jackpot (see FIG. 10(D)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 10(D), an effect display is performed that shows a large number of characters moving from right to left on the display screen 70.

Please note that this group preview is not always executed if a blackout effect is performed, but there are cases in which SPSP Reach starts after a group preview is executed following a blackout effect, and when a group preview following a blackout effect is executed. There are cases where the SPSP reach is started without being executed, and the former has higher jackpot reliability than the latter (win notification effect is more likely to be executed). The execution timing of this group notice is not limited to immediately after the blackout effect, but the group notice may occur immediately after the reach is established.

When the blackout effect and the group preview are executed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the blackout effect is executed, the SPSP reach effect image, which is the effect image related to SPSP reach, is displayed on the display screen 70 (FIG. 10). (See E). As a result, for example, an effect display showing a battle between the main character and the enemy character is performed. This is as described above based on FIG. 8(K). Thereafter, when the SPSP reach reaches its final stage, a first performance button operation promotion performance is performed to prompt the player to operate the first performance button 35 (see FIG. 10(F)). Specifically, a first performance button image imitating the first performance button 35 and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period during which operation of the first performance button 35 is valid are displayed.

In this first performance button operation promotion performance, it is possible to win a jackpot at the timing when the first performance button 35 is operated during its validity period, or at the timing when the validity period ends without the first performance button 35 being operated. For example, a cut-in is performed in which a predetermined cut-in image is superimposed on the performance image (other than the ready-to-reach symbol) displayed on the display screen 70 (FIG. 10 (G) reference). This cut-in is an effect that suggests the degree of jackpot reliability, and there are two cases in which a green cut-in image is superimposed and a red cut-in image is superimposed, and a red cut-in image in which a red cut-in image is superimposed. There are cases where a cut-in is performed, and cases where a gold cut-in that displays a gold cut-in image superimposed is performed.If these cut-ins are arranged in order from lowest to highest reliability of jackpot, green cut-in, The order is red cut-in, then gold cut-in.

When the cut-in occurs in this way and the SPSP reach reaches its final stage, a second performance button operation promotion performance is performed to prompt the player to operate the second performance button 36 (see FIG. 10(H)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 10(H), during the valid period of the second performance button operation promotion performance, a second performance button image imitating the second performance button 36 and a message "Press!" are displayed. Characters indicating the operation content of the second effect button 36 and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period are displayed.

If the second performance button 36 is operated during the valid period of this second performance button operation promotion performance, the three performance symbols showing the double number will be pseudo-stopped as an operation corresponding performance according to the operation, and then the main stop will be stopped. A winning notification effect is performed (see FIG. 10(I)).

In addition, here, since the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time is "jackpot", a case where a hit notification performance is performed as an operation compatible performance will be taken as an example. As explained above, if the judgment result of this first special symbol judgment is "lose", the operation corresponding effect is a loss notification effect that pseudo-stops the three effect symbols indicating reach loss and then stops the real one. It will be done.

[About the production performed during the jackpot game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a description will be given of the effect executed during the jackpot game when the probability variable jackpot is won. Here, FIG. 11 is a screen diagram showing an example of production when a V winning prize is announced during a jackpot game.

As mentioned above, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment in the normal gaming state is "jackpot", any of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 (see FIG. 6(B)) is displayed as the first special symbol. The display is stopped and displayed on the display 41. Along with this, three performance symbols indicating a double number, such as "222", for example, are stopped on the display screen 70. Here, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the double number of "777" and the double number of "333" definitively notify that the game will be controlled in a variable probability game state after the jackpot game ends. It is considered as a performance symbol, and when 5R probability variation is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination (when jackpot symbol As a symbol, one of these zeros will be permanently stopped on the display screen 70.

In this way, when the three performance symbols showing the number of doubles of "777" which definitely informs the probability variable jackpot are stopped as the jackpot symbol X1 is stopped and displayed, in the opening period of the jackpot game, the probability variation An opening performance is performed including a performance that displays the words "RUSH BONUS" on the display screen 70 to notify that the player has won a jackpot (see FIG. 11(A)). After the opening period starts, the words "Right-handed" and a right-pointing arrow are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70 to urge the player to play right-handed (see FIGS. 11(A) to 11(E)). .

When the opening period in which the above-mentioned opening performance is performed ends, as described above, a long open round game in which the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are opened long is started as the first round round game, Along with this, a launch promotion effect (see FIGS. 11(B) and (C)) is executed to urge the player to launch the game ball aiming at the V winning hole 287. In FIGS. 11(B) and (C), the words "Aim for the V" and three arrows pointing to the V prize opening 287 (including the words "Right hit") are displayed as a launch promotion effect. An example is shown. Note that at the start of such a launch promotion performance, a voice saying "Aim for V" is output from the speaker 38.

When the game ball passes through the V-winning hole 287 during the first round game in which such a launch promotion performance is performed, the launch promotion performance ends and a V winning notification performance that notifies that the game ball has won a V prize. is executed (see FIG. 11(D)). FIG. 11(D) shows an example of a V winning notification performance in which two characters lift up a star-shaped emblem containing the letter "V" and show joy. When the ball wins a V prize, a predetermined V prize notification sound is output from the speaker 38.

In this way, when the V winning notification effect is executed to notify that the game ball has won a V prize during the first round of the round game, a predetermined interval period begins, and the next round game of the second round (first big prize winning) is executed. During the long open round game of the mouth 26), the star-shaped emblem is displayed in a small size in the lower left area of the display screen 70 (see FIG. 11(E)). Although not shown in FIG. 11, in the third and subsequent round games, the same in-round effects as in the second round are performed. Then, during the ending period of the jackpot game following the final round (fifth round) round game, a performance in a production mode named "Fighting Battle RUSH" that definitively announces the "probable variable gaming state" begins. In order to notify that this will happen, the words "Geki RUSH RUSH!" are displayed in a large size in the center area of the display screen 70, and the sound "Geki RUSH RUSH!" is output from the speaker 38.

[About complex expected performance]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13, a composite expected performance executed by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. Here, FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the composite expected performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the characteristics of the character standby effect and special cut-in, and the jackpot reliability.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment provides both the first expected performance and the second expected performance as performances that make you expect that the above-described hit notification performance will be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. Alternatively, either one of them can be executed, and the execution of the above-mentioned composite expected performance is synonymous with the execution of both the first expected performance and the second expected performance within the same variation. That is, the composite expected performance means that the first expected performance and the second expected performance are combined within the same variation.

(Character standby performance)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a character standby performance can be executed as the first expected performance (see FIGS. 12(C) to 12(G)). This character standby performance is a performance in which a character (hereinafter referred to as "character") appears on the display screen 70 and waits on the display screen 70 without being deleted from the display screen 70. Characters on standby perform various actions, thereby increasing the player's expectations for the execution of the winning notification effect. In this embodiment, a case will be described using as an example a case in which a character that appears by a character standby effect waits until the end of normal reach (see FIG. 12(H)).

As this character standby effect, a character A standby effect, a character B standby effect, and a character C standby effect are prepared. The character A standby effect (see FIG. 12(C)) is an effect in which character A appearing in the above-mentioned character A reach (see FIG. 8(I)) is displayed on the display screen 70 and made to stand by. Based on the character A standby effect, it is possible to easily recognize that character A reach is likely to be executed. Note that, as described above based on FIG. 8, although the reliability of the jackpot for the character A reach itself is not so high, it is possible to move from the character A reach to a highly reliable reach (in this embodiment, SP reach or SPSP reach). Reach production may develop. Therefore, by executing the character A standby effect, it is possible to make the player expect that the winning notification effect will be executed.

The character B standby effect (see FIG. 12(E)) is an effect in which character B appearing in the above-mentioned character B reach (see FIG. 8(I)) is displayed on the display screen 70 and made to stand by. Based on the character B standby effect, it is possible to easily recognize that character B reach is likely to be executed. In addition, like character A reach, character B reach is not a reach effect with a high reliability of jackpot, but it is a reach effect from character B reach to high reliability reach (in this embodiment, SP reach or SPSP reach). may develop. Therefore, by executing the character B standby effect, it is possible to make the player expect that the winning notification effect will be executed.

The character C standby effect (see FIG. 12(G)) is an effect in which the character C appearing in the above-mentioned character C reach (see FIG. 8(I)) is displayed on the display screen 70 and made to stand by. Based on the character C standby effect, it is possible to easily recognize that character C reach is likely to be executed. Note that, like Character A Reach and Character B Reach, Character C Reach is not a reach performance with a high reliability of jackpot, but it is a highly reliable reach from Character C Reach (in this embodiment, SP Reach or SPSP Reach). In some cases, the reach performance may develop. Therefore, by executing the character C standby effect, it is possible to make the player expect that the winning notification effect will be executed.

(Special cut-in)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a special cut-in can be executed as the second expected effect (see FIG. 12(L)). In this embodiment, this special cut-in is a superimposed display of a cut-in image representing the main character appearing in SPSP Reach described above on the effect image (for example, a background image or a hold icon) currently being displayed on the display screen 70. At the same time, the main character's voice saying "It's extremely hot!" is output from the speaker 38. In this way, the cut-in image used for the special cut-in represents the main character that appears in SPSP Reach, which suggests that SPSP Reach is executed by executing the special cut-in. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectations for the execution of the winning notification effect.

Note that the special cut-in is an effect with relatively high jackpot reliability, and in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is set to about 55% (see FIG. 13(B)).

From here on, a series of effects related to a composite expectation effect including a character standby effect and a special cut-in will be explained. Note that the character standby effect and special cut-in described below are the special cut-in effect illustrated in FIG. The pattern setting process (see FIG. 74) and the character standby performance pattern setting process (see FIG. 75) are executed, and the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) executes the performance based on the performance pattern information based on these setting processes. ).

First, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state, the variable performance including the variable display of the performance symbol is started on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 12(A)). The start of this variation effect is as described above based on FIG. 8(A). Once the variable effect is started, the following effects may be performed until the normal reach (see FIG. 8(F)) ends.

First, a first operation promotion performance (first operation promotion performance) that prompts the player to operate the first performance button 35 is performed (see FIG. 12(B)). Although not shown in the figure, by this first operation promotion effect, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 35 and an effective time indicating the remaining time of the valid period in which the operation of the first effect button 35 is valid are displayed. A period gauge is displayed on the display screen 70. If the player operates the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the first operation promotion performance, the character A standby performance may be executed (see FIGS. 12B and 12C).

Note that the character A standby performance is not necessarily executed if the first performance button 35 is operated during the validity period related to the first operation promotion performance, and even if the first performance button 35 is operated, the character A standby performance will not be executed. may not be executed. That is, if it has been decided in advance to execute the character A standby effect at the start of the current symbol variation, the character A standby effect will be executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the first operation promotion effect. If the effect is executed and, conversely, it is decided in advance at the start of the current symbol variation not to execute the character A standby effect, the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the first operation promotion effect. Even if it is, the character A standby effect will not be executed.

In addition, in a case where it has been decided in advance to execute the character A standby effect at the start of the current symbol variation, if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period related to the first operation promotion effect, Character A standby performance is automatically executed at the timing when this valid period ends.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first operation promotion performance was performed, a second operation promotion performance (second operation promotion performance) that prompts the player to operate the first performance button 35 is performed (FIG. 12(D) reference). This second operation promotion performance is performed in the same manner as the first operation promotion performance. If the player operates the first performance button 35 during the valid period related to the second operation promotion performance, the character B standby performance may be executed (see FIGS. 12(D) and (E)).

Note that the character B standby performance is not necessarily executed if the first performance button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the second operation promotion performance, and even if the first performance button 35 is operated, the character B standby performance will not be executed. may not be executed. That is, if it has been decided in advance to execute the character B standby effect at the start of the current symbol variation, the character B standby effect will be executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the second operation promotion effect. If the effect is executed and, conversely, it is decided in advance at the start of the current symbol variation not to execute the character B standby effect, the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the second operation promotion effect. Even if it is, the character B standby effect will not be executed.

In addition, in the case where it has been decided in advance to execute the character B standby effect at the start of the current symbol variation, if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period related to the second operation promotion effect, The character B standby effect is automatically executed at the timing when this valid period ends.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the second operation promotion performance was performed, a third operation promotion performance (third operation promotion performance) that prompts the player to operate the first performance button 35 is performed (FIG. 12(F) reference). This third operation promotion performance is performed in the same manner as the first operation promotion performance and the second operation promotion performance. If the player operates the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the third operation promotion performance, the character C standby performance may be executed (see FIGS. 12(F) and (G)).

Note that the character C standby performance is not always executed if the first performance button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the third operation promotion performance, and even if the first performance button 35 is operated, the character C standby performance will not be executed. may not be executed. That is, if it has been decided in advance to execute the character C standby effect at the start of the current symbol variation, the character C standby effect will be executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the third operation promotion effect. If the effect is executed and, conversely, it is decided in advance at the start of the current symbol variation not to execute the character C standby effect, the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the second operation promotion effect. Even if it is, the character C standby effect will not be executed.

In addition, in a case where it has been decided in advance to execute the character C standby effect at the start of the current symbol variation, if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period related to the third operation promotion effect, At the end of this valid period, the character C standby effect is automatically executed.

In this way, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the third operation promotion effect was performed as the third operation promotion effect, the normal reach ends (see FIG. 12(H)). As is clear from the explanation so far, the character standby effect in this embodiment includes a period in which the pre-reach effect (see FIG. 8(D)) is performed and a period in which the normal reach effect (see FIG. 8(F)) is performed. It is executed using the period and . Furthermore, the character A standby effect, the character B standby effect, and the character C standby effect may or may not be executed, respectively. Therefore, within the same variation, there are cases where no character standby effects are executed, cases where only one character standby effect is executed, cases where two character standby effects are executed, and cases where character standby effects are executed. There are cases where all three standby effects are executed.

Examples of cases in which only one character standby effect is executed within the same variation include the following cases. In other words, after the character A standby effect is executed, the character B standby effect and the character C standby effect are not executed, or the character B standby effect is executed without the character A standby effect, and then the character C standby effect is executed. When the effect is not executed, there is a case where the character A standby effect and the character B standby effect are not executed and the character C standby effect is executed.

Examples of cases in which two character standby effects are executed within the same variation include the following cases. That is, when the character C standby effect is not executed after the character A standby effect and the character B standby effect are executed, or when the character B standby effect and the character C standby effect are executed without the character A standby effect being executed. For example, after the character A standby effect is executed, the character C standby effect is executed without the character B standby effect being executed.

In addition, an example of a case where all three character standby effects are executed within the same variation is a case where character B standby effect is executed after character A standby effect is executed, and then character C standby effect is executed. It will be done.

In this way, the number of times character standby effects are executed within the same variation is variable, and when two character standby effects are executed, there are a plurality of combinations.

Note that when a plurality of (in this embodiment, two or three) character standby effects are executed within the same variation, the content of the effect of the character standby effects will change. For example, when character A standby effect and character standby effect B are executed, from the state where character A is on standby (one character standby state) due to character A standby effect, character B standby effect is executed, character A The state changes to a state in which two characters, ie, character B, are on standby (a state in which two characters are on standby).

Also, for example, if character standby effect B and character C standby effect are executed without character A standby effect being executed, from the state where character B is on standby (one character standby state) due to character B standby effect, By executing the character C standby effect, two characters, character B and character C, change to a standby state (two-character standby state).

Also, for example, if Character A standby effect, Character B standby effect, and Character C standby effect are all executed within the same variation, from the state where Character A is on standby (one character standby state) due to the character A standby effect, By executing the character B standby effect, two characters, character A and character B, are in a standby state (two characters standby state), and then, by executing the character C standby effect, character A , Character B, and Character C change to a standby state (3-character standby state).

Note that when only one of the character A standby effect, character B standby effect, and character C standby effect is executed, the content of the effect of the character standby effect does not change. Cases in which the content of the character standby effect does not change include cases where the character B standby effect and character C standby effect are not executed after the character A standby effect is executed, or cases where the character standby effect is not executed (without the character A standby effect being executed). Examples include a case where the B standby effect is executed and then the character C standby effect is not executed, and a case where the character C standby effect is executed (without the character A standby effect and the character B standby effect being executed).

In this way, the content of the character standby performance is variable, but it has the characteristic that the jackpot reliability changes depending on the number of standby characters at the end of the normal reach (see Figure 13 (B)). . FIG. 13(B) shows an example of the jackpot reliability of the character standby performance according to the number of standby characters that are finally on standby at the end of normal reach, and the final number of standby characters is one. The jackpot reliability of the character standby performance is approximately 5%, and the jackpot reliability of the character standby performance where the final number of standby characters is 2 is approximately 17%, and the final number of standby characters is 3. The reliability of the jackpot for the character standby performance is approximately 31%.

In this embodiment, since the jackpot reliability of the character standby effect and the special cut-in is set to the value illustrated in FIG. By causing this to occur, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectations for the execution of the winning notification effect.

In addition, depending on whether or not there is a change in the performance content, and the performance content after the change if the production content changes, the character standby performance may be performed after the character standby performance ends, that is, after the normal reach ends. It has the following characteristics that change the flow of the performance.

If the content of the character standby effect does not change because only one of the character A standby effect, character B standby effect, and character C standby effect is executed, that is, the final standby character If the number reaches the end of the normal reach with only one character, the jackpot reliability of the character standby performance will be about 5% (see Figure 13 (B)), and there is a characteristic that the normal reach will develop into the character reach (Figure 12 (H)) and (I)). For example, if only character A standby performance is executed within the same variation, the normal reach will develop to character A reach. Furthermore, if only character B standby performance is executed within the same variation, the normal reach will develop into the character B reach. Furthermore, if only the character C standby effect is executed within the same variation, the normal reach will develop into the character C reach.

In addition, the fact that only one character standby effect is executed, that is, the number of standby characters at the time when the character standby effect ends (in this embodiment, at the end of normal reach), means that high reliability reach is possible. This does not negate the development of character A; for example, only the character A standby performance may be executed, and the normal reach develops to character A reach, and then develops to SP reach or SPSP reach.

On the other hand, if two of the character standby effects, Character A standby effect, Character B standby effect, and Character C standby effect, are executed within the same variation and the normal reach ends with two characters in standby, the character The jackpot reliability of the standby effect is approximately 17% (see Figure 13 (B)), and it has the characteristic that it directly develops from normal reach to SP reach without going through character reach (Figure 12 (H) and (K)) reference). SP reach is a reach effect with higher jackpot reliability than character reach. In addition, although it has developed into a character reach, loss notification effects are often executed without developing into a highly reliable reach. Therefore, the player can actively operate the first performance button 35 while expecting that the number of standby characters in the character standby performance will increase to two (two characters will be on standby).

In addition, if all three character A standby effects, character B standby effects, and character C standby effects are executed within the same fluctuation, and the normal reach ends with three characters waiting, the jackpot reliability of the character standby effects will be increased. is approximately 31% (see FIG. 13(B)), and in this case, the special cut-in will occur immediately after the normal reach ends (see FIGS. 12(H) and (L)). As mentioned above, this special cut-in is an effect in which a cut-in image representing the main character appearing in SPSP Reach is superimposed, and the main character's voice saying "It's intense!" is output from the speaker 38. When a special cut-in occurs, the normal reach will directly develop into the SPSP reach without going through the character reach (see FIGS. 12(H), (L), and (M)). Therefore, the player can actively operate the first performance button 35 while expecting that the number of standby characters in the character standby performance will increase to three (that is, a state where three characters will be on standby).

FIG. 13(A) illustrates the characteristics of the character standby effect, and as described above based on FIGS. 12(H) and (I), when the character standby effect ends with one character on standby, In other words, if the number of final standby characters is one, the character reach will be greater than the character reach. In this case, although there is a possibility that a special cut-in will occur after the normal reach progresses to the character reach, the probability of its occurrence is low (for example, 3%).

In addition, as described above based on FIGS. 12(H) and (K), if the character standby effect ends with two characters waiting, that is, if the final number of standby characters is two, from the normal reach Because it develops directly to SP reach without going through character reach, the reach effect of the destination will be higher than SP reach. In this case, there is a possibility that a special cut-in will occur after the normal reach progresses to SP reach, and although the probability of this occurring is higher than when the number of final standby characters is one, it is still moderate. (e.g. 10%).

On the other hand, as described above based on FIGS. 12(H), (L), and (M), when the character standby effect ends with three characters on standby, that is, the final number of standby characters is three. In this case, the normal reach will directly develop into the SPSP reach without going through the character reach. In this case, a special cut-in occurs before the SPSP reaches reach, and in this embodiment, the probability of a special cut-in occurring is 100% when the final number of standby characters is three.

As is clear from the explanation up to this point, the more the number of final standby characters increases in the character standby effect, or in other words, the more the content of the character standby effect changes, the more likely the special cut-in will occur (the probability of special cut-in It has the characteristic of increasing the execution probability).

For example, the first probability is the probability that a special cut-in will start when the character standby effect has not changed from one character to two characters, and the character standby effect changes from one character to two characters. If the probability that a special cut-in will start after changing to standby (or standby for 3 characters) is the second probability, the second probability is higher than the first probability (see Figure 13 (A)) ).

Also, for example, the first probability is the probability that the special cut-in will start when the content of the character standby effect has not changed from 2 characters waiting to 3 characters waiting (2 characters waiting), and the character waiting If the second probability is the probability that the special cut-in will start after the production content changes from two characters waiting to three characters waiting, the second probability is higher than the first probability (Fig. 13(A)).

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability of occurrence of a special cut-in is higher when the performance content of the character standby performance changes than when the performance content of the character standby performance does not change. A feature is that the probability of occurrence of this event increases further by further changing the content of the character standby performance.

Therefore, for the first operation promotion effect (see FIG. 12(B)), the second operation promotion effect (see FIG. 12(D)), and the third operation promotion effect (see FIG. 12(F)), It is possible to give the player a strong motivation to operate the first performance button 35, and by changing the performance content of the character standby performance, the player's expectations for the occurrence of the special cut-in can be reduced. It is possible to improve effectively.

(Variation example regarding complex expected performance)
Regarding the composite expected performance described based on FIGS. 12 and 13, the following configuration may be adopted in other embodiments. That is, in this embodiment, a case will be explained in which a character standby effect is executed in response to an operation of the first effect button 35 for an operation promotion effect, but in other embodiments, a character standby effect is executed regardless of the operation by the player. A standby effect may also be executed.

Further, in other embodiments, the probability of occurrence of a special cut-in is higher when the character standby effect does not change than when the character standby effect changes, contrary to this embodiment. The configuration may also be adopted. In addition, the probability of occurrence of a special cut-in is higher when the number of changes in the performance content of the character standby performance is smaller than when the number of changes in the performance content of the character standby performance is greater, which is a configuration opposite to this embodiment. may be adopted. By employing both or one of these configurations, it is possible to realize a highly entertaining performance that makes the player expect that the content of the character standby performance will not change.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be explained in which the first expected performance is a character standby performance, but the first expected performance is not limited to a character standby performance. For example, a predetermined performance image (stage performance image) Other effects such as a staged effect that changes over time may also be used. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case will be explained in which the second expected performance is a special cut-in, but the second expected performance is not limited to a special cut-in, but may be other performances such as a group preview, for example. .

[About related performances]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16, related effects executed by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. Here, FIG. 14 is a screen diagram for explaining related effects. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of related effects. FIG. 16 is a flowchart for explaining execution periods of various related effects.

In FIG. 14(A), in the normal gaming state, during the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon currently displayed in the icon display area 72, the five symbols on the left are pseudo-stopped, and the five symbols on the right A scrolling display of a symbol column in a column and a symbol column in a middle column is illustrated. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbol and the performance symbol in such a normal gaming state, the related performance window 75 may be displayed at the upper right of the display screen 70 (14( See A). This related performance window 75 is a display frame used for related performances related to various performances executed by the gaming machine 1, and the related performances are executed in the area inside the related performance window 75.

As illustrated in FIG. 14(B), the related effect window 75 is divided into a past window 76, a current window 77, and a future window 78. Here, the past window 76 displays effects that have already been executed within the same variation (past This is a display frame for executing a past-related performance related to a past performance executed at a certain timing. The words "past performance" are displayed (see FIG. 14(B)). Therefore, the player can easily recognize that a past-related performance will be executed within the past window 76 by looking at the words "past performance."

The current window 77 (see FIG. 14(B)) displays the current performance (currently This is a display frame for executing the currently related production related to the current production currently being executed at the timing of , and regardless of whether or not the related production is currently being executed. The text "Current production" will be displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the related performance is currently being executed within the current window 77 by looking at the words "current performance."

The future window 78 (see FIG. 14(B)) is executed at a later timing during the variable display of the first special symbol and the production symbol, and at the same time when the related production window 75 is displayed. This is a display frame for executing future-related productions related to productions that may occur (future productions). , the words "future production" are displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that a future-related performance will be executed within the future window 78 by looking at the words "future performance".

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the past-related performance, the present-related performance, and the future-related performance are not automatically executed, and the operation lever 98 (see FIG. 5) while the related performance window 75 is displayed is not automatically executed. ), a configuration is adopted in which any one of a past-related performance, a present-related performance, and a future-related performance can be generated by a predetermined operation using the above.

Different lever operations are assigned to past-related performances, present-related performances, and future-related performances, respectively, and the player operates the operating lever 78 (lever (operation), it is possible to generate a desired related effect.

As illustrated in FIG. 14(B), directly below the past window 76 is a downward arrow representing tilting the operating lever 98 to the rear (toward the front) and a lever button imitating the lever button that the operating lever 98 has. The image and will be displayed. Note that while the related effect window 75 is displayed, these downward arrows and lever button images are always displayed. Then, during the executable period of the past-related performance, the past window 76 is highlighted while these downward arrows and lever button images remain displayed. Therefore, based on the downward arrow directly below the past window 76 and the lever button image, the player can operate (press) the lever button while tilting the operating lever 98 backwards (toward the front) to perform past-related effects. You can easily recognize that this has occurred, and you can see that the past window 76 is highlighted, indicating that the operation lever 98 for the past-related performance is in effect and the past-related performance is executable. It is possible to easily recognize that

Moreover, as illustrated in FIG. 14(B), an arrow representing tilting the operating lever 98 is not displayed directly below the current window 77, and only a lever button image is displayed. Note that while the related effect window 75 is displayed, this lever button image is always displayed. Then, during the executable period of the currently related performance, the current window 77 is highlighted while the lever button image directly below the current window 77 remains displayed. Therefore, based on the lever button image directly below the current window 77, the player can operate (press) the lever button without tilting the operating lever 98 in any direction (while maintaining the initial position) to display the currently related performance. You can easily recognize that this has occurred, and you can see that the window 77 is currently highlighted, indicating that the operating lever 98 for the related effect is currently in effect and the related effect is currently executable. It is possible to easily recognize that

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 14(B), an upward arrow representing tilting the operating lever 98 forward (forward) and a lever button image are displayed directly below the future window 78. Note that while the related effect window 75 is displayed, these upward arrows and lever button images are always displayed. Then, during the executable period of future-related effects, the future window 78 is highlighted while these upward arrows and lever button images remain displayed. Therefore, if the player operates (presses) the lever button while tilting the operating lever 98 forward (forward) based on the upward arrow directly below the future window 78 and the lever button image, a future-related effect will occur. You can easily recognize that the future window 78 is highlighted, and you can see that the operation lever 98 for future-related effects is in effect and the future-related effects are executable. It is possible to easily recognize that there is a

FIG. 15(A) shows an example of a past related effect being executed after a group preview (see FIG. 10(D)) is executed as a past effect. Specifically, since the jackpot reliability of the group preview is 50% or more, the player presses the lever button while tilting the operating lever 98 to the rear (toward the front), and the player can press the lever button with the control lever 98 tilted to the rear (towards the front). The past-related effect that displays the words "The confidence level is over 50%!" is exemplified in the past window 76. In this way, the player can obtain information regarding past performances by performing a predetermined operation on the operating lever 98 corresponding to the past performance.

In the example of FIG. 15(A), since the jackpot reliability of the group preview is specifically notified, it is possible to know the jackpot reliability of the group preview. In addition, since the text "The previous group notice is" is displayed in the past window 76, even if you miss the group notice, you can later recognize that the group notice has occurred, and you can enjoy the game. The player can enjoy the game while expecting that the winning notification performance will be executed based on the past related performances.

FIG. 15B shows an example of how a related effect is currently being executed while a character display effect for displaying a predetermined character is being executed as the current effect. The character display effect here is such that a predetermined character displayed on the display screen 70 throws an item toward the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 (see FIG. 14(A)), and this item is The icon change effect is configured in response to a collision with a pending icon. Therefore, when the player presses the lever button without tilting the operating lever 98 in any direction, the current related effect that displays the text "This character will change the hold!" is displayed in the current window 77. Occurs in In this way, the player can obtain information regarding the current performance by performing a predetermined operation on the operating lever 98 corresponding to the current performance.

When the above-mentioned character display effect is performed, at the stage when a predetermined character is displayed, there is a possibility that it is not known what kind of effect will be performed by this character. On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned currently related performance, what kind of performance will be performed by a predetermined character is notified before the icon change performance is performed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the current performance while understanding what kind of performance is currently being executed based on the currently related performance.

FIG. 15C shows an example of a future-related performance being executed in the future window 78 when SPSP reach is executed as a future performance. The player can select a future-related performance by pressing the lever button with the operating lever 98 tilted forward (forward). There will be a performance that will display the words ``It's it!''. Therefore, the player can easily recognize, based on the future-related performance, that there is a possibility that SPSP reach will be executed later. In this way, the player can obtain information regarding the future performance by performing a predetermined operation of the operating lever 98 corresponding to the future performance.

Even if it eventually develops into SPSP reach during this symbol change, it is not known whether it will really develop into SPSP reach at the stage before it develops into SPSP reach. On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned future-related performance, as long as reach is established, it is announced that it will later develop into SPSP reach. Therefore, the player can easily recognize, based on the future-related performance, what kind of performance should occur to develop the SPSP reach.

Up to this point, we have explained the past performance and the past-related performance corresponding to this past performance based on FIG. 15(A). It can be a performance. In addition, although the current performance and the current related performance corresponding to this current performance have been explained based on FIG. It's okay. Furthermore, although the future presentation and the future-related presentation corresponding to this future presentation have been explained based on FIG. It's okay.

FIG. 16(A) is a flowchart for explaining the executable period of past-related effects. As illustrated in FIG. 16(A), when three performances, production A, production B, and production C are executed during the variable display of special symbols and production symbols, the performance related to production A as the past production The executable period of past-related performance A is the period from the end of performance A until the end of performance B. During this period, the past-related performance A can be generated by the player pressing the lever button with the operating lever 98 tilted backward (toward the front).

Further, in FIG. 16(A), after presentation B ends, presentation B becomes a new past presentation instead of presentation A. Therefore, the executable period of the past related performance B related to the performance B as the past performance is the period from the end of the performance B until the end of the performance C. During this period, the past-related performance B can be generated by the player pressing the lever button with the operating lever 98 tilted backward (toward the front).

Then, after the performance C ends, the performance C becomes a new past performance instead of the performance B. Therefore, the executable period of the past related performance C related to the performance C as the past performance is the period after the performance C ends. Note that the past-related performance is often a performance that explains the past performance, and is not a performance that directly informs the jackpot reliability. For this reason, if the past-related performance (here, past-related performance C) is configured to be executable even at the end of the reach performance, it will not only reduce the interest of the reach performance, but also hinder the reach performance. Conceivable. Therefore, in this embodiment, the end of the last executable period of the past-related performance during one symbol change (in the example shown in FIG. 16(A), the executable period of the past-related performance C) is It is set a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds before) before the end of the symbol variation in the middle (see FIG. 16(A)).

FIG. 16(B) is a flowchart for explaining the currently executable period of related effects. The currently related production is a production that is related to the production currently being executed (current production) and can be executed in parallel with the current production. Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 16(B), when three performances, production A, production B, and production C are executed during the variable display of special symbols and production symbols, production A as the current production The executable period of the current related performance A related to the current performance is the period from the start of the performance A until it ends, and the executable period of the current related performance B related to the current performance B is the period from the start of the performance A until the end of the current performance. It is a period from the start to the end, and the executable period of the currently related performance C related to the performance C as the current performance is the period from the start to the end of the performance C.

Therefore, in the example of FIG. 16(B), if the lever button is pressed without tilting the operating lever 98 in any direction while performance A is being executed, the current related performance A will occur, and while performance B is being executed, the lever button will be pressed. If the lever button is pressed without tilting the operating lever 98 in any direction, the current related performance B will occur, and while performance C is being executed, if the lever button is pressed without tilting the operating lever 98 in any direction. If it is pressed, the current related effect C will occur.

FIG. 16(C) is a flowchart for explaining the executable period of future-related effects. As illustrated in FIG. 16(C), when three performances, production A, production B, and production C are executed during the variable display of special symbols and production symbols, production A is executed immediately after the start of the symbol variation. Therefore, there is not enough time to perform future-related performance A with performance A as a future performance. Therefore, in such a case, the executable period of future-related performance A is not set. In other words, future-related performance A is not executed.

As illustrated in FIG. 16(C), the performance executed after the performance A is the performance B. Therefore, the period from the end of performance A until the start of performance B is set as the executable period of future-related performance B related to performance B, and during this period, the operation lever 98 is moved to the front (forward ), it is possible to generate future-related effects B by pressing the lever button while the lever is tilted. Furthermore, after the performance B is started, the performance B is no longer an unexecuted performance, so the performance B is excluded from the target of the future performance, and the performance C becomes the target of the future performance instead. For this reason, the period from the start of performance B until the start of performance C is set as the executable period of future-related performance C related to performance C, and during this period, the operation lever 98 is moved to the front (forward ), it is possible to generate future-related effects C by pressing the lever button in a state where the lever button is tilted (see FIG. 16(C)).

Up to this point, with reference to Figures 14 to 16, we have explained past-related performances related to past performances, present-related performances related to present performances, and future-related performances related to future performances. The processing executed by the sub CPU 91 to realize (past-related performance, present-related performance, future-related performance) will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 84 and 85.

[About subjugation reach]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, the subjugation reach effect (hereinafter abbreviated as "subjugation reach") executed by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. Here, FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a series of productions of subjugation reach. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery performed according to an operation during subjugation reach.

In the subjugation reach in this embodiment, the judgment results of the second special symbol judgment performed during the probability variable game state are "10R probability variation" where the jackpot symbol Y1 is stopped and displayed, and "3R probability variation" where the jackpot symbol Y2 is stopped and displayed. This is a special reach performance that is executed when a variation pattern dedicated to subjugation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the case of "probable change" or loss.

As illustrated in Figure 17, subjugation reach consists of two types of button press effects called "subjugation continuous press effect" and ``pursuit continuous press effect'' in which the aim is to hit the jackpot by repeatedly pressing the button. As a result, "10R probability change" or "loss" is announced, and as a result of the pursuit continuous hit production developed from the subjugation button repeated press production, "10R probability variation", "3R probability variation", or "loss" is announced. There are cases and cases.

During the variable display of the second special symbol in which this subjugation reach is performed, the following effects are performed. First, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, and along with this, the variable display of the performance symbols (scrolling display of three symbol rows) is started (see FIG. 17(A)). Next, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the current symbol change, an enemy army encounter effect is displayed on the display screen 70, in which a production image showing how the own army encounters and confronts the enemy army is displayed. (See FIG. 17(B)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since this enemy army encounter effect was started, a subjugation button continuous press promotion effect (an example of the first operation promotion effect) is executed (see FIG. 17(C)). This subjugation button repeated press promotion production is configured as a production aiming to subdue the enemy army by repeatedly pressing the first production button 35, and during the valid period (during the first period) related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion production (during the first period), the first production button 35 is pressed repeatedly. The effect is to encourage the player to hit 35 in a row. Although not shown in the diagram, during the validity period related to the promotion effect for repeatedly pressing the subjugation button, there will be a text that explains the content of the effect, ``Subjugate the enemy army by repeatedly pressing the button!'' and a message that imitates the first effect button 35. An animation showing how the first production button image moves up and down, the words "Continuously hit!" displayed above the first production button image, and a remaining time gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period are displayed. .

When the player repeatedly presses the first performance button 35 during the valid period for such a subjugation button continuous press promotion performance, a subjugation image change performance is executed (see FIG. 17(D)). This subjugation image change production is a production that displays an animation showing how the enemy army gradually reduces the number of enemy soldiers while repeatedly attacking and defending the enemy army in response to repeated presses of the first production button 35. ing.

After such a subjugation image change production is executed, a subjugation success production (an example of the first success production: Fig. 17(E)) or subjugation failure effect (an example of the first failure effect: see FIG. 17(G)) is executed. The subjugation success production is a production that shows that your army has successfully subjugated the enemy army, and the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol (and production symbol) is This is a performance that can only be performed if the situation is “certain change”. For this reason, when the subjugation success performance is executed, the 10R sure-change jackpot notification will be displayed in which three performance symbols showing the number of doubles of "777" are pseudo-stopped and then the real game will be stopped, which informs you that you have won the "10R sure-change". The effect is executed (see FIG. 17(F)).

Note that the validity period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance is the validity period during which the operation of the first performance button 35 is valid, and the validity period during which the operation of the second performance button 36 is valid. That is, during the validity period of the promotion effect for repeatedly pressing the subjugation button, although the operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the second effect button 36 is not performed, even when the second effect button 36 is operated, the first effect button 35 is not pressed. As in the case of repeated hits, there is a possibility that a subjugation success effect and a 10R guaranteed strange jackpot notification effect will be executed. In FIG. 17, the words "button press repeatedly or lever operation" and the words "10R fixed change route" are replaced by the repeated presses of the first production button 35 or the second production button in the case of winning "10R probability change". 36 indicates that a subjugation success performance and a 10R guaranteed strange jackpot notification performance can be executed.

In addition, if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of this second special symbol (and production symbol) is "10R probability variation", the subjugation success performance and the 10R probability variation jackpot notification production are sure to be performed. Even if it is not executed and it is a "10R probability change", the effects after the subjugation failure effect described later may be executed.

The judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol (and production symbol) this time is "3R probability variation", "loss", and "10R probability variation". In some cases, following the subjugation image change effect, the subjugation failure effect and the enemy army escape effect are executed (see FIGS. 17(G) and (H)). Here, the subjugation failure performance is a performance that represents the disappointment of the own army after failing to subjugate the enemy army, and the enemy army escape performance is a performance that represents the remaining enemy troops fleeing. In FIG. 17, the words "10R sure change or 3R sure change or loss route" indicate the flow of this effect.

After such subjugation failure production and enemy army escape production have been executed, if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol (and production symbol) is "Loss" Regarding a part of the game, a loss notification performance may be executed in which three performance symbols indicating a reach loss are displayed in a pseudo stop and then the actual stop is performed (see FIGS. 17(H) and (I)).

On the other hand, there are some cases in which the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol (and production symbol) is "3R probability variation" and "10R probability variation". , for some cases of "losing", the following effects are performed. That is, after the enemy army escape performance, an enemy army discovery performance is executed that shows how the own army chases the enemy army and discovers the escaped enemy army (see FIG. 17(J)).

Then, following this enemy army discovery performance, a pursuit button continuous press promotion performance (an example of a second operation promotion performance) is executed (see FIG. 17(K)). This pursuit button repeated press promotion effect is configured as an effect aimed at pursuing the enemy army by repeatedly pressing the first effect button 35, and during the valid period (during the second period) related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect, the first effect button 35 is pressed repeatedly. The effect is to encourage the player to hit 35 in a row. Although not shown in the diagram, during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect, there will be text explaining the content of the effect, ``Pursue the enemy army by repeated button presses!'' and a message that imitates the first effect button 35. An animation showing how the first production button image moves up and down, the words "Continuously hit!" displayed above the first production button image, and a remaining time gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period are displayed. .

When the player repeatedly presses the first performance button 35 during the valid period for such a pursuit button continuous press promotion performance, a pursuit image change performance is executed (see FIG. 17(L)). This pursuit image change production is a production that displays an animation showing how the number of enemy soldiers gradually decreases as a result of the own army pursuing the enemy army in response to repeated presses of the first production button 35. .

After such a pursuit image change performance is executed, the first pursuit success performance (an example of a second success performance) is generated in response to the first performance button 35 being pressed repeatedly during the valid period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance. : see Figure 17 (M)), second pursuit success effect (an example of the second success effect: see Figure 17 (O)), or pursuit failure effect (an example of the second failure effect: see Figure 17 (Q)) is executed.

The first pursuit success production (see Figure 17 (M)) is a solo pursuit success production that shows the general of your army succeeding in pursuing (annihilating) the enemy army alone, and this second special symbol (and production This is an effect that can be executed only when the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed at the start of the fluctuation of the symbols (symbols) is "3R probability change". For this reason, when the first pursuit success effect is executed, the three performance symbols showing the double number of "333" to inform you that you have won the "3R definite change" are displayed in a pseudo-stop state, and then the actual stop is made.3R definite change A jackpot notification effect is executed (see FIG. 17(N)).

The 2nd successful pursuit performance (see Figure 17 (O)) is a successful joint pursuit performance that shows a successful pursuit (annihilation) of the enemy army by fighting together with allies who rushed to the rescue of one's own army. This performance is executable only when the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed at the start of the variation of the special symbols (and performance symbols) is "10R probability change". For this reason, when the second pursuit success effect is executed, the three performance symbols showing the number of doubles of "777" are displayed in a pseudo-stop to inform you that you have won the "10R definite change", and then the actual stop is made. A jackpot notification effect is executed (see FIG. 17(P)).

As is clear from the explanation so far, if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol (and production symbol) is "10R definite change", the subjugation success production ( 17(E)) and the 10R guaranteed variable jackpot notification effect (see FIG. 17(F)), the second pursuit success effect (see FIG. 17(O)) and the 10R guaranteed variable jackpot notification effect (see FIG. 17 There are times when (see (P)) is executed.

The pursuit failure performance (see Figure 17 (Q)) is a performance that represents a failure in pursuit (annihilation) of the enemy army, and the second special symbol (and performance symbol) performed at the start of the variation of this second special symbol (and performance symbol) It is executed when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "lost". Therefore, when the pursuit failure effect is executed, a loss notification effect is executed in which the three effect symbols indicating reach loss to notify a "loss" are displayed in a pseudo-stop state, and then the actual stop is performed (FIG. 17(R) reference).

As explained above with reference to FIG. 17, when the subjugation success effect (see FIG. 17(E)) is executed, the first pursuit success effect (see FIG. 17(M)), the second pursuit success effect (See FIG. 17(O)), the pursuit failure effect (see FIG. 17(Q)) is not executed, and if the subjugation failure effect (see FIG. 17(G)) is executed, the first pursuit success effect, the first 2. A successful pursuit performance or a failed pursuit performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case where two success performances (second success performance), a first pursuit success performance and a second pursuit success performance, can be performed will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, the second success performance A configuration may be adopted in which one successful pursuit performance is executed as the performance. In this case, a common pursuit success effect may be executed in both the case where the "10R probability variation" is won and the case where the "3R probability variation" is won.

<About the winning probability of each successful performance lottery>
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the success effect lottery executed in response to button operations during each valid period of subjugation reach will be described. Here, FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery performed according to the operation during subjugation reach.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the determination result of the second special symbol determination executed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in the probability variable gaming state is "10R probability variation", "3R probability variation", or , when the result is a "lose" and the variation pattern corresponding to the subjugation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 91 sets a variation performance pattern of the subjugation reach.

For example, if you win "10R Definite Change", the variable performance pattern (hereinafter referred to as "variable (referred to as "Production Pattern A"), or from the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (see Figure 17 (C)) to the subjugation failure effect (see Figure 17 (G)) and the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect (see Figure 17 (K)) A variable effect pattern (hereinafter referred to as "variable effect pattern B") is set in which the effect progresses to the second pursuit success effect (see FIG. 17(O)) via .

For example, if you win "3R Kokuhen", you can change from the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (see Figure 17 (C)) to the subjugation failure effect (see Fig. 17 (G)) and the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect (see Fig. 17 (K)). A variable effect pattern (hereinafter referred to as "variable effect pattern C") is set in which the effect progresses to the first pursuit success effect (see FIG. 17(M)) via the process (see FIG. 17(M)).

For example, if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment at the start of the fluctuation is "lose", the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (see Fig. 17(C)) to the subjugation failure effect (see Fig. 17(G)) A variable performance pattern in which the performance progresses to a failure notification performance (see Figure 17 (I)) via )) and a pursuit button repeated press promotion effect (see FIG. 17(K)) to a pursuit failure effect (see FIG. 17(Q)). A variable effect pattern is set.

Then, the sub CPU 91 uses the effect pattern set by the sub CPU 91 by transmitting a variable effect start command including information indicating the variable effect pattern of the set subjugation reach to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120). A subjugation reach will be carried out.

Here, when the sub CPU 91 sets the variable effect pattern A, that is, the effect progresses from the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (see FIG. 17(C)) to the subjugation success effect (see FIG. 17(E)). When a variable effect pattern is set, the following processing is executed. That is, the sub CPU 91 generates an operation random number in response to the first performance button 35 (or second performance button 36) being operated during the validity period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance (see FIG. 17(C)). get. Then, a subjugation success effect lottery is executed to determine whether or not the obtained operation random number matches a preset winning value. (see).

Specifically, the sub CPU 91 detects the first performance button detection sensor 96 (or the second performance button) during the valid period related to the suppression button repeated press promotion performance regarding the operation random number that is updated as appropriate by the random number update process in the sub control board 90. The value at the time when the operation signal is output from the detection sensor 97) is acquired as an operation random number and stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93. Then, a subjugation success effect lottery is executed to determine whether or not the operation random number stored in the predetermined area matches any of the random numbers stored in the sub ROM 92.

In this embodiment, the possible values of the operation random number are set to 100 from "0" to "99", and regarding the first operation of the first performance button 35 during the valid period related to the suppression button repeated press promotion performance. 20 random numbers (winning value) are stored, and 10 random numbers (winning value) are stored for the second and subsequent operations of the first performance button 35 during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance. ing.

When the first operation button 35 is operated for the first time during the effective period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect, that is, the sub CPU 91 detects the first operation from the first effect button detection sensor 96 during this effective period. When the signal is output, it is determined whether or not to execute the subjugation success performance based on whether or not the operation random number stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 matches any of the above-mentioned 20 random numbers. Here, if the acquired and stored operation random number matches any of the 20 random numbers, the subjugation success performance is executed immediately after the subjugation image change performance is executed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the subjugation success effect is not executed regarding the first operation of the first effect button 35 during the validity period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect, that is, the acquired and stored operation random number is 20. If it does not match any of the random numbers, the processing related to the successful subjugation performance lottery is ended without executing the subjugation success performance after performing the subjugation image change performance.

Then, when the first performance button 35 is operated for the second time or later during the validity period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance, the sub CPU 91 determines that the operation random number acquired in accordance with the operation is Based on whether or not it matches any of the numerical values (winning value), it is determined whether or not to execute the subjugation success effect. Here, if the acquired and stored operation random number matches any one of the ten random numbers, the subjugation success performance is executed immediately after the subjugation image change performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the operation random number can take the above-mentioned 100 random values, 20 random values are stored for the first operation of the first performance button 35. Ten random numbers are stored for the second and subsequent operations. Therefore, the probability that a successful subjugation performance will be executed in response to the first operation of the first performance button 35 during the valid period for the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance is 20% (=20/100×100), The probability that the subjugation success performance will be executed in response to the second and subsequent operations of the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the button press promotion performance is 10% (=10/100×100) (Figure 18 (See (A)).

In this embodiment, the subjugation success effect lottery is executed every time the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect, and if the subjugation successful effect lottery is unsuccessful, the subjugation image change effect is executed. If the successful subjugation effect lottery is won, the subjugation image change effect and the successful subjugation effect are executed. Therefore, even if the player operates the first performance button 35, if it is difficult to win the successful subjugation performance lottery, only the subjugation image change performance will be repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, when the second performance button 36 is operated during the effective period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance, that is, when an operation signal is output from the second performance button detection sensor 97 during this valid period, the sub CPU 91 , similarly to the case where the first effect button 35 is operated, an operation random number is obtained and stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93. In this embodiment, when the second effect button 36 is operated, similarly to when the first effect button 35 is operated, the operation random number is configured to take the above-mentioned 100 random values. . Then, in the sub ROM 92, a random number value that is the same as the 100 random numbers that can be taken by the operation random number regarding the operation of the second performance button 36 is stored as a winning value. Therefore, when the second performance button 36 is operated, the probability that the successful subjugation performance will be executed is 100% (=100/100×100), and the second performance will be executed during the valid period related to the continuous press promotion performance of the subjugation button. If the button 36 is operated, the subjugation success effect will definitely be executed (see FIG. 18(A)).

Therefore, if the successful suppression effect is not executed even if the first effect button 35 is operated several times during the valid period for the continuous press promotion effect of the subjugation button (see FIG. 17(C)), the player may By operating the performance button 36, it is possible to easily generate a subjugation success performance. In addition, if the player wants to know quickly whether or not the successful subjugation effect will be executed, the player can press the second effect button 35 without operating the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the continuous press promotion effect of the subjugation button. By operating , it is possible to quickly find out whether or not the subjugation success production will be executed.

Furthermore, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 18(A), with regard to the second and subsequent operations of the second performance button 36 during the validity period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance, the winning value related to the subjugation successful performance lottery Not prepared. For this reason, the subjugation success performance will not be executed in response to the second and subsequent operations of the second performance button 36 during the validity period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance.

In this embodiment, during the validity period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect, the operation of the second effect button 36 is valid only once, regardless of whether the first effect button 35 is operated or not. will be explained using an example. For example, on the condition that the number of operations of the first effect button 35 performed during the validity period related to the suppression button repeated press promotion effect reaches a predetermined number of times, the operation of the second effect button 36 is It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the information is enabled.

Here, with reference to FIG. 18(A), the subjugation success effect lottery and the subjugation success effect lottery performed when the first effect button 35 (or second effect button 36) is operated during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect. Although the probability of winning has been explained, this subjugation success effect lottery is performed only when the variable effect pattern A is selected as the variable effect pattern of the subjugation reach. In other words, even if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol in which the subjugation reach is executed is "10R probability change", the subjugation button repeated press is promoted as the variation production pattern of the subjugation reach. From the performance (see Figure 17(C)) to the subjugation failure performance (see Figure 17(G)) and the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance (see Figure 17(K)), the second pursuit success performance (see Figure 17(O)) When variable performance pattern B in which the performance progresses to (see) is set, a configuration is adopted in which the successful subjugation performance lottery is not executed so that the successful subjugation performance is not executed. Therefore, when variable performance pattern B is set as a variable performance pattern for subjugation reach, no matter how many times the first performance button 35 or second performance button 36 is operated during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance. Also, the subjugation success effect is not executed, and the subjugation image change effect is executed every time an operation is performed.

Next, the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol when the subjugation reach is executed is "10R probability change", and the subjugation button repeated press promotion production ( (See Figure 17(C)) to the second pursuit success rendering (See Figure 17(O)) via the subjugation failure rendering (See Figure 17(G)) and the pursuit button repeated press promotion rendering (See Figure 17(K)) When a variable performance pattern B in which the performance progresses to the next level is set, a second pursuit success performance lottery to be executed during the validity period related to this pursuit button repeated press promotion performance will be explained.

In this embodiment, when the "10R probability change" is won and the subjugation reach progresses to the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect, the first effect button 35 is operated in accordance with the valid period of this pursuit button repeated press promotion effect. 2 pursuit success effect lottery is executed by the sub CPU 91. When the first performance button 35 is operated during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance, the sub CPU 91 acquires an operation random number and stores it in a predetermined value in the sub RAM 93, similarly to during the validity period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance. Store in area.

On the other hand, the sub ROM 92 stores 10 random values (winning values) for the second pursuit success performance lottery regarding the first operation of the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance. are stored, and 15 winning values are stored for the second and subsequent operations of the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance. Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 18(B), the probability that the second pursuit success performance will be executed in response to the first operation of the first performance button 35 during the validity period of the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance is 10% (=10/100×100), and the probability that the second pursuit success performance will be executed in response to the second and subsequent operations of the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance is 15. % (=15/100×100).

If you do not win the second pursuit success performance lottery, the pursuit image change performance is executed, and if you win the second pursuit success performance lottery in response to the next operation of the first performance button 35, the pursuit image change The performance and the second pursuit success performance are executed. That is, until the second pursuit successful performance lottery is won, the pursuit image change performance will be repeatedly executed every time the first performance button 35 is operated.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 18(B), the winning value for the second pursuit success performance lottery is not prepared for the operation of the second performance button 36 during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance. do not have. That is, even if the second performance button 36 is operated during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance, the second pursuit success performance lottery is not executed, and the second performance button 36 is operated during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance. The second pursuit success effect is not executed in response to the operation.

On the other hand, if you win "3R Definitely" and the subjugation reach progresses to the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect, the first pursuit success will be achieved according to the operation of the first performance button 35 during the valid period of this pursuit button repeated press promotion effect. The performance lottery is executed by the sub CPU 91. When the first performance button 35 is operated during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance, the sub CPU 91 acquires an operation random number and stores it in a predetermined value in the sub RAM 93, similarly to during the validity period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance. Store in area.

On the other hand, the sub ROM 92 stores 5 random numbers (winning values) for the first pursuit success performance lottery regarding the first operation of the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance. are stored, and 20 winning values are stored for the second and subsequent operations of the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance. Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 18(C), the probability that the first pursuit success effect will be executed in response to the first operation of the first effect button 35 during the validity period of the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect is 5% (=5/100×100), and the probability that the first pursuit success performance will be executed in response to the second and subsequent operations of the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance is 20. % (=20/100×100).

If you do not win the first pursuit success performance lottery, a pursuit image change performance is executed, and if you win the first pursuit success performance lottery in response to the next operation of the first performance button 35, the pursuit image change The performance and the first pursuit success performance are executed. That is, until the first pursuit successful performance lottery is won, the pursuit image change performance will be repeatedly executed every time the first performance button 35 is operated.

Note that, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 18(C), the winning value for the first pursuit success performance lottery is not prepared for the operation of the second performance button 36 during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance. do not have. That is, even if the second performance button 36 is operated during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance, the first pursuit success performance lottery is not executed, and the second performance button 36 is operated during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance. The first pursuit success effect is not performed in response to the operation.

In this way, if the second performance button 36 is operated during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance, the subjugation success performance (see FIG. 17(E)) may be executed in accordance with the operation. On the other hand, if the second performance button 36 is operated during the valid period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance, the first pursuit success performance and the second pursuit success performance are executed in accordance with the operation. Never.

Up to this point, the subjugation reach has been described based on FIGS. 17 and 18, but the processing executed by the sub CPU 91 to realize this subjugation reach will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 76, 86, 87, etc.

[About the type of jackpot random number and advance judgment information]
Next, the types of jackpot random numbers and advance determination information will be explained with reference to FIG. 19. Here, FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the preliminary determination information, FIG. 19(A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the type of jackpot random number and the jackpot preliminary determination information, and FIG. ) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various types of preliminary determination information included in the hold command transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 in a state where the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination has not reached the upper limit, the main CPU 81 acquires a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variable pattern random number. Here, the jackpot random number is acquired information used to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game, and the symbol random number determines the type of jackpot (the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game, etc.) This is type information for The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform a reach effect or a reach effect when it is determined not to execute a jackpot game, and the variation pattern random number determines the variation pattern of the special symbol. is a random number. These jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuating pattern random numbers are obtained in the same way when a game ball enters the second starting port 22 while the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination has not reached the upper limit. be done.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first starting port 21 (or second starting port 22) in a situation where the special symbol determination cannot be executed immediately, such as during a variable display of special symbols or during a jackpot game, The jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variable pattern random number acquired in response to this winning are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 as information that reserves the right to judge the special symbol. This predetermined area of the main RAM 83 will be described in detail later based on FIG. 55.

In this way, when the right for special symbol determination is reserved, the main CPU 81 executes a preliminary determination process as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game, prior to executing the special symbol determination corresponding to the right. do. Specifically, when a jackpot random number etc. is obtained in response to a game ball winning in the first starting port 21 (or second starting port 22), the obtained jackpot random number is a winning number stored in advance in the main ROM 82. It is determined in advance whether or not a jackpot game will be executed based on whether or not the value matches the value.

(Classification of jackpot random numbers obtained in low probability state)
Here, a jackpot random number obtained in response to a game ball winning in the first starting port 21 (or second starting port 22) in a low probability state (in this embodiment, a normal gaming state or a time-saving gaming state) As illustrated in FIG. 19(A), the "confirmed winning random number" (an example of the first acquired information), the "provisional losing random number" (an example of the second acquired information), and the "confirmed losing random number" ,are categorized.

As described above based on FIG. 6(A), in this embodiment, four random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "winning values" for the low probability state, and , "4" to "839" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "rejection values". Furthermore, regarding the high probability state (in this embodiment, the variable probability gaming state), 14 random numbers from "0" to "13" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "winning values", and "14" to "839" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "winning values". ” are stored in the main ROM 82 as “rejection values.”

Here, out of a total of 840 random numbers from "0" to "839," the four random numbers from "0" to "3" are "winning" for both the low probability state and the high probability state. value" in the main ROM 82 (see FIG. 6(A)). This means that if the obtained jackpot random number is one of "0" to "3", regardless of whether the state when the special symbol judgment is executed is a low probability state or a high probability state. This means that it is determined to be a "big hit." Therefore, the jackpot random numbers "0" to "3", which are acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to judge special symbols when the probability is low, correspond to the right, as shown in FIG. 19(A). Regardless of whether the state when the special symbol judgment is executed is a low probability state or a high probability state, it will match the "winning value" and be judged as a "jackpot", so the "confirmed hit random number" It can be classified into

On the other hand, out of a total of 840 random numbers from "0" to "839," 10 random numbers from "4" to "13" are related to low probability states, as illustrated in FIG. 6(A). is stored in the main ROM 82 as a "losing value", and in the high probability state is stored as a "winning value" in the main ROM 82. This means that if the obtained jackpot random number is one of "4" to "13" and the state when special symbol determination is executed is a low probability state, it will be determined as a "lose", and the special symbol This means that if the state when the determination is executed is a high probability state, it will be determined as a "jackpot". Therefore, the jackpot random numbers "4" to "13", which are acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to judge special symbols when the probability is low, correspond to the right, as shown in FIG. 19(A). If the state when the special symbol determination is executed is a low probability state (same as when winning the starting opening), it will match the "rejection value" and will be determined as a "lose", while the special symbol corresponding to that right If the state when the determination is executed changes from a low probability state to a high probability state, it matches the "winning value" and is determined to be a "big win." From this, the jackpot random numbers "4" to "13", which are acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to make a special symbol judgment when in a low probability state, are If it is determined to be a "lose" and the special symbol determination is executed after transitioning to a high probability state, it is determined to be a "jackpot", and therefore it can be classified as a "provisional lose random number".

In addition, out of a total of 840 random numbers from "0" to "839," 826 random numbers from "14" to "839" are the "rejection value" for both the low probability state and the high probability state. " is stored in the main ROM 82 (see FIG. 6(A)). This means that if the acquired jackpot random number is one of "14" to "839", regardless of whether the state when the special symbol judgment is executed is a low probability state or a high probability state. This means that it will be judged as a "lose". Therefore, the jackpot random numbers "14" to "839" that are acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to judge special symbols when the probability is low correspond to that right, as shown in Figure 19 (A). Regardless of whether the state when the special symbol judgment is executed is a low probability state or a high probability state, it matches the "rejection value" and is determined to be a "lose", so the "loss confirmed random number" It can be classified into

(Classification of jackpot random numbers obtained in high probability state)
As illustrated in FIG. 19(A), the jackpot random number obtained in response to the game ball winning in the first starting port 21 (or second starting port 22) in the high probability state is The random numbers are classified into "determined random numbers,""provisional winning random numbers" (an example of the second acquired information), and "determined loss random numbers."

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the four random numbers "0" to "3" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "winning values" for both the low probability state and the high probability state. is stored (see FIG. 6(A)). Therefore, the jackpot random numbers "0" to "3", which are acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to judge special symbols when in a high probability state, correspond to the right, as shown in FIG. 19(A). Regardless of whether the state when the special symbol judgment is executed is a low probability state or a high probability state, it will match the "winning value" and be judged as a "jackpot", so when the state is low probability state Similar to the jackpot random numbers "0" to "3" that are acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to judge special symbols, these can be classified as "confirmed hit random numbers."

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, the 10 random numbers "4" to "13" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "winning values" for high probability states, and "lost values" for low probability states. value" is stored in the main ROM 82. This means that if the jackpot random number obtained in the high probability state is one of "4" to "13", the state when the special symbol judgment is executed is (any of these jackpot random numbers). If it is in a high probability state (same as when the is obtained), it is determined as a "jackpot", and for example, by winning a normal jackpot, the state when special symbol determination is executed changes from a high probability state to a low probability state. If it changes, it means that it is judged as a "lose". From this, the jackpot random numbers "4" to "13", which are acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to judge special symbols when in a high probability state, are If it is determined to be a "jackpot" and the special symbol determination is executed after transitioning to a low probability state, it is determined to be a "loss", and therefore it can be classified as a "temporary hit random number".

Also, as mentioned above, out of a total of 840 random numbers from "0" to "839", 826 random numbers from "14" to "839" are in either the low probability state or the high probability state. This is also stored in the main ROM 82 as a "rejection value". Therefore, the jackpot random numbers "14" to "839" that are acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to judge special symbols when in a high probability state correspond to the right, as shown in Figure 19 (A). Regardless of whether the state when the special symbol judgment is executed is a low probability state or a high probability state, it will match the "rejection value" and will be judged as a "lose", so when it is a low probability state Similar to the jackpot random numbers "14" to "839" that are acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to judge special symbols, these can be classified as "lost guaranteed random numbers."

In a low probability state, the main CPU 81 determines to execute a jackpot game if the jackpot random number acquired at the time of starting opening winning is a "confirmed winning random number", while determining that the jackpot random number acquired at starting opening winning is a "provisional loss random number". ” or “a guaranteed loss random number”, it is determined that the jackpot game will not be executed. On the other hand, in a high probability state, if the jackpot random number obtained at the time of winning the starting slot is one of the "confirmed hit random number", "temporary loss random number", or "temporary winning random number", it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed, and the jackpot game is determined to be executed. If the jackpot random number obtained at the time of winning a prize is a "lost confirmed random number", it is determined that the jackpot game will not be executed.

The main CPU 81 converts various random numbers such as a jackpot random number into a first special symbol determination (or a second special When acquired and stored as information for reserving the rights (symbol determination), the sub-control board 90 sends a reservation command containing jackpot preliminary determination information (“confirmed hit information,” “provisional loss information,” or “confirmed loss information”) Send to.

Here, the "confirmed hit information" is information that notifies that the jackpot random number acquired as information for reserving the right to judge a special symbol when the probability is low is the "confirmed hit random number." "Temporary loss information" is information that notifies that the jackpot random number acquired as information for reserving the right to judge a special symbol in a low probability state is a "provisional loss random number." "Loss confirmation information" is information that notifies that the jackpot random number acquired as information for reserving the right to judge a special symbol in a low probability probability state is a "loss confirmation random number."

In this way, since the main control board 80 sends the sub-control board 90 a pending command that includes jackpot preliminary determination information in a low probability state, the sub-CPU 91 of the sub-control board 90 receives information included in this pending command. Based on the preliminary jackpot determination information provided, it is possible to easily identify what the determination result will be if the suspended special symbol determination is executed at the time the suspension command is received. .

For example, if a pending command that includes "confirmed hit information" is received as jackpot preliminary determination information, and a special symbol determination corresponding to the pending command is executed based on this "confirmed hit information", the state at that time It is possible to easily specify that the game is determined to be a "jackpot" regardless of whether the game is in a low probability state or a high probability state. In addition, if a pending command that includes "provisional loss information" is received as jackpot preliminary judgment information, and a special symbol judgment corresponding to the pending command is executed based on this "temporary loss information", the state at that time It is possible to easily specify that if the current state is in a low probability state, it is determined to be a "lose", and if the state at that time is in a high probability state, it is determined to be a "jackpot". In addition, if a pending command that includes "loss confirmation information" is received as jackpot preliminary judgment information, when a special symbol judgment corresponding to the pending command is executed based on this "loss confirmation information", the It is possible to easily identify whether the state is a low probability state or a high probability state, which is determined to be a "lose" state.

The main CPU 81 converts various random numbers such as a jackpot random number into a second special symbol judgment (or a first special When acquired and stored as information for reserving the rights (symbol determination), the sub-control board 90 sends a reservation command including jackpot preliminary determination information (“confirmed hit information,” “provisional win information,” or “confirmed loss information”) Send to.

Here, the "confirmed hit information" is information that notifies that the jackpot random number acquired as information for reserving the right to judge a special symbol in a high probability state is the "confirmed hit random number." "Temporary hit information" is information that notifies that the jackpot random number acquired as information for reserving the right to judge a special symbol in a high probability state is a "tentative win random number." "Loss confirmation information" is information that notifies that the jackpot random number acquired as information for reserving the right to judge a special symbol in a high probability state is a "loss confirmation random number."

In this way, since the main control board 80 sends the sub-control board 90 a pending command that includes jackpot advance determination information in a high probability state, the sub-CPU 91 of the sub-control board 90 receives information that is included in this pending command. Based on the preliminary jackpot determination information provided, it is possible to easily identify what the determination result will be if the suspended special symbol determination is executed at the time the suspension command is received. .

For example, if a pending command that includes "provisional winning information" is received as jackpot preliminary judgment information in a high probability state, and a special symbol judgment corresponding to the pending command is executed based on this "temporary winning information", , if the state at that time remains a high probability state, it will be determined as a "jackpot", and if the state at that time changes from a high probability state to a low probability state, it will be determined as a "lose". It is possible to specify

Based on the jackpot advance judgment information included in the hold command received from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 determines the state at the time of hold expiration (low probability state or high probability state) and the state when special symbol judgment is executed. It is possible to accurately specify the relationship between the determination result and the determination result, and based on this determination result, it is possible to appropriately control the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the result of the preliminary determination process.

FIG. 19(B) shows various preliminary determination information transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 in a form included in the pending command together with the jackpot preliminary determination information explained based on FIG. 19(A). Illustrated. The main CPU 81 executes a predetermined preliminary judgment process based on the jackpot random number etc. acquired in response to the starting opening winning, and as information indicating the result of this preliminary judgment process, winning starting opening information, jackpot preliminary judgment information, jackpot type. A hold command including advance determination information, variation pattern information, and game status information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

Here, the winning starting hole information is whether various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers were acquired when the game ball entered the first starting hole 21, or whether the winning starting hole information was obtained when the game ball entered the second starting hole 22. This information indicates whether the information was acquired as a result of an event.

The jackpot preliminary determination information is as described above based on FIG. 19(A), and a special symbol is determined in response to the game ball winning in the first starting port 21 (or second starting port 22) in a low probability state. If the right is withheld, "win confirmation information", "provisional loss information", or "loss confirmation information" is sent to the sub-control board 90 as jackpot preliminary determination information (see FIG. 19(B)) . In addition, if the right to judge a special symbol is reserved in response to a game ball winning in the first starting port 21 (or second starting port 22) in a high probability state, "hit confirmation information", "provisional winning information" "information" or "loss confirmation information" is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 as jackpot preliminary determination information (see FIG. 19(B)).

The jackpot type preliminary determination information is information indicating what type of jackpot is. As described above with reference to FIG. 6A, for the low probability state, four random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored in the main ROM 82 as winning values. For this reason, with conventional pachinko gaming machines, when a jackpot game is executed, the jackpot random number obtained when the probability is low matches any of the above winning values of "0" to "3". If it is determined, the type of jackpot (special game) is specified based on the pattern random number acquired together with this jackpot random number, and the type of jackpot (special game) is specified, and the identified Information indicating the type of jackpot is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in a form included in the pending command.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot random number acquired in the low probability state is the "confirmed hit random number" (in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3": FIG. 19(A) (see), but also when the jackpot random number obtained in the low probability state is a "temporary loss random number" (in this embodiment, any one of "4" to "13": see FIG. 19(A)) Also, the type of jackpot (special game) is specified based on the symbol random number acquired together with this jackpot random number. Then, a command to suspend the preliminary determination information (jackpot preliminary determination information) indicating the result of the preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute the jackpot game and the information (special game information) indicating the type of the specified jackpot (jackpot game) This pending command is sent to the sub-control board 90.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 6(A), random numbers from "4" to "13" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "lost values" for low probability states. Therefore, if a jackpot random number obtained in a low probability state is stored as information that reserves the right to judge a special symbol, that is, if a "temporary loss random number" is obtained and stored in a low probability state, the right to judge a special symbol will be reserved. If the state when the special symbol judgment corresponding to the right is made is the same low probability state as when the right of this special symbol judgment was reserved, it will be determined as a "lose" by this special symbol judgment. .

However, the random numbers "4" to "13" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "winning values" for high probability states (see FIG. 6(A)). For this reason, after the "temporary loss random number" is acquired and stored in the low probability state, for example, the result of the previously pending special symbol judgment becomes a "probable variable jackpot", and the state changes from the low probability state to the high probability state. If this changes and the special symbol determination based on the above-mentioned "temporary loss random number" is performed with high probability, the result of this special symbol determination will be a "jackpot."

In other words, the "temporary loss random number" obtained in a low probability state basically matches the "rejection value", but if the state when special symbol judgment is executed based on this "temporary loss random number" is low If it changes from a probability state to a high probability state, it can be said that it is a jackpot random number with an uncertain element, which matches the "winning value" rather than the "losing value".

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot preliminary determination information in the low probability state is "confirmed hit information" (that is, when the jackpot random number acquired in the low probability state is the "confirmed hit random number") ), but also when the preliminary jackpot determination information in a low probability state is "provisional loss information" (i.e., when the jackpot random number obtained in a low probability state is a "provisional loss random number"), the jackpot random number and The type of jackpot (jackpot game) is specified based on the symbol random numbers acquired together, and the jackpot type preliminary judgment information indicating the identification result is called jackpot preliminary judgment information (herein, "confirmed hit information" or "temporary hit information"). This information is sent to the sub-control board 90 together with the "missing information").

In FIG. 20(A), when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state (low probability state), the special symbol 1 A state in which three pending icons, ie, pending, special figure 1 second pending, and special figure 1 third pending, are displayed is illustrated. Here, regarding the special drawing 1 3rd reservation, the "temporary loss random number" is acquired, and the "temporary loss information" is acquired as the jackpot preliminary judgment information, so it is clear from the notation in Figure 19 (A). As such, if the reservation corresponding to the third reservation of special drawing 1 is exhausted in a low probability state, it will be determined as a "lose".

However, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 20(A), since the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the special symbol 1 first reservation is "5R probability change", it corresponds to the special symbol 1 third reservation. Before the reservation is exhausted, specifically, at the time when the jackpot game corresponding to the first reservation of special figure 1 ends, the state will shift from the low probability state to the high probability state, and as a result, the special figure 1 The determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the third pending is a "jackpot".

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a "temporary loss random number" is acquired in a low probability state and "temporary loss information" is acquired as jackpot preliminary determination information, this loss can be detected. Along with the "temporary loss information" shown in FIG.

For this reason, the sub CPU 91 of the sub control board 90, at the time when the first special symbol determination corresponding to the third reservation of the special symbol 1 is suspended, although the determination result is "lost", there is a high probability that the determination result will be "lost" before the suspension is If the state shifts to the state, it becomes a "jackpot", and it is possible to specify the type of jackpot based on the provisional loss information and the jackpot type preliminary determination information.

As a result, the sub CPU 91 is able to execute an icon change effect as illustrated in FIG. 21 regarding the special figure 1 third hold based on receiving the hold command related to the special figure 1 third hold. It is. FIG. 21 illustrates a state in which a red pending icon is displayed as the first pending special figure 1 because the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the first pending special figure 1 is "5R probability change". has been done. In addition, in FIG. 21, the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the special figure 1 third hold is performed in a high probability state, and the judgment result is a "jackpot", so the special figure 1 third hold is expanded/reduced. In this example, the icon is displayed as an enlargement/reduction hold icon that repeats the process, and a message saying "If the probability is changing, you might win!" is displayed above the enlargement/reduction hold icon.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a "temporary loss random number" is acquired in a low probability state and the jackpot preliminary determination information becomes "temporary loss information", that is, although it is basically a "loss", It is also possible to provide an opportunity for a look-ahead effect even in cases where a "big hit" would result if the game had moved from a low probability state to a high probability state before the hold was exhausted.

In addition, here, we have explained the case where an icon change effect using a pending icon is executed based on "temporary loss information" and "jackpot type pre-determination information", but other pre-reading based on this information is explained. It is also possible to perform a performance.

Returning to the explanation of the "jackpot type preliminary determination information" in FIG. 19, the main CPU 81 determines whether it is a hit if the winning is started in a low probability state (if the game ball is won in the first starting opening 21 or the second starting opening 22). The jackpot type preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 together with the confirmed information or the provisional loss information. This is as described above.

On the other hand, the main CPU 81 acquires a "determined loss random number" in response to a starting winning in a low probability state, and sends "decision confirmed information" indicating that this "determined loss random number" has been acquired to the sub-control board 90. When transmitting, jackpot type advance determination information is not transmitted. This means that if a "determined loss random number" is obtained, the special symbol judgment based on this "definite loss random number" will be determined as a "lose" regardless of whether it is in a low probability state or a high probability state. This is because there is no need to notify the sub-control board 90 of the type of jackpot.

Next, the handling of the jackpot type preliminary determination information when a game ball enters the second starting port 22 (or first starting port 21) in a high probability state will be explained. When the main CPU 81 starts winning in such a high probability state, the main CPU 81 transmits "jackpot type information" to the sub control board 90 together with "confirmed win information" or "provisional win information", When transmitting "confirmation information", control is performed such that "jackpot type information" is not transmitted (see FIG. 19(B)).

When a winning is started in a high probability state and a "confirmed hit random number" is acquired, the main CPU 81 controls the "jackpot type preliminary determination information" together with the "confirmed win information" (see FIG. 19(A)). It is transmitted to the board 90 (see FIG. 19(B)). This means that when a "confirmed hit random number" is obtained, regardless of whether the state when special symbol judgment is executed based on this confirmed hit random number is a high probability state or a low probability state. This is because it will be a jackpot.

In addition, if a starting prize is won in a high probability state and a "provisional winning random number" is acquired, the main CPU 81 outputs "jackpot type preliminary determination information" together with "temporary winning information" (see FIG. 19(A)). It is transmitted to the sub control board 90 (see FIG. 19(B)). This means that if a "temporary hit random number" is obtained in a high probability state, and the state when special symbol determination is executed based on this "temporary win random number" remains in the high probability state, it will be a "jackpot", This is basically because it needs to be the target of a look-ahead presentation.

The variation pattern information (see FIG. 19(B)) is information indicating a variation pattern of the special symbol. If the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved in response to the game ball entering the first starting slot 21, information indicating the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is transferred from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. Sent. On the other hand, if the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved in response to the game ball entering the second starting port 22, information indicating the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board. 90. The gaming status information is information indicating the gaming status of the gaming machine 1 at the time when the jackpot random number and the like are acquired in response to the starting winning.

In FIG. 20(B), when the game is controlled in a variable probability gaming state (high probability state), the special symbol 2 first A state in which four pending icons, ie, pending, special drawing 2 second holding, special drawing 2 third holding, and special drawing 2 fourth holding, are displayed is illustrated. Here, regarding the 4th reservation of special drawing 2, the "temporary hit random number" is acquired and the "temporary hit information" is acquired as the jackpot preliminary judgment information, so it is clear from the notation in FIG. 19 (A) As such, if the hold corresponding to the fourth hold of special drawing 2 is exhausted in a high probability state, it will be determined as a "jackpot".

However, as is clear from the notation in Figure 20(B), since the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the special figure 2 second reservation is "3R normal", it corresponds to the special figure 2 fourth reservation. Before the hold is exhausted, specifically, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the special figure 2 second hold becomes a time-saving game state (low probability state), and as a result, the special figure 2 second hold is The determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to 4-holding is "lose".

In such a case, regarding the right to judge the second special symbol related to the fourth reservation of the special symbol 2, since a reservation command including "temporary hit information" is sent from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90, the sub CPU 91 is based on this "temporary hit information" and the state (low probability state in the example shown in FIG. 20(B)) when the second special symbol determination related to the fourth reservation of the special symbol 2 is executed. It is also possible to perform performance control such that the right of second special symbol judgment related to the fourth reservation of special symbol 2 is not subject to pre-read performance.

<Special drawing 2 pending jackpot suggestion performance>
FIG. 22 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the special drawing 2 pending jackpot suggestion production. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the time when the third round of the jackpot game starts, the reserved second special symbol judgment right includes a "probable jackpot". In this case, during the third round game, special drawing 2 pending probability strange jackpot suggestion performance may be executed (see FIG. 22(A)). In FIG. 22(A), a background image displayed on the display screen 70 is shown to indicate that the reserved second special symbol determination rights include a "probable jackpot". As an example, a special drawing 2 pending probability variable jackpot suggestion performance that displays a pending probability variable jackpot suggestion background that is different from the normal background during a round is illustrated.

In addition, in FIG. 22(B), a message is displayed on the display screen 70 to suggest that the reserved second special symbol determination right includes a "normal jackpot". As a background image, a special drawing 2 pending normal jackpot suggestion performance that displays a pending normal jackpot suggestion background that is different from the normal round background is illustrated.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above based on FIG. 19, a game ball enters the second starting port 22 in a high probability state and a "confirmed winning random number" or "temporary winning random number" is obtained. In other words, if "confirmed hit information" or "provisional win information" is acquired as jackpot pre-judgment information, the jackpot type pre-judgment information is the main control, along with the "confirmed win information" or "temporary win information". It is transmitted from the board 80 to the sub control board 90. For this reason, it is possible to execute an accurate special symbol 2 pending jackpot suggestion performance based on the jackpot type preliminary determination information, taking into account the state at the time of pending expiration corresponding to the pending second special symbol judgment right. It is possible.

Up to this point, based on FIGS. 19 to 22, we have explained the type of jackpot random number, various advance determination information, icon change effect using a pending icon, and effect suggesting a jackpot within special figure 2 reservation. In order to realize these effects, The preliminary determination process executed by the main CPU 81 will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 58 and 59. Further, the processing executed by the sub CPU 91 to realize these effects will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 69 and 70.

[Chance production and suggestion production]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, a description will be given of the chance effect and the suggestion effect executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. Here, FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of chance performance and suggestion performance. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability and characteristics of the chance performance and the suggestion performance.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a chance performance (an example of an expected performance) and a suggestion performance may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. The chance performance is a performance that makes the player expect that the winning notification performance will be executed. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the chance performance is set to about 25%, and even if the chance performance is executed alone, the performance is such that a jackpot can be expected (see FIG. 24). In other words, even if the suggestion performance is not executed after the chance performance, a jackpot can be expected. As described above, since the jackpot reliability of the chance performance is set to a relatively high value, the player plays the game while expecting that the winning notification performance will be executed based on the occurrence of the chance performance. can be enjoyed.

Note that the chance effect may be any effect as long as it can make the player expect that the winning notification effect will be executed, but in this embodiment, the predetermined character !'' is displayed on the display screen 70, and the speaker 38 outputs a voice saying ``Chance!''. In this embodiment, the case where there is only one type of chance performance will be explained as an example, but for example, if multiple types of chance performances with different performance modes are prepared and when executing the chance performance, one Alternatively, one chance performance may be selected and executed.

The suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that a winning notification performance will be executed, and in this embodiment, two types of suggestion performance are prepared: a low suggestion performance and a high suggestion performance (see FIG. 24). Here, the low suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility that a winning notification performance will be executed, and that the possibility of this is relatively low. On the other hand, the highly suggestive performance is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility that a winning notification performance will be executed, and that the possibility is relatively high. In other words, when comparing a low-suggestive performance and a high-suggestive performance, the high-suggestive performance has a higher jackpot reliability than the low-suggestive performance.

In this embodiment, the low-suggestive performances include a first low-suggestive performance, a second low-suggestive performance, and a third low-suggestive performance that are classified into the low-suggestive performance group, as illustrated in FIG. Three types of low suggestion performances are prepared, and when a low suggestion performance is executed, one of the three types of low suggestion performances classified into a low suggestion performance group is selected and executed. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the first low suggestion effect is set to approximately 3%, the jackpot reliability of the second low suggestion effect is approximately 5%, and the jackpot reliability of the third low suggestion effect is set to approximately 7%. There is.

The first low-suggestion performance, the second low-suggestion performance, and the third low-suggestion performance in this embodiment are all configured as a character display performance that displays the words “Look forward to it!” on the display screen 70. In addition, the font colors are different in the first low-suggestion performance, the second low-suggestion performance, and the third low-suggestion performance. Specifically, the first low suggestion effect is a text display effect that displays the words "Look forward to it!" in black, and the second low suggestion effect is a text display effect that displays the words "Look forward to it!" in blue. This is a display effect, and the third low suggestion effect is a text display effect that displays the words "Look forward to it!" in yellow.

Note that the three types of low suggestion effects illustrated here are just examples, and the first low suggestion effect, the second low suggestion effect, and the third low suggestion effect have a relative probability that a winning notification will be executed. It goes without saying that other effects different from the character display effects may be used as long as they can suggest that the performance is low. Further, the number of types of low suggestion effects is not limited to three types, but may be one type, two types, four or more types.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as the highly suggestive performances, as illustrated in FIG. Three types of highly suggestive performances are prepared, and when a highly suggestive performance is executed, one of the three types of highly suggestive performances classified into a highly suggestive performance group is selected and executed. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the first highly suggestive effect is set to approximately 31%, the jackpot reliability of the second highly suggestive effect is approximately 36%, and the jackpot reliability of the third highly suggestive effect is set to approximately 42%. There is.

The first highly suggestive effect, the second highly suggestive effect, and the third highly suggestive effect in this embodiment are all effect images in which a cut-in image showing the words "Great Chance!" is being displayed on the display screen 70. These highly suggestive effects have different font colors. Specifically, the first highly suggestive effect is a cut-in effect that displays the words "Great Chance!" in green, and the second highly suggestive effect is a cut-in effect that displays the words "Great Chance!" in orange. The third highly suggestive effect is a cut-in effect that displays the words ``Great Chance!'' in red.

Note that the three types of high suggestion performances illustrated here are just examples, and the first high suggestion performance, the second high suggestion performance, and the third high suggestion performance have a relative probability that a winning notification will be executed. It goes without saying that other effects than the cut-in effects may be used as long as they can suggest that the performance is high. Further, the types of highly suggestive effects are not limited to three types, but may be one type, two types, four or more types.

Regarding such chance performance and suggestion performance, the performance proceeds as follows. First, when the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is executed, symbol variation is started to variably display the effect symbols in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 23(A)). Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of symbol variation, the above-mentioned chance effect may be executed (see FIGS. 23(A) and 23(B)).

Note that the low-suggestion performance and high-suggestion performance described above have the following characteristics. That is, each low-suggestion performance classified into the low-suggestion performance group has a characteristic that there are times when it is combined with a chance performance and times when it is not combined with a chance performance (see FIG. 24). This means that there are times when the low suggestion performance is performed after the chance performance is performed, and times when the low suggestion performance is performed without the chance performance being performed.

On the other hand, each highly suggestive performance classified into the highly suggestive performance group has a characteristic of not being combined with a chance performance (see FIG. 24). In other words, if a chance effect occurs during a variation display of a certain first special symbol, a highly suggestive effect will not be executed within the same variation, and a highly suggestive effect is a variation of the first special symbol in which a chance effect does not occur. May be executed during display.

In this way, since the low-suggestion performance and the high-suggestion performance have the characteristics illustrated in FIG. When the winning/losing notification effect (win/losing notification effect) is executed after the is executed (see Figure 23 (B), (C), (E)), there are cases where the winning/losing effect is executed without the low suggestion effect being executed. There are cases where a notification effect is executed (see FIGS. 23(B) and (E)). Moreover, a low suggestion effect may be executed without executing a chance effect (see FIGS. 23(A) and 23(C)).

When the chance effect (see FIG. 23(B)) is not executed, the highly suggestive effect may be executed (see FIGS. 23(A) and (D)).

Such a series of performances is controlled by the sub CPU 91, and when executing a chance performance and a suggestion performance, the sub CPU 91 performs suggestion performance control such that a low suggestion performance is executed without executing a high suggestion performance. is possible.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as is clear from the notation in FIG. There are cases where the performance progresses with the second performance pattern in which a low-suggestion performance is executed without being executed, and when the performance progresses with the first performance pattern, it is better to proceed with the second performance pattern. There is a characteristic that the winning notification performance is more likely to be executed than when the performance is progressing (see FIG. 24). That is, the jackpot reliability when the first low suggestion effect is executed alone is about 3%, the jackpot reliability when the second low suggestion effect is executed alone is about 5%, and the third low suggestion effect is about 5%. When a low suggestion effect is executed alone, the jackpot reliability is approximately 7%, and when any one of these low suggestion effects is executed after a chance effect, the jackpot reliability is approximately 7%. This will be 27%.

By the way, in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of each low-suggestive performance classified into the low-suggestive performance group is set to a lower value than the jackpot reliability of each high-suggestive performance classified into the high-suggestive performance group ( (See Figure 24). For this reason, although high-suggestion effects can improve players' expectations for a jackpot even when executed alone, low-suggestion effects cannot be expected to have the same effect; There is a concern that this may actually reduce the player's expectations for the execution of the winning notification performance.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a high suggestion performance is never combined with a chance performance within the same variation, and a low suggestion performance may be combined after the chance performance is executed. ing. In this embodiment, since the jackpot reliability of the chance performance is set to about 25%, if the low suggestion performance is executed after the chance performance, there is a feature that the hit notification performance is likely to be executed afterwards. For this reason, when a low suggestion effect is executed alone, it cannot be expected that a hit notification effect will be executed, but when combined with a chance effect, it is expected that a win notification effect will be executed. It is possible to create a favorable impression on the player regarding the low-suggestion performance.

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by combining a low suggestion performance with a chance performance instead of combining a high suggestion performance with a chance performance, it is possible to make the player expect that a winning notification performance will be executed. , it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that a player's expectations for a jackpot are significantly lowered by executing a low-suggestion performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the chance performance is executed, a case will be explained in which there are times when the low suggestion performance is executed and times when the low suggestion performance is not executed. The order of execution may be reversed; for example, if a low suggestion effect is executed during a variable display of a certain first special symbol, there will be times when a chance effect is executed and times when a chance effect is not executed within the same variation. It is also conceivable to adopt a configuration in which there is .

Up to this point, we have explained the chance effects and suggestion effects that can be executed by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. This will be detailed later based on 77 and 78.

[About the discomfort notification performance]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27, a description will be given of the discomfort-feeling loss notification effect executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. Here, FIG. 25 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the discomfort-feeling loss notification effect A. FIG. 26 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the discomfort-feeling loss notification effect B. FIG. 27 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the discomfort-feeling loss notification effect C.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is a variable performance that includes a performance in which a performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner as the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a special symbol that is performed at the start of the variation of the special symbol in conjunction with the stop display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a stop performance in which a performance pattern indicating the determination result of the determination is stopped and displayed. This stop performance includes a hit notification performance (an example of a first stop performance) that notifies that a jackpot game will be executed, and a loss notification performance (an example of a second stop performance) that informs that a jackpot game will not be executed. There is.

By the way, when the game is controlled in the variable probability gaming state (or time-saving gaming state), the reserved second special symbol judgment rights include those for which the "hit notification performance" will be executed. If so, it is conceivable to perform an icon change effect of displaying the pending icon corresponding to the right of the second special symbol determination in a display mode different from the normal one.

However, when such an icon change effect is executed, the judgment result will be a "jackpot", or the pending icon corresponding to the right for the second special symbol judgment with a high probability will be compared to other pending icons. There is a concern that as a result, players will be less aware of the variable effects and stop effects that correspond to other pending icons, and as a result, the interest of the variable effects and stop effects will decrease. be done.

In addition, when comparing the variable probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state with the normal gaming state, it is found that in the variable probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, it is easier to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 22, so that the normal game Compared to the state, a special symbol fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected. For this reason, in the variable probability game state and the time-saving game state, there is a problem that the execution time of the variable performance tends to be shorter than in the normal game state, and therefore the performance tends to become monotonous.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of these problems, the three performance symbols indicating a loss are pseudo-stopped at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is Along with the stop display, a loss notification performance that causes these performance symbols to stop display gives notice that a "win notification performance" will be executed when any of the pending second special symbol determinations is executed. It is said that

The loss notification performance that foretells the execution of this "win notification performance" is different from the normal loss notification performance, and as this makes the player feel uncomfortable, the following explanation is given. Here, the loss notification performance that foretells that the ``win notification performance'' will be executed will be referred to as the ``uncomfortable loss notification performance.'' In this embodiment, three types of discomfort loss notification effects are prepared: discomfort loss notification effects A (see FIG. 25), discomfort loss notification effects B (see FIG. 26), and discomfort loss notification effects C (see FIG. 27). ing.

In addition, in the normal game state, the production symbols are usually composed of numbers and characters, whereas in the variable probability game state or the time-saving game state, the production symbols do not have characters and are composed of only numbers. The following explanation will be given by taking as an example the case where the

(Uncomfortable failure notification performance A)
FIG. 25 shows an example of how the discomfort loss notification performance A is executed when the game is controlled in the variable probability game state (or the time-saving game state). When the discomfort failure notification effect A is executed, the effect proceeds as follows.

FIG. 25A shows an example of a state in which three production symbols indicating a winning number of "126" are stopped on the display screen 70 along with the stop display of the second special symbol indicating a "lose". There is. In this way, the second special symbol indicating a "lose" is stopped and displayed, and a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the three production symbols indicating the winning number of "126" have stopped. When the elapsed time has elapsed, the second special symbol determination that has been suspended is executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol and production symbol is started (see FIG. 25(B)). FIG. 25(B) shows an example in which the left symbol column, the middle symbol column, and the right symbol column are all scrolled downward.

Here, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed at the start of the symbol variation illustrated in FIG. The three production symbols showing the winning number of "835" come to a pseudo-stop, and immediately after that, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, and these production symbols come to a real stop (Fig. 25 ( See C). This is a normal loss notification performance that is performed in the variable probability gaming state or the time saving gaming state.

Here, at a point in time when the loss notification effect shown in FIG. Three rights are reserved, 3 reservations, and the judgment result of special drawing 2 1st reservation and special drawing 2 2nd reservation is "loss", and the judgment result of special map 2 3rd reservation is "probable strange jackpot". If advance judgment information indicating that the result is obtained, the following flow is performed using the symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol 2 first reservation and the symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol 2 second reservation. , the discomfort-feeling failure notification effect A is executed.

In other words, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the three production symbols indicating a random number of "835" stopped with the stop display of the second special symbol indicating a "loss". , the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first suspension of the special symbol 2 is executed, and the variable display of the performance symbols accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is started (see FIG. 25(D)). The variable display of the effect symbols here is started in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 25(B).

Next, just before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold of special symbol 2 ends, for example, the 4 symbols on the left, the middle character symbol, and the 9 symbols on the right will pseudo-stop at the same time, and immediately after that, the As the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the first discomfort-feeling loss notification performance A is executed in which these three performance symbols are stopped as they are (see FIG. 25(E)). Here, the 4 symbols on the left are numerical symbols composed of the number "4", the 9 symbols on the right are numerical symbols composed of the number "9", and only the middle character symbol is a numerical symbol composed of the number "4". It is a character design made up of characters.

In the normal loss notification performance, the three production symbols, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, are all numerical symbols, whereas in the discomfort loss notification production A, any one of the three production symbols A character pattern is displayed instead of a number pattern as one effect pattern (medium pattern in the example shown in FIG. 25(E)). In this way, by executing the discomfort loss notification performance A in which the three performance symbols including the character symbol are pseudo-stopped and then stopped for real, the effect is to make the player feel uncomfortable and to focus on the variable performance and the stop performance. can be expected.

The losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold of the special symbol 2, and the three production symbols illustrated in FIG. .5 seconds), the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the special symbol 2 second suspension is executed, and the fluctuating display of the production symbol along with the fluctuating display of the second special symbol starts (Fig. 25(F) reference). The variable display of the effect symbols here is started in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 25(B).

Next, just before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second suspension of special symbol 2 ends, for example, the left character symbol, middle 6 symbol, and right 1 symbol will pseudo-stop at the same time, and immediately after that, the As the loss symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the second discomfort-feeling loss notification performance A is executed in which these three performance symbols are stopped as they are (see FIG. 25(G)). Here, the middle 6 symbol is a numerical symbol consisting of the number "6", the right one symbol is a numerical symbol consisting of the number "1", and only the left character symbol is a numerical symbol consisting of the number "1". It is a character design made up of characters.

In this second discomfort loss notification performance A (see Figure 25 (G)), three performance symbols including the character design are displayed, similar to the first discomfort loss notification performance A (see Figure 25 (E)). Therefore, the same effect as the first discomfort failure notification performance A can be expected.

The losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 second hold, and the three performance symbols illustrated in FIG. .5 seconds), the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the special symbol 2 third hold is executed, and the fluctuating display of the production symbol along with the fluctuating display of the second special symbol starts (Fig. 25 (H) reference). The variable display of the effect symbols here is started in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 25(B).

Here, since the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the special pattern 2 third reservation is "probable variable jackpot", immediately before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 third reservation ends. Then, for example, the three production symbols showing the double number "777" will pseudo-stop at the same time, and immediately after that, the jackpot symbol (probable variable symbol) will be stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, and these three A winning notification performance is executed in which the performance symbols stop as they are (see FIG. 25(I)).

In the example shown in FIG. 25, the stopping positions of the character symbols are different between the first discomfort loss notification performance A and the second discomfort loss notification performance A, but for example, only the middle design is the character design. The display position of the character design may be fixed, such as displayed as . Also, for example, in the first discomfort loss notification performance A, three performance symbols including one character symbol are displayed, and in the second discomfort loss notification performance A, three performance symbols including two character symbols are displayed. Thus, the number of character symbols may be increased each time the discomfort failure notification effect A is executed.

Up to this point, an example has been described with reference to FIG. 25, taking the case where the discomfort-feeling loss notification effect A is executed twice, but the number of executions of the discomfort-feeling loss-information effect A is variable, and the win notification effect is executed. It is also possible to perform the discomfort loss notification performance A once or three times using the symbol variation performed before the symbol variation (here, the variation corresponding to the special figure 2 third hold). When performing the discomfort loss notification effect A only once, for example, in the scene where the effect shown in FIG. 25(E) is performed, the normal loss notification effect is executed, and only the discomfort loss notification effect A in FIG. 25(G) is performed. A possible configuration is to execute the command.

In this way, one or more unnatural feeling loss notification performances A are performed to foretell that the pending second special symbol determination rights include those that will be determined as "jackpot". By doing so, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectations for a jackpot by focusing on the fluctuating performance and the stop performance while making the player feel uncomfortable.

(Uncomfortable failure notification performance B)
FIG. 26 exemplifies how the discomfort loss notification performance B is executed when the game is controlled in the variable probability gaming state (or the time saving gaming state). When the discomfort failure notification effect B is executed, the effect proceeds as follows.

FIG. 26(A) exemplifies the situation immediately after the variable display of the performance symbols (scrolling display of three symbol rows) is started in conjunction with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. Here, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed at the start of the symbol variation illustrated in FIG. Three performance symbols showing a random number of "152" make a pseudo-stop, and immediately after that, a loss symbol is stopped and displayed as a second special symbol, and a normal loss notification that causes these production symbols to come to a real stop. The effect is executed (see FIG. 26(B)).

Here, at a point in time when the loss notification effect shown in FIG. 26(B) is being executed, for example, the two rights of special pattern 2 first reservation and special pattern 2 second reservation are available as the right to judge the second special symbol. If it is on hold and preliminary judgment information is obtained indicating that the judgment result of the special drawing 2 first holding is a “loss” and the judgment result of the special drawing 2 second holding is a “normal jackpot”, Using the symbol variation corresponding to the special figure 2 first reservation, the discomfort loss notification performance B is executed in the following flow.

In other words, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the three production symbols indicating a random number of "152" stopped with the stop display of the second special symbol indicating a "loss". , the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first suspension of the special symbol 2 is executed, and the variable display of the performance symbols accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is started (see FIG. 26(C)). The variable display of the effect symbols here is started in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 25(B).

Next, just before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold of special symbol 2 ends, for example, the 9 symbols on the left, the 7 symbols in the middle, and the 6 symbols on the right simultaneously pseudo-stop, and immediately after that, the As the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, a sense of incongruity loss notification performance B is executed in which these three performance symbols are stopped as they are (see FIG. 26(D)). Here, the 9 symbols on the left are numerical symbols composed of the number "9", the middle 7 symbols are numerical symbols composed of the numerical symbol "7", and the 6 symbols on the right are composed of the numerical symbol "9". It is a numerical pattern. In this way, all of these three performance symbols are numerical symbols, but the middle seven symbols are pseudo-continuous symbols that notify the execution of a pseudo-continuous performance, as described above based on FIG. As shown in Figures 9(D) to (E) and 9(G) to (H), when the middle 7 symbols are displayed in a pseudo-stop display, a pseudo continuous effect occurs and the three symbol rows scroll. Since the display will be restarted, the main feature is that the 7th symbol in the middle is basically never stopped.

On the other hand, in the sense of discomfort loss notification performance B, it is basically configured as a loss notification performance in which three performance symbols including the middle 7 symbols, which never come to a real stop, are pseudo-stopped and then the real stop is made. , it is possible to make the player feel an odd feeling that the seven symbols in the middle, which should not have come to a real stop, have come to a real stop, and to draw attention to the fluctuating performance and the stop performance.

The losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the first reservation of special symbol 2, and the three production symbols illustrated in FIG. .5 seconds), the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the special symbol 2 second suspension is executed, and the fluctuating display of the performance symbol accompanying the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is started (FIG. 26(E) reference). The variable display of the effect symbols here is started in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 25(B).

Next, just before the fluctuating display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold of the special symbol 2 ends, for example, the three production symbols showing the double number of "444" will pseudo-stop at the same time, and immediately after that, Then, as the jackpot symbol (normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, a hit notification performance is executed in which these three performance symbols are stopped as they are (see FIG. 26(F)).

In addition, here, we have explained the case where the strange feeling loss notification effect B is executed only once and then the winning notification effect is executed, but it is also possible to execute the strange feeling loss notification effect B multiple times (for example, twice or three times). It is also possible to execute the winning notification effect after doing so.

In this way, one or more unnatural feeling loss notification performances B are performed to foretell that the pending second special symbol determination rights include what will be determined as a "jackpot". By doing so, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectations for a jackpot by focusing on the fluctuating performance and the stop performance while making the player feel uncomfortable.

(Uncomfortable failure notification performance C)
FIG. 27 shows an example of how the discomfort loss notification performance C is executed when the game is controlled in the variable probability gaming state (or the time-saving gaming state). When the discomfort failure notification effect C is executed, the effect proceeds as follows.

FIG. 27(A) shows an example of a state in which three production symbols indicating a winning number of "462" are stopped on the display screen 70 along with the stop display of the second special symbol indicating a "loss". There is. Here, at a point in time when the loss notification effect shown in FIG. Four rights are reserved: 3 reservation, special drawing 2 4th reservation, and the judgment result of the 3 reservations from special drawing 2 1st reservation to special drawing 2 3rd reservation is "lost", and the special drawing 2 right is reserved. If preliminary judgment information indicating that the judgment result of 4 hold is a "probable jackpot" is obtained, the symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special pattern 2 first hold and the pattern change corresponding to the special pattern 2 second hold. Using this and the symbol variation corresponding to the special figure 2 third hold, the sense of incongruity loss notification performance C is executed in the following flow.

That is, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the three production symbols indicating a random number of "462" stopped with the stop display of the second special symbol indicating a "loss". , the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first suspension of the special symbol 2 is executed, and the variable display of the performance symbols accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is started (see FIG. 27(B)). The variable display of the effect symbols here is started in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 25(B).

Next, just before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold of special symbol 2 ends, for example, the 1st symbol on the left, the 3rd symbol in the middle, and the 9th symbol on the right will pseudo-stop at the same time, and immediately after that, the As the loss symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the first discomfort loss notification performance C is executed in which these three performance symbols are stopped as they are (see FIG. 27(C)).

Here, the 1st symbol on the left, the 3rd symbol in the middle, and the 9th symbol on the right are all numerical symbols, but as is clear from the comparison of FIGS. 27(A) and (C), in the normal loss notification effect, While the three performance symbols are stopped and displayed in a straight line on the effective line, in the discomfort loss notification performance C, at least one of the three performance symbols is displayed in a position different from the effective line. The screen is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 27(C)). In Figure 27(C), only the 9 symbols on the right are displayed stopped on the active line, and the 1st symbol on the left and the 3rd symbol in the middle are displayed at a different position from the active line (here, a position below the active line). A stopped display state is illustrated.

In this way, in the sense of discomfort loss notification performance C, at least one of the three performance symbols is stopped and displayed at a position different from the effective line, making the player feel uncomfortable and changing the performance. It is also possible to draw attention to the stop effect.

The losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the first reservation of special symbol 2, and the three production symbols illustrated in FIG. .5 seconds), the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the special symbol 2 second suspension is executed, and the fluctuating display of the performance symbol accompanying the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is started (FIG. 27(D) reference).

Next, just before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 second hold ends, for example, the 5 symbols on the left, the 5 symbols in the middle, and the 4 symbols on the right will pseudo-stop at the same time, and immediately after that, the As the loss symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, a second discomfort-feeling loss notification performance C is executed in which these three performance symbols are stopped as they are (see FIG. 27(E)). In the second discomfort loss notification performance C, similar to the first discomfort loss notification performance C, the stop display positions of the left and right symbols are shifted from the effective line, making it possible for the player to feel discomfort. It is.

The losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the second suspension of the special symbol 2, and a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0 .5 seconds), the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the special symbol 2 third hold is executed, and the fluctuating display of the production symbol along with the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is started (Fig. 27(F) reference).

Next, just before the variable display of the 2nd special symbol corresponding to the 3rd hold of the special symbol 2 ends, for example, the 6 symbols on the left, the 6 symbols in the middle, and the 6 symbols on the right will pseudo-stop at the same time, and immediately after that, the As the loss symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the third discomfort-feeling loss notification performance C is executed in which these three performance symbols are stopped as they are (see FIG. 27(G)). In the third discomfort loss notification performance C, similar to the first discomfort loss notification performance C and the second discomfort loss notification performance C, the stop display positions of the left and right symbols are shifted from the effective line, and the game It is possible to make people feel uncomfortable. In addition, in the third discomfort-feeling loss notification performance C, three performance symbols indicating the same number (in this case, "6") are displayed in a staggered manner (without being lined up in a straight line), which creates a sense of discomfort that the player feels. It is possible to increase it.

The losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 third hold, and the three production symbols illustrated in FIG. 5 seconds), the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the special symbol 2 fourth hold is executed, and the fluctuating display of the production symbol along with the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is started (Fig. 27 (H) reference).

Here, since the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the special pattern 2 fourth reservation is "probable variable jackpot", immediately before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 fourth reservation ends. Then, for example, the three production symbols showing the double number "777" will pseudo-stop at the same time, and immediately after that, the jackpot symbol (probable variable symbol) will be stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, and these three A winning notification performance in which the performance symbols stop as they are is executed (see FIG. 27(I)).

In the example shown in FIG. 27, the direction of deviation of the performance symbols is the same in the three discomfort failure notification performances C, but the direction of displacement of the performance symbols may be made to be different from each other. Another way to shift the performance symbols is, for example, to stop and display the left and middle symbols on the effective line, and to display only the right symbol at a position shifted from the effective line.

In addition, the first discomfort loss notification performance C (see Figure 27 (C)), the second discomfort loss notification performance C (see Figure 27 (E)), and the third discomfort loss notification performance C (see Figure 27 ( In G) and , the combinations of numbers represented by the three effect symbols are different from each other, but these combinations of numbers may be made common.

In addition, FIG. 27(G) shows an example in which three even-numbered symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot of "666" are stopped and displayed by the third discomfort-loss notification performance C that is performed at the end. As shown in FIG. 27 (I), when three production symbols indicating the number of doubles of "777" that informs the probability-variable jackpot are displayed in a stopped state, the number of doubles of "777" will also be displayed in the third discomfort loss notification production C. It is also possible to shift the three performance symbols indicating the three effects and display them in a stopped state.

Up to this point, an example has been described with reference to FIG. 27, taking as an example a case in which the discomfort loss notification effect C is executed three times, but the number of times the discomfort loss notification effect C is executed is variable, and the winning notification effect is executed. It is also possible to perform the discomfort loss notification performance B once or twice using the symbol variation performed before the symbol variation (here, the variation corresponding to the special figure 2 fourth reservation).

In this way, one or more discomfort loss notification performances C are performed to foretell that the pending second special symbol determination rights include what will be determined as a "jackpot". By doing so, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectations for a jackpot by focusing on the fluctuating performance and the stop performance while making the player feel uncomfortable.

[First change production and stage-related production]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, a first change performance (an example of a change performance) and a stage-related performance (an example of a related performance) executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 28 is a screen diagram for explaining the flow of the first change performance and stage-related performance. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability and characteristics of the first change performance and stage-related performance. In addition, in FIG. 28, for convenience of explanation, the effect symbols that are displayed in a variable manner as the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the icon that suggests that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the first special symbol determination are shown. The illustration of the reservation icon indicating that the rights of the rights are reserved is omitted.

(About the three stage performances)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the first change effect may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. This first change performance is a performance that can be changed step by step to any one of a plurality of stages. In this embodiment, the upper limit stage of the first change performance is set to the third stage, and there are cases where the first change performance ends at the first stage, and cases where the first change performance ends at the second stage. There are cases where the first change performance ends at the third stage. Specifically, when the first change performance ends at the first stage, the first stage performance (see FIG. 28(A)) is first executed, and this first stage performance is changed to the second stage performance (see FIG. 28(A)). The first change effect ends without changing to (see (C)). If the first change performance ends at the second stage, after the first stage performance changes to the second stage performance, this second stage performance changes to the third stage performance (see Figure 28 (E)). The first change performance ends without any change. If the first change performance ends at the third stage, which is the upper limit stage, the stage performance changes in the order of the first stage performance, second stage performance, and third stage performance, and the first change performance ends. Become.

(About the effects related to the two stages)
Note that when a first change effect is executed in which a certain step among a plurality of steps (in this embodiment, three steps 1 to 3) is the final step, the relation related to the final step effect is executed. The performance is executed. Specifically, when the first change performance ends at the second stage, the second stage related performance (see FIG. 28(D)) is executed following the second stage performance. In other words, when the first change effect ends at the second stage, the first stage effect, second stage effect, and second stage related effects are The performances proceed in the order of the performances. Further, when the first change performance ends at the third stage, a third stage related performance (see FIG. 28(F)) is executed following the third stage performance. That is, when the first change production ends at the third stage, as illustrated in FIGS. 28(A), (C), (E), and (F), the first stage production, the second stage production, The production progresses in the order of the third stage production and the third stage related production. On the other hand, if the first change performance ends at the first stage, no stage-related performance will be performed following the first stage performance.

<First change production that ends at the first stage>
In this embodiment, the first stage effect (see FIG. 28(A)) is configured as a display effect in which a first stage effect image representing one character wearing a blue aura is displayed on the display screen 70. has been done. As illustrated in FIG. 29, the jackpot reliability of the first change effect at the time when such a first stage effect is being executed is set to about 1%. As described above, in the present embodiment, no stage-related effects are prepared for the first stage of the first change effect, and when the first change effect that ends at the first stage is executed, the first change effect is Since the performance does not change to the second stage performance, the jackpot reliability remains at about 1%. For this reason, when the first change effect is executed where the first stage is the final stage, after the first stage effect is executed, the reach effect is usually not executed and the three effects showing the break-up are performed. A loss notification effect is executed in which the symbols are brought to a pseudo stop and then to a real stop (see FIGS. 28(A) and 28(B)).

However, if the first change performance ends with the first stage performance, this does not mean that the reach performance will not be executed at all, and after the first change performance ends with the first stage performance, for example, a normal reach performance may be executed. Therefore, a winning notification performance (or a loss notification performance) may be executed in the normal reach. Furthermore, although the possibility is low, a reach performance may develop from a normal reach performance to another reach performance, and a hit notification performance (or a loss notification performance) may be executed in the developed reach performance.

In the first stage production, although the character is displayed, lines uttered by the character are displayed on the display screen 70, as in the second stage related production images and third stage related production images described later, and the audio representing the lines is displayed. is not output from the speaker 38. This also applies to the second stage performance and third stage performance, which will be described later.

Here, we have explained the first stage performance that is executed when the first change performance ends at the first stage, but such a first stage performance is executed when the first change performance ends at the first stage. This is not limited to the case where the first change performance ends at the second stage, or when the first change performance ends at the third stage which is the upper limit stage.

<First change production that ends in the second stage>
In the first change performance that ends at the second stage, the first stage performance changes to the second stage performance, and then the second stage performance changes, as illustrated in FIGS. The second stage related performance is executed following the second stage performance without changing the stage performance to the third stage performance.

In this embodiment, the second stage effect (see FIG. 28(C)) is configured as a display effect in which a second stage effect image showing two characters wearing a green aura is displayed on the display screen 70. has been done. When changing from the first stage performance to the second stage performance, at the end of the first stage performance, a rotation change performance is executed in which the first stage performance image is rotated clockwise and changed to the second stage performance image. . This rotation change performance is a performance that functions as a next stage development performance that develops the first change performance from the first stage to the second stage, and although it is not shown in the diagram, the rotation change performance is executed. As a result, in the process of rotating the first-stage effect image 360 degrees clockwise, the number of characters represented by the first-stage effect image increases from one to two, and the color of the aura that the character wears changes from blue to green. (See FIGS. 28(A) and (C)). Then, by executing the rotation change effect, a second stage effect image larger than the first stage effect image is displayed.

Although not shown in the diagram, if the first change performance does not progress from the first stage to the second stage, a failure performance in which the above rotation change performance fails is executed following the first stage performance. After that, the loss notification effect described above is executed based on FIG. 28(B). The failure effect of the rotation change effect here is achieved by playing the video for realizing the rotation change effect halfway, and then replaying the video in reverse.

Returning to the case where the rotation change effect is executed, as is clear from the notations in FIGS. 28(A) and (C), when the first stage effect image changes to the second stage effect image, the stage effect image The number of characters represented increases from one to two, and the color of the aura that the characters wear changes from blue to green. Then, a second stage effect image is displayed on the display screen 70, which is different in at least a part of the display area from the first stage effect image and is larger than the first stage effect image. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the first change effect has evolved from the first stage to the second stage by seeing the first stage effect image change to the second stage effect image. In addition, it is possible to easily recognize that the reliability of the jackpot of the first change performance has increased due to the development from the first stage to the second stage.

In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the first change effect at the time when the second stage effect is being executed is set to about 13% (see FIG. 29). After such a second stage performance is executed, a third stage performance (see Figure 28 (E)) or a second stage related performance (see Figure 28 (D)) is executed following the second stage performance. be done.

If the first change performance does not develop into the third stage and the second stage becomes the final stage, the second stage related performance is executed following the second stage performance (Figure 28 (C) and (D)) reference). The second stage related production in this embodiment is a second stage production image that shows the same two characters as those represented by the second stage production image uttering the line "The battle is near!" is configured as a performance in which a different second-stage related performance image is displayed on the full screen on the display screen 70, and, along with this, a sound representing the above-mentioned line "The battle is near!" is output from the speaker 38. In this way, the second-stage related production represents a character that is common to the second-stage production (second-stage production), which is the final stage of the first change production. It is a performance that Therefore, even if the second stage production changes to a second stage related production, the continuity of the production will not be lost, and a high production effect can be achieved through the synergistic effect of the second stage production and second stage related production. Is possible.

Here, when comparing the second-stage effect image (see FIG. 28(C)) and the second-stage related effect image (see FIG. 28(D)), there is the following relationship between them. . That is, these performance images have in common that the same two characters that were represented by the second stage performance image are displayed by the second stage related performance image. On the other hand, these effect images are different from each other in that the two characters are displayed larger in the second-stage related effect image than in the second-stage effect image. Further, while the second stage effect image is displayed in a part of the display screen 70 (the central area in this embodiment), the second stage related effect image is displayed in the entire display screen 70 ( These effect images have different display areas (displayed on the full screen). Furthermore, these production images differ from each other in that in the second-stage related production image, the character's lines are displayed on the display screen 70, whereas in the second-stage production image, the character's lines are not displayed. ing. In addition, in the second stage production image, the auras of the two characters are displayed, whereas in the second stage related production image, the auras of these two characters are not displayed. are different from each other.

In this way, in this embodiment, the second stage related performance image has a common feature with the second stage performance image in that it displays two characters, and has some differences in other respects. Various display modes are available. Therefore, when the second stage is the final stage of the first change effect, as illustrated in FIG. 28(D) and FIG. There are times when the second-stage related effects are executed, and times when the second-stage related effects are executed, which display the text "The battle is near!" in red. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the second-stage related effects that display blue characters is set to about 9%, and the jackpot reliability of the second-stage related effects that display red letters is set to about 18%. .

Therefore, when the second stage is the final stage of the first change performance, the player will be able to execute the second stage related performance that displays red characters instead of the second stage related performance that displays blue characters. You can enjoy the game while looking forward to it.

Note that the second stage related performance in this embodiment has a function as an SP development suggestion performance that suggests development to SP reach (see FIG. 8(J)) (see FIG. 28(D)). The SP reach in this embodiment is configured as a reach effect that notifies the winner or loser of a battle between the main character and an enemy character (any of enemy characters A to C). On the other hand, in the second stage related production, one of the two characters displayed by the second stage related production is the main character that appears in SP Reach, and is also used in the battle in SP Reach. The line ``The battle is near!'' will be displayed to foretell. Therefore, the player can easily recognize, based on the second stage related performance, that the SP reach will develop after the second stage related performance ends.

Up to this point, we have explained the second stage related performance that is executed following the second stage performance when the first change performance ends at the second stage, but when the first change performance ends at the first stage, , such a stage-related performance will not be executed, and even if the first change performance ends at the upper limit of the third stage, a stage-related performance will be executed, but this stage-related performance (described later) The third stage related performance (see FIG. 28(F)) is a different performance from the second stage related performance. In this way, the second stage related production is not executed when the first change production ends at the first stage or the third stage, but is executed only when the first change production ends at the second stage. Since it is a performance, it can be said that it is a performance unique to the second stage.

<First change production that ends in the third stage>
In the first change performance that ends at the third stage, the first stage performance changes to the second stage performance, as illustrated in FIGS. 28(A), (C), (E), and (F). The second stage performance changes to the third stage performance, and the third stage related performance is executed following the third stage performance.

Here, the first stage performance and the second stage performance are as described above. In this embodiment, the third stage effect (see FIG. 28(E)) is configured as a display effect in which a third stage effect image showing three characters wearing a red aura is displayed on the display screen 70. has been done. The rotation change performance performed when the first stage performance changes to the second stage performance is as described above. The first stage performance changes to the second stage performance, and at the end of this second stage performance, a rotation change performance is executed in which the second stage performance image is rotated clockwise and changed to the third stage performance image. Ru. This rotation change performance is a performance that functions as a next stage development performance that develops the first change performance from the second stage to the third stage, and although it is not shown in the diagram, the rotation change performance is executed. As a result, in the process of the second stage effect image rotating 360 degrees clockwise, the number of characters represented by the second stage effect image increases from two to three, and the color of the aura that the character wears changes from green to red. (See FIGS. 28(C) and (E)). Then, by executing the rotation change effect, a third stage effect image larger than the second stage effect image is displayed.

As is clear from the notations in FIGS. 28(C) and (E), when the second stage effect image changes to the third stage effect image, the number of characters represented by the stage effect image increases from two to three, The color of the character's aura changes from green to red. Then, a third stage effect image is displayed on the display screen 70, which is different from the second stage effect image in at least a portion of its display area and is larger than the second stage effect image. Therefore, when the player sees that the second stage performance image has changed to the third stage performance image, the player can easily recognize that the first change performance has evolved from the second stage to the upper limit third stage. In addition, it is possible to easily recognize that the reliability of the jackpot of the first change effect has further increased due to the development from the second stage to the third stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the first change effect at the time when the third stage effect is being executed is set to about 27% (see FIG. 29). After such a third stage performance is executed, since the third stage is the upper limit stage, the rotation change performance will not be performed, and the third stage related performance (Fig. 28) will be performed following the third stage performance. (F)) is executed.

When the first change performance develops to the third stage, which is the upper limit, the third stage related performance is executed following the third stage performance (see FIGS. 28(E) and (F)). The third stage related production in this embodiment is a third stage production image that shows the same three characters as those represented by the third stage production image uttering the line "It's the final battle!!" is configured as a performance in which a different third-stage related performance image is displayed on the full screen on the display screen 70, and in conjunction with this, a sound representing the above-mentioned line "It's the final battle!!" is output from the speaker 38. In this way, the 3rd stage related production represents a character that is common to the 3rd stage production (3rd stage production), which is the final stage of the current 1st change production. It is a performance that Therefore, even if the 3rd stage production changes to a 3rd stage related production, the continuity of the production will not be lost, and the synergistic effect of the 3rd stage production and the 3rd stage related production will provide a high production effect. Is possible.

Here, when comparing the third-stage effect image (see FIG. 28(E)) and the third-stage related effect image (see FIG. 28(F)), there is the following relationship between them. . That is, these effect images have in common that the same three characters that were represented by the third stage effect image are displayed by the third stage related effect image. On the other hand, these performance images are different from each other in that the three characters are displayed larger in the third-stage related performance image than in the third-stage performance image. Further, while the third stage effect image is displayed in a part of the display screen 70, the third stage related effect image is displayed on the entire display screen 70 (full screen display). Furthermore, the display areas of these effect images are different from each other. Furthermore, these production images differ from each other in that in the third stage related production image, the character's lines are displayed on the display screen 70, whereas in the third stage production image, the character's lines are not displayed. ing. Furthermore, in the third stage production image, the auras of the three characters are displayed, whereas in the third stage related production image, the auras of these three characters are not displayed. are different from each other.

In this way, in this embodiment, the third stage related performance image has a common feature with the third stage performance image in that it displays three characters, and has some differences in other respects. Various display modes are available. Therefore, when the third stage is the final stage of the first change production, as illustrated in FIG. 28(F) and FIG. There are times when the 3rd stage related effects are executed, and times when the 3rd stage related effects are executed which display the words "Final Battle!!" in gold. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the third-stage related effect that displays red characters is set to about 26%, and the jackpot reliability of the third-stage related effect that displays golden letters is set to about 41%. .

Therefore, when the third stage is the final stage of the first change performance, the player will not be executed the third stage related performance that displays the red characters, but the third stage related performance that displays the golden characters. You can enjoy the game while looking forward to it.

Note that the third stage related performance in this embodiment has a function as an SPSP development suggestion performance that suggests development to SPSP reach (see FIG. 8(K)) (see FIG. 28(F)). The SPSP reach in this embodiment is configured as a reach effect that notifies the winner or loser of a battle between the main character and an enemy character (any of enemy characters D to F). On the other hand, in the 3rd stage related production, one of the 3 characters displayed by the 3rd stage related production is the main character that appears in SPSP Reach. The line ``It's the final battle!!'' is displayed, announcing the upcoming battle. Therefore, the player can easily recognize based on the third stage related performance that the SPSP reach will develop after the third stage related performance ends.

Up to this point, we have described the third stage related performance that is executed following the third stage performance when the first change performance ends at the upper limit of the third stage. As is clear from the comparison of D) and (F), this is a different performance from the second-stage related performance described above. The 3rd stage related production must not be executed when the 1st change production ends at the 1st stage or the 2nd stage, but is a production that is executed only when the 1st change production ends at the 3rd stage. Therefore, it can be said that this is a production unique to the third stage.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a first change performance in which a certain stage among the three stages is the final stage is executed, a stage-related performance unique to the final stage related to the final stage performance is executed. Ru. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the first change performance has ended at a certain stage based on the stage-related performance, and due to the synergistic effect of the final stage performance and the stage-related performance. , it is possible to perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in the stage-related performance, although a performance image different from the final stage performance is displayed, the same display object (character in this embodiment) as the display object (character in this embodiment) displayed in the final stage is displayed. Therefore, the continuity between the final stage performance and stage-related performance is improved, and it is possible to perform the final stage performance and stage-related performance without any discomfort.

Up to this point, the first change effect and related effects executed by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment have been explained, but the processing executed by the sub CPU 91 to realize these effects will be explained later based on FIG. 79. Explain in detail.

(Variations regarding the first change production and related production)
Regarding the first change performance and related performance, the following configuration may be adopted.
In other words, in this embodiment, a case will be explained in which a related effect is not prepared for the first stage effect, but for example, if the first change effect ends at the first stage, the first stage effect For all three stages, from stage 1 to stage 3, there is a process that is unique to each stage. A configuration that can execute three types of stage-related performances (first-stage related performance, second-stage related performance, and third-stage related performance) may be adopted. When adopting such a configuration, for example, the anime character A appearing in character A reach, the anime character B appearing in character B reach, and the character C character It is conceivable to execute a first-stage related effect that displays any of the appearing anime characters C, and to suggest the development of one of the characters through the first-stage related effect.

In this way, in a stage-related production that suggests development to a reach production, a stage-related production image that represents the enemy character that appears in the suggested reach production is displayed instead of the main character that appears in the suggested reach production. Good too.

Also, up to this point, the first stage related production suggests development to character reach, the second stage related production suggests development to SP reach, and the second stage related production suggests development to SP reach. has been described as an example, but it goes without saying that the performances suggested by these stage-related performances are not limited to reach performances, but may be other performances such as group announcements, pseudo-series performances, and cut-ins. In other embodiments, stage-related effects may be performed that indicate the degree of jackpot reliability but do not have a function to suggest that other effects will be executed. .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 28A, 28C, and 28E, the display area of the stage effect image becomes wider each time the stage of the first change effect progresses. However, in other embodiments, the display area of the stage effect image becomes smaller as the stage progresses, or the display area of the stage effect image changes even if the stage progresses. A configuration in which the size does not change may be adopted.

Further, in this embodiment, a case will be explained in which the number of characters indicated by the stage effect image increases each time the stage progresses, but the number of characters may be fixed. For example, if the number of characters is fixed at one, character α is displayed in the first stage performance, character β is displayed in the second stage performance, character γ is displayed in the third stage performance, and so on. It is conceivable to also adopt a configuration in which the number of characters displayed in each stage of production is the same, but the types of characters change. Also, for example, in the first stage production, the character α is displayed in the first size, in the second stage production, the character α is similarly displayed in a second size larger than the first size, and in the third stage production, the character α is displayed in a second size larger than the first size. Similarly, while changing the display contents as each stage progresses, such as displaying character α at a third size that is larger than the second size, the character α is displayed at a third size that is larger than the second size. It is also conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the number is fixed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be explained in which the display object displayed in each stage of production is a character, but the display object is not limited to a character, and for example, other displays such as items or scenery can be used. It may be an object.

In this embodiment, a case where both the stage effect image and the stage-related effect image are color images will be explained as an example, but in other embodiments, the stage effect image is a monochrome image, while the stage-related effect image is a color image. A configuration in which the information is an image may also be adopted. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the step-related effect image is a low-brightness image, while the step-related effect image is a high-brightness image. By employing such a configuration, the player can easily recognize that the final stage performance of the first change performance has ended and the transition has been made to a stage related performance specific to the final stage.

[Omen performance and second change performance]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35, a precursor effect and a second change effect (an example of a change effect) executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. Here, FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the precursor effect and the second change effect. FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability of the second change performance and the precursor performance. FIG. 32 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a precursor effect when the second change effect is not executed. FIG. 33 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a precursor effect and a second change effect that ends at the second stage. FIGS. 34 and 35 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the foreshadowing effect and the second change effect that ends at the third stage of the upper limit.

In addition, in FIGS. 32 to 34, for convenience of explanation, the effect symbols that are variably displayed as the first special symbol is variably displayed, the icon that suggests that the first special symbol is being variably displayed, and the first The illustration of a reservation icon indicating that the right for special symbol determination is reserved is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 35, illustration of the icon indicating that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the reservation icon indicating that the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved are omitted.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, as illustrated in FIG. There are times when the second change performance is not performed after the precursor performance is performed, and times when the second change performance is performed without the precursor performance being performed.

Here, the second change performance is a change performance that can be changed in stages up to any stage below a predetermined stage. In this embodiment, the predetermined stage is set to three stages, and when the second change effect is executed, the second change effect does not change from the first stage to the second stage and ends at the first stage. When the second change effect changes from the first stage to the second stage and ends at the second stage without changing to the third stage, and when the second change effect changes from the first stage to the second stage. , and the third stage, and sometimes ends at the third stage.

The precursor performance is a performance that is a precursor to the second change performance. The term "foreshadowing" here means that after the foreshadowing performance is executed, the change performance is likely to be executed, and the foreshadowing performance is a precursor to the change performance. This precursor performance is a performance that suggests that the second change performance may be executed, and during the variable display of a certain first special symbol in the normal gaming state, the second change performance is performed after the precursor performance is executed. There are times when the performance is performed and times when the second change performance is not performed after the precursory performance is performed.

In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, the precursor performance and the second change performance are executed in the following flow. In the normal gaming state, when the first special symbol determination is executed by the main CPU 81 in response to a game ball entering the first starting hole 21, a change including information indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination, etc. A start command is sent from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 of the sub control board 90 executes and controls the precursor effect and the second change effect based on the received variation start command.

When the first special symbol determination is executed in the normal gaming state, as the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, a variable performance including a performance that displays the performance symbols in a variable manner is started (see FIG. 30(A)). Here, if the sub CPU 91 determines not to execute the omen effect based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination by the main CPU 81 at the start of the variation of the first special symbol this time, the omen effect is not executed. The performance progresses to the second change performance without any change (see FIGS. 30(A)→(F)). Note that not only the precursor effect but also the second change effect may not be executed.

If it has been determined by the sub CPU 91 that the precursor effect is to be executed at the start of the variation of the first special symbol this time, the effect proceeds as follows. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 30, the precursor effects in this embodiment include a chance ticket acquisition effect (see FIG. 30(B)), a ticket increase/decrease effect (see FIG. 30(C)), and a ticket reversal effect (see FIG. 30(C)). 30(D)) and a judge performance (see FIG. 30(E)).

Here, the chance ticket acquisition performance is a display performance that displays on the display screen 70 how a chance ticket representing the word "chance" (hereinafter referred to as "ticket") is acquired (for example, in FIG. C) to (D)). In this chance ticket acquisition performance, it is possible to acquire a maximum of 4 tickets, and there is a time when the chance ticket acquisition performance is executed, which shows how one ticket is acquired, and a time when the chance ticket acquisition performance is executed, which shows how two tickets are acquired. When a chance ticket acquisition performance is performed, when a chance ticket acquisition performance representing the acquisition of three tickets is performed, and when a chance ticket acquisition performance representing the acquisition of four tickets is performed. There is a time.

As will be described in detail later, FIGS. 32(C) to (D) illustrate how a chance ticket acquisition effect representing the acquisition of two tickets is executed, and FIGS. 33(A) to (B) 34(A) and 34(B) exemplify how a chance ticket acquisition effect representing the acquisition of three tickets is executed.

The ticket increase/decrease performance (see FIG. 30(C)) is a performance that increases or decreases the number of tickets acquired through the chance ticket acquisition performance. For example, FIGS. 32(D) to (F) illustrate how a ticket increase/decrease performance is executed in which two tickets acquired through a chance ticket acquisition performance are reduced to one. Furthermore, FIGS. 33(B) to (D) illustrate how a ticket increase/decrease performance is executed in which three tickets acquired through the chance ticket acquisition performance are reduced to two. Further, FIGS. 34(B) to (D) illustrate how a ticket increase/decrease performance is executed in which the three tickets acquired through the chance ticket acquisition performance are increased to four.

Note that the minimum number of tickets before such ticket increase/decrease performance is executed is one, and the maximum number is four. Further, the minimum number of tickets immediately after such ticket increase/decrease effect is executed is one, and the maximum number is four. Further, although not shown in the figure, there are cases where the number of tickets does not increase or decrease as a result of the ticket increase/decrease effect being executed.

The ticket reversal effect (see FIG. 30(D)) is an effect in which the ticket displayed on the display screen 70 is reversed as a result of the ticket increase/decrease effect. The judge performance (see FIG. 30(E)) determines whether or not the second change performance will be executed based on the result of the ticket reversal performance, and if the second change performance is executed, what the second change performance is. It is a performance that informs you of the change up to the stage.

The ticket displayed on the display screen 70 during the omen performance has the word "chance" written on the front side (for example, see FIGS. 32(C) to (F)), and the back side has a "〇" or "x" written on it. (For example, see FIGS. 32(G) and 33(E)). In the foreshadow performance in this embodiment, when the second change performance is to be executed depending on the total number of "〇" displayed on the display screen 70 as a result of the ticket reversal performance, the second change performance is You will be notified of how many stages the performance will change. For example, in the ticket reversal effect illustrated in FIG. 32(G), since the total number of “○” displayed on the display screen 70 is zero, the second change effect changes to the zero stage, , it is announced that the second change effect will not be executed. Furthermore, for example, in the ticket reversal effect illustrated in FIG. is notified that the second change effect will change to the second stage.

Then, in the judge performance following such a ticket reversal performance, it is determined whether or not the second change performance is executed based on the result of the ticket reversal performance, and if the second change performance is executed, the second change performance is determined. The number of stages to which the change has been made is reported. This judge performance includes a "success performance" that informs that the second change performance will be executed, and a "failure performance" that informs that the second change performance will not be executed. Here, if the success effect is executed, the second change effect is executed, which changes to the stage suggested by the final total number of ○, and conversely, if the failure effect is executed, the final change effect is executed. Even if the total number of O's is 1 or more, the second change effect is not executed. Such ticket reversal effect and judge effect will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 32 to 34.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 30, when the second change effect is executed, first, the first stage effect (first stage effect) that constitutes the second change effect is executed (see FIG. 30(F)). ). Here, if the final stage of the current second change performance is the first stage, then following the first stage performance, there is a first stage end performance that informs that the second change performance will end at the first stage. This is executed (see FIGS. 30(F) and (G)).

On the other hand, if the final stage of the current second change performance is the second stage or later, that is, if the final stage of the current second change performance is the second stage or the third stage, the first stage performance Subsequently, the second stage performance (second stage performance) is executed (see FIGS. 30(F) and (H)). Here, if the final stage of the current second change performance is the second stage, then following the second stage performance, there is a second stage end performance that informs that the second change performance will end at the second stage. This is executed (see FIGS. 30(H) and (I)).

Furthermore, if the final stage of the current second change performance is the third stage, the third stage performance (third stage performance) is executed following the second stage performance (Fig. 30 (H) and (See (J)). In this embodiment, this third stage performance is the upper limit stage performance, so following the third stage performance, the end of the third stage is announced to notify that the second change performance will end at the third stage which is the upper limit stage. The effect is executed (see FIGS. 30(J) and (K)).

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, the foreshadowing effect is executed and then the second change effect is executed, or the foreshadowing effect is executed. The second change effect may be executed without any change.

In addition, in this embodiment, when both the precursor production and the second change production are executed, the case where both of these productions are executed during the variable display of one of the first special symbols in the normal gaming state is described. Let's explain with an example. On the other hand, in other embodiments, when the variation display of the first special symbol in which the second change production is executed is the variation, during the variation display of the first special symbol performed before the variation. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the foreshadowing effect described above is executed. For example, based on the result of the preliminary judgment process related to the right to judge the first special symbol, which is performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (the variation) in which the second change production is executed, the production pattern of the precursor effect is determined. It is conceivable to perform effect control such as setting a setting and executing a precursor effect based on the setting.

(Jackpot reliability of second change production)
As illustrated in FIG. 31(A), the jackpot reliability of the second variation effect in which the first stage is the final stage is set to about 3%, and the jackpot of the second variation effect in which the second stage is the final stage. The reliability is set at about 9%, and the jackpot reliability of the second change effect, where the third and final stage is the upper limit, is set at about 17%. In this way, the second change performance in this embodiment is configured as a performance in which the more the second change performance changes, the higher the possibility that the winning notification performance will be executed.

(Jackpot reliability and characteristics of omen performance)
The foreshadowing effect described above based on FIG. 30 has the characteristic that the jackpot reliability changes depending on the final number of 〇s (total number of 〇s) displayed by the ticket reversal effect (see Fig. 30(D)). are doing. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 31(B), the jackpot reliability of the precursor effect where the final number of 〇 is “1” is set to about 2%, and the final number of 〇 is “1”. The reliability of a jackpot for a portent performance that is "2" is set at approximately 5%, and the reliability of a jackpot for a portent performance where the final number of 0s is "3" is set at approximately 11%.

Further, the foreshadowing performance has a feature that the possibility that the second change performance will be executed after the end of the foreshadowing performance increases depending on the total number of O's that are finally displayed by the ticket reversal performance. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 31(B), when a precursor effect is executed in which the final total number of 〇 is "1", there is a probability of 2 changes with about 15% probability. If the precursor effect is executed and the final total number of O's becomes "2", the second change effect will be executed with a probability of about 45%, and the final total number of O's becomes "3". '' is executed, the second change effect is executed with a 100% probability.

In addition, the more tickets that are displayed as a result of the chance ticket acquisition effect, or the more tickets that are displayed as a result of the ticket increase/decrease effect, the more the omen effect will eventually be displayed through the ticket reversal effect. It also has the characteristics that the total number of is likely to increase, and the second change effect is also likely to be executed. For this reason, by performing a chance ticket acquisition performance in which many tickets are displayed or a ticket increase/decrease performance in which the number of tickets increases, not only does the player's expectation for the winning notification performance increase, but also the second It is possible to effectively improve the player's expectations for the execution of the change effect.

Furthermore, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 31(B), when the second change performance is executed after the precursor performance is executed, the final change performance is determined as a result of the ticket reversal performance that constitutes the precursor performance. It also has the feature that the same number of stage effects as the total number of 0's displayed are executed in the second change effect. Specifically, if one 〇 is finally displayed by the ticket reversal effect and the second change effect is executed after that, only the first stage effect of the first to third stage effects will be displayed. is executed. In addition, if two O's are finally displayed due to the ticket reversal performance and the second change performance is executed after that, the first stage performance and the second stage of the 1st stage performance to 3rd stage performance Two stage performances are performed. In addition, if three ○ are finally displayed by the ticket reversal effect and the second change effect is executed after that, the first stage effect, the second change effect among the first to third stage effects, Three stage performances are performed: a stage performance and a third stage performance.

On the other hand, even if the total number of 〇 finally displayed as a result of the ticket reversal performance is 1 or more, if the judge performance informs that the second change performance will not be executed (the failure performance is ), the second change effect is not executed.

<Specific example of a precursor effect when the second change effect is not executed>
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a specific example of the precursor effect when the second change effect is not executed will be described. Here, FIG. 32 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the precursor effect when the second change effect is not executed.

In FIG. 32(A), on the display screen 70, one pending icon (for example, a white pending icon) is displayed in the pending icon display area 71, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is displayed. In order to notify that the judgment result of the corresponding first special symbol judgment is "lost", the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and the production symbol indicating the winning number of "582" is displayed. A stopped display state is illustrated. In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.6 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 A first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon is executed.

Here, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the first pending icon is "lose" and the variation pattern for no-reach performance is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, The following effects may be performed.

That is, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon, the earliest displayed in the pending icon display area 71 The pending icon is shifted to the icon display area 72, and scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 32(A) and 32(B)). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the scroll display of these three symbol rows was started, the chance ticket acquisition effect described above is executed based on FIG. 30(B) (see FIGS. 32(C) and (D)).

FIG. 32(C) shows an example of how a predetermined character is happy after acquiring two chance tickets, and FIG. 32(D) shows how the two acquired chance tickets are displayed on the display screen 70. An example is shown in which they are displayed side by side in the upper right area. In this way, by displaying two tickets, compared to the case where one ticket is displayed, the player's expectations for the execution of the second change performance after the end of the precursor performance are more effectively reduced. It is possible to improve the Furthermore, these two tickets both have "O" written on their backs, and there is a possibility that a second change performance that changes to the second stage will be executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that there is a possibility that the second variation effect will be executed based on the number of tickets displayed by the ticket acquisition effect, and also based on the number of tickets. It is possible to recognize that the second change performance may change up to the second stage.

Following such a chance ticket acquisition performance, the ticket increase/decrease performance described above is executed based on FIG. 30(C) (see FIGS. 32(E) and (F)). FIG. 32E shows an example of a predetermined character attacking two tickets using a ray gun in order to increase the number of tickets. Further, the subsequent FIG. 32(F) illustrates a state in which increasing the number of tickets fails and conversely, two tickets are reduced to one.

When such a ticket increase/decrease effect is executed, the ticket reversal effect described above based on FIG. 30(D) is executed (see FIG. 32(G)). In FIGS. 32(F) and (G), the ticket reduced to one due to the ticket increase/decrease effect moves to the center area of the display screen 70, and the ticket is turned over to expose the "x". The situation is illustrated. This ticket reversal performance informs the player that the final total number of 〇 is "0", so the player is informed that the final stage of the second change performance will be the zero stage based on the ticket reversal performance. That is, it is possible to easily recognize that the second change effect is not executed.

Following the ticket reversal performance, a judge performance is performed (see FIG. 32(H)). FIG. 32(H) shows an example of a failure effect in which a crying character and the words "Unfortunate..." are displayed to notify that the second change effect will not be executed. There is. The player can easily recognize that the second change performance will not be executed after the end of the current precursor performance based on the judge performance (here failure performance) illustrated in FIG. 32(H). .

Here, the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time is "lose", and the variation pattern for the no-reach effect is the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Since this has been selected, at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol this time, for example, the three production symbols showing the winning number of "361" will be pseudo-stopped, and the "losing symbol" will be displayed as the first special symbol. Along with the stop display, a loss notification performance is executed in which the three performance symbols indicating the above-mentioned irregularities are stopped as they are (see FIG. 32(I)).

<Specific example of a precursor production and a second change production that ends in the second stage>
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, specific examples of the precursor effect and the second change effect that ends in the second stage will be described. Here, FIG. 33 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the precursor effect and the second change effect that ends at the second stage.

FIGS. 33(A) and 33(B) illustrate how the chance ticket acquisition performance is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. FIG. 33(A) shows an example of how a predetermined character is happy after acquiring three chance tickets, and FIG. 33(B) shows how the three acquired chance tickets are displayed on the display screen 70. An example is shown in which they are displayed side by side in the upper right area.

In the chance ticket acquisition performance illustrated in FIGS. 33(A) to 33(B), three tickets, one more than in the chance ticket acquisition performance described above based on FIGS. 32(C) to (D), are displayed. There is. Therefore, when a player sees three tickets displayed, he or she can easily understand that the second change performance is more likely to be executed than when two tickets are displayed. It is possible to recognize. In addition, all three tickets have an "〇" written on the back, making it easy for players to know that there is a possibility that a second change performance that changes up to the third stage, which is the upper limit stage, may be executed. It is possible to recognize the

Following the chance ticket acquisition performance, a ticket increase/decrease performance is executed (see FIGS. 33(C) to (D)). FIG. 33C shows an example of a predetermined character attacking three tickets using a ray gun in order to increase the number of tickets. Furthermore, the subsequent FIG. 33(D) shows an example of a state in which increasing the number of tickets fails and, conversely, the number of tickets is reduced from three to two.

When such a ticket increase/decrease effect is executed, a ticket reversal effect is executed (see FIG. 33(E)). In FIGS. 33(D) to (E), the number of tickets reduced to two due to the ticket increase/decrease effect moves to the center area of the display screen 70, and both of these tickets are reversed and become two "〇". An example of how this is exposed is shown. This ticket reversal effect informs the player that the final total number of 〇 is "2", so the player is aware that there is a possibility that the second change effect will be executed based on the ticket reversal effect. In addition, when the second change effect is executed, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a possibility of change to the second stage.

Furthermore, as described above based on FIG. 31, when the precursor effect in which the final number of ○ becomes "2" is executed, the possibility that the second change effect will be executed afterwards is about 45%. be. Therefore, when the ticket reversal effect illustrated in FIG. 33(E) is executed, there are times when the second change effect is executed after the precursor effect ends, and times when it is not executed. When the second change performance is performed after the precursor performance ends, the following performance will be performed.

That is, following the ticket reversal performance, the judge performance is executed (see FIG. 33(F)). FIG. 33(F) shows an example of a successful performance in which a happy character and the words "STEP 2!" are displayed to notify that the second change performance is being executed. ing. Based on the judge performance (successful performance here) illustrated in FIG. It is possible to easily recognize that it changes up to two stages.

In this way, when the judge performance is executed to inform that the second change performance will be executed and that the second change performance will change to the second stage, the second change performance will start, and the first stage performance will start. 1st stage performance including a performance that displays an image (see FIG. 33(G)), 2nd stage performance including a performance that displays a 2nd stage performance image (see FIG. 33(H)), 2nd stage end performance image The second stage end effect (see FIG. 33(I)) including the effect of displaying is executed.

As is clear from the notations in FIGS. 33(G) to (I), in the process of sequentially displaying the first stage effect image, second stage effect image, and second stage end effect image, these effect images are displayed. As well as changing the display area, the display area is enlarged each time the display of the effect image is switched. The display contents of the first stage effect image, the second stage effect image, and the second stage end effect image may be displayed, for example, the first stage effect image of the first change effect (FIG. 28( The idea is to display an effect image with a display content that has the same characteristics as the second stage effect image (see FIG. 28(C)), and the second stage related effect image (see FIG. 28(D)). It will be done.

Note that the second stage end effect (see FIG. 33(I)) does not have the function of suggesting development into a reach effect like the second stage related effects described above based on FIG. 28(D). Similarly to the second-stage related effects, it may also have a function that suggests development into a reach effect (for example, SP reach).

<Specific example of a precursor production and a second change production that ends at the third stage>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35, specific examples of the precursor effect and the second change effect that ends at the third stage will be described. Here, FIGS. 34 and 35 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the foreshadowing effect and the second change effect that ends at the third stage of the upper limit.

FIGS. 34(A) and 34(B) exemplify how the chance ticket acquisition performance is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. FIG. 34(A) shows an example of how a predetermined character is happy after acquiring three chance tickets, and FIG. 34(B) shows how the three acquired chance tickets are displayed on the display screen 70. An example is shown in which they are displayed side by side in the upper right area. The chance ticket acquisition performance illustrated in FIGS. 34(A) to 34(B) is a performance common to the chance ticket acquisition performance described above based on FIGS. 33(A) to 33(B), and this chance ticket acquisition performance is The same effect as explained above can be expected.

Following the chance ticket acquisition performance, a ticket increase/decrease performance is executed (see FIGS. 34(C) to 34(D)). FIG. 34C shows an example of a predetermined character attacking three tickets using a ray gun in order to increase the number of tickets. Furthermore, the subsequent FIG. 34(D) illustrates a state where the number of tickets has been successfully increased and the number of tickets has increased from three to four.

When such a ticket increase/decrease effect is executed, a ticket reversal effect is executed (see FIG. 34(E)). In FIGS. 34(D) to (E), the number of tickets increased to four due to the ticket increase/decrease effect moves to the center area of the display screen 70, and all four tickets are reversed and three "〇" are displayed. ” and one “x” is shown as an example. This ticket reversal effect notifies the player that the final total number of 0s is "3," so the player is aware that the second change effect may be executed based on the ticket reversal effect. In addition, when the second change performance is executed, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a possibility of changing to the third upper limit stage.

Note that, as described above based on FIG. 31, when the precursor effect in which the final number of ○ becomes "3" is executed, there is a 100% possibility that the second change effect will be executed afterwards. . For this reason, when the ticket reversal effect illustrated in FIG. 34(E) is executed, the second change effect will always be executed after the precursor effect ends.

Therefore, in the judge performance (see FIG. 33(F)) following the ticket reversal performance, a failure performance is never performed, and a success performance is always performed. FIG. 34(F) shows an example of a successful performance in which a happy character and the words "STEP 3 confirmed!" are displayed to notify that the second change performance will be executed. has been done. Based on the judge performance (successful performance in this case) illustrated in FIG. It is possible to easily recognize the change up to the third stage.

In this way, when the judge performance that notifies that the second change performance will be executed and that the second change performance will change to the third stage is executed, the second change performance will start, and the first stage performance will start. A first stage performance including a performance that displays an image (see FIG. 34 (G)), a second stage performance that includes a performance that displays a second stage performance image (see FIG. 34 (H)), and a third stage performance that includes a performance that displays an image. A third stage performance including a performance to be displayed (see FIG. 34(I)) and a third stage end performance including a performance to display a third stage end performance image (see FIG. 35(A)) are executed.

As is clear from the notations in FIGS. 34(G) to (I) and FIG. 35(A), the first stage effect image, second stage effect image, third stage effect image, and third stage end effect image are sequentially displayed. During the display process, the display area in which these effect images are displayed changes, and the display area is expanded each time the display of the effect image is switched. The display contents of the first stage effect image, the second stage effect image, the third stage effect image, and the third stage end effect image may be displayed. ), the first stage effect image (see Figure 28 (A)), the second stage effect image (see Figure 28 (C)), the third stage effect image (see Figure 28 (E)), and the third stage related It is conceivable to display an effect image with display content having the same characteristics as the effect image (see FIG. 28(F)).

Note that the third stage end effect (see FIG. 35(A)) does not have a function that suggests development to other effects such as a reach effect, but for example, the third stage end effect (see FIG. 35(A)) may As in the case of the third-stage related effects, it may be provided with a function that suggests development into a reach effect (for example, SPSP reach).

As described above based on FIG. 31(A), the jackpot reliability of the second change performance that changes to the upper limit of the third stage is about 17%. Therefore, after the third stage end effect is executed, the effect may proceed as follows. That is, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed after the third stage end effect was executed, the scrolling speed of the left and right symbol rows decreases, and the five symbols on the left and the five symbols on the right A reach-to-reach effect is executed in which the five symbols come to a pseudo stop and a reach-to-reach is established (see FIG. 35(B)).

When reach is established in this way, first, the normal reach described above is executed based on FIG. 8(F) etc. (see FIG. 35(C)). Then, at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time, if a variable effect production pattern that directly develops from normal reach to SPSP reach is set, as described above based on FIG. 10(B), A development effect that suggests development into SPSP reach is performed (see FIG. 35(D)). In FIG. 35(D), in the process of moving to the upper left area of the display screen 70 while the left five symbols are being reduced, they rotate once clockwise with the scroll direction as the axis direction, and then move to the upper left area. At the same time, in the process of moving to the upper right area of the display screen 70 while the five symbols on the right are being reduced in size, the symbol rotates once clockwise with the scroll direction as the axis direction, and then moves to the upper right area. Illustrated.

When it develops into SPSP reach, an SPSP reach performance image that is a performance image related to SPSP reach is displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 35(E)). As a result, for example, an effect display showing a battle between the main character and the enemy character is performed. Thereafter, when the SPSP reach reaches its final stage, a first performance button operation promotion performance is performed to prompt the player to operate the first performance button 35 (see FIG. 35(F)). Specifically, a first performance button image imitating the first performance button 35 and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period during which operation of the first performance button 35 is valid are displayed. The effects after the first effect button operation promotion effect is executed are as described above based on FIG. 10 and the like.

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 that can execute the precursor performance and the second change performance, the more the second change performance changes, the higher the possibility that the winning notification performance will be executed (see FIG. 31(A)). On the other hand, the ticket suggests the possibility that the second change performance will change to one stage below three stages, due to the precursor performance that is a precursor to the second change performance. Therefore, the player is able to recognize in advance how likely the second change performance is to change to the level of 1 based on the precursor performance, and the second change performance is executed. It is possible to effectively suggest the possibility that the second change performance will change to the first stage while making the user expect this by using the foreshadowing performance.

The process executed by the sub CPU 91 to control the execution of such a precursor effect and the second change effect will be described in detail later based on FIG. 80.

[Stage change performance and expected performance]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 39, the stage change performance and expected performance executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. Here, FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the stage change performance and the expected performance. FIG. 37 is a screen diagram illustrating a series of performances in which the stage change performance ends at the first stage and develops into the expected performance. FIGS. 38 and 39 are screen diagrams illustrating a series of performances in which the stage change performance ends at the third stage, which is the upper limit, and develops into the expected performance.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the stage change performance and the expected performance can be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state. Here, the stage change performance is a performance that can be changed in stages up to a predetermined stage (in this embodiment, the third stage) as an upper limit to any stage below the predetermined stage. The expected performance is a performance that makes the player expect that the winning notification performance will be executed.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 81 executes a first special symbol determination based on the jackpot random number etc. acquired in response to the winning. Then, a fluctuation start command including information indicating the determination result of this first special symbol determination is transmitted to the sub control board 90. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 controls execution of the stage change performance and the expected performance based on the received variation start command. In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, the stage change performance and the expected performance are executed in the following flow.

If the sub CPU 91 determines to execute a stage change effect at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. ) has elapsed, the first stage performance (first stage performance) of the stage change performance is started (see FIG. 36(A)). Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed after this first stage performance started, the first stage performance develops into a second stage performance, which is the next stage performance after the first stage performance ( A development icon suggesting that a winning event (change) will occur, and an expected performance icon (an example of a "corresponding image") corresponding to an expected performance that makes one expect that a winning notification performance will be executed are displayed on the display screen 70, and these are displayed on the display screen 70. An icon variation effect (for example, see FIG. 37(D)) that causes the icon to vary on the display screen 70 is started (see FIG. 36(B)).

In this way, when the first stage performance of the stage change performance is being executed, the expected performance icon is placed in a possibility suggesting state (which indicates that the expected performance corresponding to the expected performance icon may be executed). In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 91 executes first effect control for displaying a variable display state on the display screen 70.

Here, the sub CPU 91 ends the stage change performance at the first stage performance at the start of the current variable display of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the expected performance icon that was fixed and stopped during the execution of the first stage performance. When a performance pattern of a series of performances for executing the expected performance is set, a predetermined second performance control is executed. The second performance control here changes the display state of one expected performance icon displayed during the first stage performance from the above-mentioned possibility suggesting state, and executes the expected performance corresponding to the expected performance icon. A performance that changes to a confirmed notification state that definitively informs the user of the event, terminates the stage change performance that is being executed at the first stage, and executes the expected performance that corresponds to the expected performance icon in the confirmed notification state. It is control.

Specifically, in order to change the display state of the expected performance icon from the possibility suggestion state to the confirmed notification state, the sub CPU 91 selects one expected performance from among the plurality of icons displayed during the first stage performance. All icons except the icon are deleted from the display screen 70 and one expected performance icon is fixed and stopped on the display screen 70. An expected performance icon finalization/stop performance (for example, see FIG. 37(F)) is executed (see FIG. 37(F)). (See (C)). Then, the sub CPU 91 ends the stage change performance being executed at the current stage (here, the first stage) (see FIG. 36(D)), and executes the expected performance corresponding to the expected performance icon that has been fixed and stopped. (See FIG. 36(E)). Here, the "determined notification state" is a state in which it is definitively notified that the expected performance will be executed, but "definitely notified" means that the display state of the expected performance icon changes to the confirmed notification state. In this case, the notification is not limited to the notification that the expected performance corresponding to the expected performance icon will definitely be executed, but when the display state of the expected performance icon changes to the confirmed notification state, the notification corresponding to the expected performance icon is This includes notification that the expected performance will be executed with an extremely high probability (for example, 99.8%). Therefore, when the display state of the expected performance icon changes to the confirmed notification state, instead of the expected performance corresponding to the expected performance icon, another expected performance that does not correspond to the expected performance icon may be executed. be. The probability that such other expected performance will be executed is extremely low, and if another expected performance that does not correspond to the expected performance icon that has changed to the confirmed notification state is executed, the winning notification performance will definitely be executed within the same fluctuation. That will happen.

On the other hand, if a performance pattern for developing (changing) the stage change performance from the first stage to the second stage is set at the start of the current variable display of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 91 selects a predetermined third Execute production control. The third performance control here converts the currently executed first stage performance into a second stage performance (second stage performance) without changing the display state of the expected performance icon from the possibility suggestion state to the confirmed notification state. It is a production control to change it to.

In order to realize the third effect control described above, the sub CPU 91 starts the icon variation effect as described above based on FIG. Then, a development icon confirmation/stop effect (for example, see FIG. 38(D)) is executed to permanently stop the first development icon on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 36(F)). Then, the second stage performance is started by changing the first stage performance image displayed by the first stage performance to a second stage performance image for the second stage performance (Fig. 36(G), Fig. 38 (See (D) to (E)).

Next, during this second stage performance, the sub CPU 91 changes a plurality of icons including at least one expected performance icon and one developed icon, as described above based on FIG. 36(B). The icon variation effect to be displayed is started (see FIGS. 36(H) and 38(F)). In addition, in the icon variation performance performed during the second stage performance, icons of a different combination from the plurality of icons that are variably displayed in the icon variation performance performed during the first stage performance are variably displayed. This will be explained in detail later based on FIGS. 37 to 39.

At the start of the current variable display of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 91 ends the stage change performance with the second stage performance, and starts the expected performance corresponding to the expected performance icon that was fixed and stopped during the execution of the second stage performance. If a performance pattern for a series of performances is set, a predetermined second performance control is executed. The second performance control here changes the display state of one expected performance icon displayed during the second stage performance from a possibility suggestion state to a confirmed notification state, and changes the stage change performance currently being executed to the second stage change performance. This is a performance control in which the expected performance corresponding to the expected performance icon in the confirmed notification state is executed after completing each step.

Specifically, the sub CPU 91 selects one of the plurality of icons displayed during the second stage performance in order to change the display state of one expected performance icon from a possibility suggestion state to a confirmed notification state. Delete all the icons except for the expected performance icon from the display screen 70, and execute the expected performance icon finalization/stop performance (for example, see FIG. 38(H)) that permanently stops one expected performance icon on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 38(H)). (See FIG. 36(I)). Then, the sub CPU 91 ends the stage change performance that is being executed at the current stage (here, the second stage) (see FIG. 36(J)), and executes the expected performance corresponding to the expected performance icon that has been fixed and stopped. (See Figure 36(K)).

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 has set a performance pattern in which the stage change performance is developed (changed) in the order of the first stage, second stage, and third stage at the start of the current variable display of the first special symbol, A predetermined third performance control is executed. The third production control here is to change the currently executed second stage production to the final stage without changing the display state of the expected production icon displayed during the second stage production from the possibility suggestion state to the confirmed notification state. This is a performance control for changing to a three-stage performance (third stage performance).

In order to realize the third effect control described above, the sub CPU 91 starts the icon variation effect (see FIG. 36(H)) as described above based on FIG. The icon is deleted from the display screen 70, and the development icon finalization stop effect (for example, see FIG. 38(H)) is executed to permanently stop the first development icon on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 36(L)). ). Then, the third stage performance is started by changing the second stage performance image displayed by the second stage performance to a third stage performance image for the third stage performance (Fig. 36(M), Fig. 38 (See (H) to (I)).

Next, the sub CPU 91 starts the icon variation effect during this third stage effect in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 36(B) (see FIG. 36(N) and FIG. 39(A)). ). Note that in the stage change performance in this embodiment, the third stage is the upper limit stage, and the stage change performance does not further change from the third stage. Therefore, in the icon variation performance performed during the third stage performance, a plurality of expected performance icons that do not include the developed icon are displayed in a variable manner.

At the start of the current variable display of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 91 ends the stage change performance at the upper limit of the third stage performance, and starts the expected performance corresponding to the expected performance icon that was fixed and stopped during the third stage performance. If a performance pattern for a series of performances is set, a predetermined second performance control is executed. The second performance control here changes the display state of one expected performance icon displayed during the third stage performance from a possibility suggestion state to a confirmed notification state, and changes the stage change performance being executed to the third stage performance. This is a performance control in which the expected performance corresponding to the expected performance icon in the confirmed notification state is executed after completing each step.

Specifically, the sub CPU 91 selects one of the plurality of icons displayed during the third stage performance in order to change the display state of one expected performance icon from a possibility suggestion state to a confirmed notification state. Delete all the icons except the expected performance icon from the display screen 70, and execute the expected performance icon finalization/stop performance (for example, see FIG. 39(C)) that permanently stops one expected performance icon on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 39(C)). (See FIG. 36(O)). Then, the sub CPU 91 ends the stage change performance being executed at the current stage (in this case, the third stage) (see FIG. 36(P)), and executes the expected performance corresponding to the expected performance icon that has been confirmed and stopped. (See Figure 36(Q)).

<Specific example of stage change production that ends at the first stage>
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, a specific example of a stage change effect that ends at the first stage will be described. Here, FIG. 37 is a screen diagram illustrating a series of performances in which the stage change performance ends at the first stage and develops into the expected performance. In FIG. 37, the first stage effect described above based on FIG. 36 is started (see FIG. 36(A)), the icon variation effect is started (see FIG. 36(B)), and the expected effect icon is confirmed and stopped. The performance is executed (see FIG. 36(C)), the stage change performance is ended at the first stage (see FIG. 36(D)), and the expected performance corresponding to the expected performance icon that has been confirmed and stopped is executed (see FIG. 36). (See (E)).

In FIG. 37(A), on the display screen 70, one pending icon (for example, a white pending icon) is displayed in the pending icon display area 71, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is displayed. In order to notify that the judgment result of the corresponding first special symbol judgment is "lost", the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and three effects showing the random number of "615" are displayed. A state in which the symbols are stopped and displayed is illustrated. In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.6 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 A first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon is executed.

Here, the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the earliest pending icon is "lose", and as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, reach is established during the pseudo second consecutive variation performance. When a variation pattern for a ready-to-reach effect is selected in which a predetermined ready-to-reach effect is executed, the following effects may be executed.

That is, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon, the earliest displayed in the pending icon display area 71 The pending icon shifts to the icon display area 72, and scrolling display of the three symbol rows starts (see FIGS. 37(A) and 37(B)). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the scroll display of these three symbol rows was started, the first stage effect described above based on FIG. 36(A) is started (see FIG. 37(C)).

FIG. 37C shows an example of an elliptical first stage effect image that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction. Although not shown in the figure, the first stage performance image is a performance image representing the characters "1st" in order to clearly notify that this is the first stage of the stage change performance. Note that the display content of this first stage effect image may be of any kind. For example, like the first stage effect image of the first change effect described above based on FIG. An example is a performance image representing a character.

In addition, in FIGS. 37(C) to (I), for convenience of explanation, the holding icon, the icon, the holding pedestal located directly below the holding icon display area 71, and the holding pedestal located directly below the corresponding icon display area 72 are shown. Illustration is omitted.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the first stage performance of the stage change performance was started, the icon change performance described above based on FIG. 36(B) is started (FIG. 37(D)). reference). As exemplified in FIG. 37(D), the icon change effect in this embodiment includes one or more development icons that suggest that the first stage effect develops (changes) into the second stage effect, and the expected effect. One or more expected performance icons corresponding to , are displayed, and these icons are rotated clockwise around a stage performance image (here, a first stage performance image).

Figure 37(D) shows two oval icons containing the letters "UP" (UP icons), two oval icons containing the letters "NEXT" (NEXT icons), and the letters "Blue Hold". one oval icon containing the words "green pending" (the blue pending change icon), one oval icon containing the words "green pending" (the green pending change icon), and one oval icon containing the text "chara" (the character The reach icon) is illustrated as rotating and moving.

Here, the UP icon is an icon classified as the above-mentioned "development icon" that suggests that the stage change performance develops (changes) from the current stage to the next stage. FIG. 37(D) illustrates how a plurality of icons including two UP icons rotate and move, but the number of UP icons included in the plurality of icons is variable, and no UP icon is included. In some cases, only one UP icon is included, and in some cases, three or more UP icons are included.

Here, if the UP icon is not included in the multiple icons, the multiple icons will consist only of the "expected performance icon", and the stage change performance will always end at the current stage. In this case, after the stage change performance is finished, the expected performance corresponding to any one of the expected performance icons that has been confirmed and stopped will be executed. On the other hand, the plurality of icons may be composed only of "UP icons". In this case, since the fixed stop icon is not fixedly stopped, the stage change effect will always develop (change) from the current stage to the next stage.

The NEXT icon, the blue pending change icon, the green pending change icon, and the character reach icon illustrated in FIG. 37(D) are all icons classified as the above-mentioned "expected performance icons." The NEXT icon is an icon corresponding to a pseudo-continuous performance (an example of an expected performance: see FIG. 9(D), for example). The blue pending change icon is an icon corresponding to an icon change effect (an example of an expected effect) that changes the display color of the icon to blue. The green pending change icon is an icon corresponding to an icon change effect (an example of an expected effect) that changes the display color of the icon to green. The character reach icon is an icon corresponding to the character reach (see FIG. 8(I)).

When the icon variation effect shown in FIG. 37(D) is started, an effect display is performed in which these icons are rotated and moved clockwise around the first stage effect image. Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the icon variation effect, the rotational movement of these icons is completed, each icon is displayed in a pseudo-stop state on the display screen 70, and each icon is displayed as an attack. An attack effect display showing how the player is attacked is performed (see FIG. 37(E)).

When such an attack effect display is performed, one of the multiple icons that have been pseudo-stopped around the first stage effect image is fixedly stopped on the display screen 70, and all the remaining icons are stopped. An effect display for erasing is performed (see FIGS. 37(E) to (F)). FIG. 37(F) shows an example of how the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance is definitively notified by the expected performance icon finalized stop performance in which only the NEXT icon among a plurality of icons is definitively stopped. There is.

In this way, when the expected performance icon finalization stop performance that finalizes and stops the NEXT icon is performed, the first stage performance image and the NEXT icon illustrated in FIG. The performance ends with the first stage performance, and a pseudo continuous performance corresponding to the NEXT icon is executed (see FIG. 37(G)). FIG. 37(G) exemplifies a pseudo-continuous performance in which the left 9 symbols and the right 6 symbols pseudo-stop in order, and then the middle 7 symbols as pseudo-continuous symbols pseudo-stop.

In this way, after the different performance symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol have pseudo-stopped, when the 7 symbols in the middle row have pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-second fluctuating performance that follows the pseudo-first fluctuating fluctuating performance is started. (See FIGS. 37(G) to (H)). Specifically, after the characters “×2” indicating the start of the second pseudo-variable effect are displayed in a large size in the center area of the display screen 70, the characters “×2” are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 70. Along with this, scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (restarted) in the effect symbol display area 73.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the second pseudo fluctuating effect in this way, the scrolling speed of the symbol column on the left column decreases, the left symbol (for example, 4 symbols) comes to a pseudo stop, and then , the scrolling speed of the right symbol column decreases (same as the left symbol), and the right symbol (here, 4 symbols) comes to a pseudo stop, establishing a reach (see FIG. 37(I)). In this way, once the reach based on the performance symbol is achieved, a predetermined reach performance is executed thereafter, and a hit notification performance or a loss notification performance is executed.

Up to this point, we have explained a series of performances when the expected performance icon finalization stop performance that finalizes and stops the NEXT icon as the expected performance icon is executed. Sometimes it is executed.

For example, when an expected performance icon finalization/stop performance is executed to finalize and stop the blue pending change icon, the first stage performance image and the blue pending change icon are erased, and the stage change performance ends at the first stage. After that, an icon change effect is executed in which the display color of the icon (see FIG. 37(B)), which is not shown in FIG. 37(C) and thereafter, is changed to blue. Further, for example, if an expected performance icon finalization stop performance that causes the green pending change icon to be fixed and stopped is executed, the first stage performance image and the green pending change icon are deleted, and the stage change performance ends at the first stage. . After that, an icon change effect is executed to change the display color of the icon (see FIG. 37(B)) to green. When these icon change effects are executed, a pseudo-continuous effect, a ready-to-reach effect, or a predetermined reach effect may be executed before or after the icon change effect is executed.

Further, for example, when an expected performance icon finalization/stop performance that finalizes and stops the character reach icon is executed, the first stage performance image and the character reach icon are erased, and the stage change performance ends at the first stage. After that, character reach is executed after normal reach is executed, or character reach is executed without executing normal reach.

Up to this point, we have briefly explained the series of performances after the execution of the expected performance icon finalization stop performance that finalizes and stops various expected performance icons. A series of effects to be performed will be described in detail later based on FIG. 38.

<Specific example of a stage change production that ends at the 3rd stage>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, a specific example of a stage change effect that ends at the third stage will be described. Here, FIGS. 38 and 39 are screen diagrams illustrating a series of performances in which the stage change performance ends at the third stage, which is the upper limit, and develops into the expected performance. 38 and 39, the icon fluctuation effect is started after the first stage effect is started (see FIGS. 36(A) and 36(B)), and the developed icon finalization stop effect is started, as described above based on FIG. 36. (see FIG. 36(F)), starts the second stage presentation, starts the icon variation presentation (see FIG. 36(G) to (H)), and executes the development icon finalization stop presentation (see FIG. 36). (L)), after starting the third stage performance, the icon variation performance is started (see Figures 36 (M) to (N)), and the expected performance icon confirmation stop performance is executed (see Figure 36 (O)). ), ending the stage change performance at the third stage (see Figure 36 (P)), and executing the expected performance corresponding to the expected performance icon that has been confirmed and stopped (see Figure 36 (Q)). Specific examples are shown.

In addition, in FIGS. 38 and 39, for convenience of explanation, illustrations of the hold icon, the icon, the hold pedestal located directly below the hold icon display area 71, and the pedestal located directly below the icon display area 72 are omitted. There is.

FIG. 38(A) shows an example of the situation immediately after the first stage performance of the stage change performance is started. During this first stage performance, a first stage performance image representing at least the characters "1st" is displayed, as described above based on FIG. 37(C). When a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of this first stage performance, the icon variation performance in the first stage performance is executed (see FIGS. 38(B) to 38(C)).

When comparing the icon variation effect in FIG. 38(B) and the icon variation effect in FIG. 37(D), the latter icon variation effect includes multiple icons including one blue pending change icon and one green pending change icon. The two differ from each other in that the former icon variation effect displays a plurality of icons including two blue pending icons. The icon variation effects illustrated in FIGS. 38(B) to 38(C) are based on FIGS. 37(D) to 37(E), except that the combination and arrangement of icons included in the plurality of icons are different. This is performed in the same way as the icon variation effect described above.

In addition, in the icon variation effect illustrated in FIG. 38(B), two UP icons are included in the plurality of icons, but the number of UP icons included in the plurality of icons is variable, and the number of UP icons included in the plurality of icons is variable. There are cases where no UP icon is included in the UP icon, cases where the number of UP icons included in the plurality of icons is one, and cases where the number of UP icons included in the plurality of icons is three or more. A first case in which the number of UP icons included in the plurality of icons is a first number, and a second case in which the number of UP icons included in the plurality of icons is a second number greater than the first number. When compared, the second case has the characteristic that the stage change performance progresses to the next stage more easily than the first case. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the possibility that the stage change performance being executed will develop into the next stage based on the number of UP icons displayed during the icon change performance. It is possible.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the icon variation effect illustrated in FIG. 38(B), an attack effect display is performed in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 37(E). (See FIG. 38(C)). Then, as a result of this attack effect display, a development icon confirmation stop effect may be executed in which one UP icon is confirmed and stopped on the display screen 70 and all remaining icons are erased (Fig. 38 ( See D). By this development icon finalization stop performance, it is definitely notified that the stage change performance being executed will develop from the current first stage to the second stage.

Next, the second stage performance is started (see FIG. 38(E)). Specifically, the UP icon is deleted from the display screen 70, and an effect display is performed that changes the first stage effect image to the second stage effect image (see FIGS. 38(D) to (E)). The second stage effect image here represents at least the characters "2nd". Note that the display content of this second stage effect image is not particularly limited, but for example, the second stage effect image displayed in the second stage effect of the first change effect (see FIG. 28(C)) and An example is displaying a second stage effect image having similar characteristics.

Further, in FIG. 38(E), a second stage effect image having the same shape and size as the first stage effect image (see FIGS. 38(A) to 38(D)) is shown in the central area of the display screen 70. The second stage effect image may be different from the first stage effect image in at least one of its shape and size.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the second stage effect of the stage change effect (see FIG. 38(E)), the icon change effect described above starts based on FIG. 36(H). (See FIG. 38(F)). As illustrated in FIG. 38(F), the icon change performance here includes one or more development icons that suggest that the second stage performance will develop (change) into the third stage performance, and the expected performance. One or more corresponding expected performance icons are displayed, and these icons are configured as a performance that rotates and moves clockwise around the second stage performance image.

FIG. 38(F) shows one NEXT icon, two UP icons, one green pending change icon, one oval icon containing the words "red pending" (red pending change icon), and one An example of how two character reach icons and one oval icon (SP reach icon) including the letters "SP" rotate and move is illustrated.

Here, the NEXT icon, UP icon, green pending change icon, and character reach icon are as described above based on FIG. 37(D). Both the red hold change icon and the SP reach icon are icons that are classified as the above-mentioned "expected performance icons." The red pending change icon is an icon that corresponds to an icon change effect (an example of an expected effect) that changes the display color of the icon to red. The SP reach icon is an icon corresponding to SP reach (see FIG. 8(J)).

When the icon variation effect shown in FIG. 38(F) is started, an effect display is performed in which these icons are rotated and moved clockwise around the second stage effect image. Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the icon variation effect, the rotational movement of these icons is completed, each icon is displayed in a pseudo-stop state on the display screen 70, and each icon is displayed as an attack. An attack effect display showing how the player is attacked is performed (see FIG. 38(G)). This attack effect display is performed in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 37(E).

When such an attack effect display is performed, one of the plurality of icons that have been pseudo-stopped around the second stage effect image is fixedly stopped on the display screen 70, and all the remaining icons are stopped. An effect display for erasing is performed (see FIGS. 38(G) to (H)). In FIG. 38(H), it is confirmed that the stage change performance being executed will develop from the second stage to the upper limit third stage by the development icon finalized stop performance that definitively stops the UP icon among the multiple icons. This example shows how the notification is made.

In addition, here, we will explain the case where the stage change performance develops from the second stage to the third stage by finalizing and stopping the UP icon, but the expected performance icon (here, the NEXT icon, the green pending change icon, The expected performance icon finalization stop performance is executed to finalize and stop any of the character reach icon, red pending change icon, and SP reach icon (see Figure 38 (F)), and as a result, the stage change performance being executed is changed to the second stage change performance. The expected performance corresponding to the expected performance icon that has been finalized and stopped may be executed.

In addition, in the icon variation effect illustrated in FIG. When the performance is started, it is definitely notified that the stage change performance will end at the current stage (here, the second stage). Conversely, there are cases where all the icons are UP icons (that is, the expected performance icon is not included in the multiple icons), and in this case, when the icon change performance is started, the stage change performance is The development from the current stage (here, the second stage) to the next stage (here, the third stage) will be definitely notified.

Following the development icon confirmation/stop performance in FIG. 38(H), the third stage performance is started (see FIGS. 38(H) to (I)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 38(H) to (I), the UP icon is erased from the display screen 70, and an effect display that changes the second stage effect image to the third stage effect image is performed. be exposed. The third stage effect image here represents at least the characters "3nd". Note that the display content of this third stage effect image is not particularly limited, but for example, the third stage effect image displayed in the third stage effect of the first change effect (see FIG. 28(E)). An example is displaying a third stage effect image having similar characteristics.

In addition, FIG. 38(I) shows the first stage effect images (see FIGS. 38(A) to 38(D)), the second stage effect images (see FIGS. 38(E) to (H)), and their shapes and sizes. In the example shown, the third-stage effect images are displayed in the center area of the display screen 70, but the third-stage effect image has at least one of its shape and size that is the same as that of the first stage effect image. It may be different from the stage effect image or the second stage effect image.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the third stage effect of the stage change effect (see FIG. 38(I)), the icon change effect described above starts based on FIG. 36(N). (See FIG. 39(A)). As illustrated in FIG. 39(A), the icon change performance here does not include a development icon (UP icon) that suggests that the stage change performance develops to the next stage, and is composed only of expected performance icons. This is configured as an effect in which a plurality of icons are displayed, and these icons are rotated clockwise around the third stage effect image. In this way, in the icon change performance that is executed during the third stage performance, the reason why the developed icon is not included in the plurality of icons is that the stage change performance that is being executed is further developed from the third stage, which is the upper limit stage. This is because there is no

FIG. 39(A) includes one NEXT icon, two red pending change icons, one oval icon (gold pending change icon) containing the words "Gold Pending", and the text "SPSP". One oval icon (SPSP reach icon), one oval icon (ZONE icon) containing the words "ZONE", one oval icon containing the words "extreme heat" (extreme heat icon), An example of how the image rotates and moves is illustrated.

Here, the NEXT icon and the red pending change icon are as described above based on FIG. 37(D) and FIG. 38(F). The money hold change icon, SPSP reach icon, ZONE icon, and intense heat icon are all icons classified as the above-mentioned "expected performance icons." The gold holding change icon is an icon corresponding to an icon change effect (an example of an expected effect) that changes the display color of the icon to gold. The SPSP reach icon is an icon corresponding to SPSP reach (an example of expected performance: see FIG. 8(K)). The ZONE icon is an icon corresponding to a performance in a highly reliable special performance mode called "ZONE" (an example of expected performance). The extremely hot icon is an icon that corresponds to a highly reliable performance (an example of an expected performance) that includes the character display of "extremely hot".

When the icon variation effect shown in FIG. 39(A) is started, an effect display is performed in which these icons are rotated and moved clockwise around the third stage effect image. Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the icon variation effect, the rotational movement of these icons is completed, each icon is displayed in a pseudo-stop state on the display screen 70, and each icon is displayed as an attack. An attack effect display showing how the player is attacked is performed (see FIG. 39(B)). This attack effect display is performed in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 37(E).

When such an attack effect display is performed, one of the multiple icons that have been pseudo-stopped around the third stage effect image is fixedly stopped on the display screen 70, and all the remaining icons are stopped. An effect display for erasing is performed (see FIGS. 39(B) to 39(C)). In FIG. 39(C), the characters "Very hot" are displayed after the stage change performance being executed is completed in the third stage by the expected performance icon confirmed stop performance that definitively stops the extremely hot icon among the plurality of icons. An example of how the above-mentioned high-reliability performance including display is definitively notified that it will be executed is illustrated.

In addition, here, we will explain the case where the stage change effect ends at the current third stage and the high reliability effect is executed due to the fixed stop of the extremely hot icon, but other expected effect icons (here, , NEXT icon, red hold change icon, gold hold change icon, SPSP reach icon, or ZONE icon: see Figure 39 (A)) is executed. The stage change performance may end at the third stage, and the expected performance corresponding to the expected performance icon that has been confirmed and stopped may be executed.

Here, if the expected performance icon finalized stop performance that finalizes and stops the gold holding change icon is executed, the icon that changes the display color of the icon to gold after the stage change performance that is being executed ends in the third stage. A change performance will be executed. In addition, if the expected performance icon confirmed stop performance that finalizes and stops the SPSP reach icon is executed, after the stage change performance that is being executed ends in the third stage, it will directly develop to SPSP reach or another reach will occur. It will eventually develop into SPSP reach via production. In addition, if the expected performance icon finalization stop performance that finalizes and stops the ZONE icon is executed, the current performance mode will shift to a highly reliable special performance mode after the stage change performance that is being executed ends at the third stage. I will do it.

Expected performance that finalizes and stops the NEX icon and red pending change icon When the icon confirmed stop performance is executed, the expected performance that is executed after the stage change performance in progress ends at the third stage is as described above. be.

In addition, in the icon variation performance in the second stage performance described above (see FIG. 38(F)), a total of 7 icons, including 5 expected performance icons and 2 development icons (UP icons), are displayed in a variable manner. Ru. On the other hand, in the icon fluctuation performance in the third stage performance (see FIG. 39(A)), seven expected performance icons are displayed, which is the same number as the plurality of icons that are variably displayed in the icon fluctuation performance in the second stage performance. Is displayed. In this way, in the stage change performance in this embodiment, the number of icons that are variably displayed in the icon change performance is fixed at seven, but the number of icons that are variably displayed in the icon change performance is It may be changed as appropriate depending on the stage in which it is executed.

For example, in the icon variation performance in the second stage performance, there is a possibility that the third stage performance will develop later, so a total of seven icons, including two UP icons, as illustrated in FIG. 38(F). are displayed in a changing manner, but in the icon changing effect in the third stage effect (see FIG. 39(A)), it is not necessary to display these two UP icons. Therefore, in the icon variation performance in the third stage performance, a total of five expected performance icons may be displayed in a variable manner, excluding the two UP icons from the seven icons.

Returning to the explanation in FIG. 39, when the expected performance icon finalization stop performance (see FIG. 39(C)) that finalizes and stops the extremely hot icon is executed, the third stage performance image and the extremely hot icon are erased from the display screen 70. Then, the stage change performance ends. After this stage change effect ends, the following effects may be performed.

That is, when the stage change performance ends at the third stage after the expected performance icon finalization stop performance that finalizes and stops the super hot icon is executed, for example, the scrolling speed of the symbol rows in the left column and right column decreases, The 7 symbols on the left and the 7 symbols on the right come to a pseudo-stop and a reach-to-reach effect is executed (see FIGS. 39(D) to 39(E)). At that time, as a highly reliable effect corresponding to the above-mentioned intense heat icon, as illustrated in FIG. 7 symbols is superimposed on the display, and an effect is executed in which the sound "Very hot" is output from the speaker 38.

After such a reach establishment effect is executed, a development effect that suggests development into an SPSP reach is performed (see FIG. 39(F)). In FIG. 35(F), in the process of moving to the upper left area of the display screen 70 while the seven symbols on the left are being reduced, they rotate once clockwise with the scroll direction as the axis direction, and then move to the upper left area. At the same time, in the process of moving to the upper right area of the display screen 70 while the seven symbols on the right are being reduced in size, the seven symbols on the right rotate once clockwise with the scroll direction as the axis direction, and then move to the upper right area. Illustrated.

FIG. 39(G) exemplifies how the group preview described above based on FIG. 10(D) occurs after the development effect is executed. During SPSP reach after a group notice has occurred, an SPSP reach effect image is displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 39(H)). As a result, for example, an effect display showing a battle between the main character and the enemy character is performed. Thereafter, when reaching the final stage of SPSP reach, a first performance button operation promotion performance is performed to prompt the player to operate the first performance button 35 (see FIG. 35(I)). Specifically, a first performance button image imitating the first performance button 35 and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period during which operation of the first performance button 35 is valid are displayed. The effects after the first effect button operation promotion effect is executed are as described above based on FIG. 10 and the like.

As explained based on FIGS. 36 to 39, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the display state of the expected performance icon (corresponding image) is determined from the possibility suggesting state during the first stage performance in the stage change performance. When the state changes to the notification state, the stage change performance ends at one stage, and the expected performance corresponding to the expected performance icon is executed. On the other hand, if the display state of the expected performance icon does not change from the possibility suggestion state to the confirmed notification state, the display state of the development icon changes from the possibility suggestion state to the confirmed notification state, and the stage change performance is There will be a change from one stage of production to the next stage of production. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the flow of subsequent performances based on the display state of the expected performance icon, and the display state of the expected performance icon changes from the possibility indication state to the confirmed notification state. It is possible to enjoy the game while expecting that the situation will change (or that it will not change from the possibility suggestion state to the confirmed notification state).

In addition, in the stage change performance in this embodiment, similar to the first change performance (see FIG. 29) and the second change performance (see FIG. 31(A)), the jackpot reliability increases as the stage progresses. It has characteristics. Furthermore, when comparing the icon variation performance during the first stage performance (for example, see FIG. 38(B)) and the icon fluctuation performance during the second stage performance (for example, see FIG. 38(F)), the latter The icon variation performance is characterized in that the expected performance icon corresponding to the expected performance with higher jackpot reliability is more likely to be displayed than the former icon variation performance. When comparing the icon variation performance during the second stage performance (for example, see FIG. 38(F)) and the icon fluctuation performance during the third stage performance (for example, see FIG. 39(A)), the latter The icon variation performance is characterized in that the expected performance icon corresponding to the expected performance with higher jackpot reliability is more likely to be displayed than the former icon variation performance. Therefore, through the synergistic effect of the stage change performance that develops the stages and the icon change performance in each stage of performance, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectations for the execution of the winning notification performance. is possible.

The processing executed by the sub CPU 91 to realize the stage change performance and expected performance described so far will be described in detail later based on FIG. 83.

(Variation example regarding stage change production)
Regarding the stage change effect described based on FIGS. 36 to 39, the following configuration may be adopted. That is, in this embodiment, a case will be described as an example in which the plurality of icons that are variably displayed in the icon variation performance performed during each stage performance include both expected performance icons and developed icons. On the other hand, in other embodiments, in the icon variation performance performed during each stage performance, a configuration is adopted in which a plurality of icons including a plurality of expected performance icons and not including a development icon are displayed in a variable manner. Good too. When such a configuration is adopted, the development icon does not change from the possibility suggestion state to the confirmed notification state, so one of the expected performance icons among the plurality of expected performance icons changes from the possibility suggestion state to the confirmed notification state. , the stage change performance being executed is ended at the current stage, and the expected performance corresponding to the first expected performance icon is executed, while all of the multiple expected performance icons change from the possibility suggesting state. If the state does not change to the confirmed notification state, it is conceivable to also adopt a configuration in which the stage change effect being executed is changed from the current stage to the next stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be described as an example in which a state in which the expected performance icon is displayed in a variable manner is a possibility suggestion state, and a state in which the expected performance icon is fixed and stopped is a confirmed notification state. On the other hand, in other embodiments, a state in which the expected performance icon is displayed outside a specific display area is defined as a possibility suggestion state, and a state in which the expected performance icon is displayed within a specific display area is determined as a state in which the expected performance icon is displayed in a specific display area. It may also be a state. Further, for example, a state in which the expected performance icon is displayed in a semi-transparent manner may be set as a possibility suggestion state, and a state in which the expected performance icon is displayed in an opaque manner may be set as a confirmed notification state. Further, for example, a state where the expected performance icon is displayed in monochrome may be set as a possibility suggestion state, and a state where the expected performance icon is displayed in color may be set as a confirmed notification state.

In other embodiments, for example, instead of the icon variation effect and the expected effect icon confirmation/stop effect, a selection effect is performed in which a predetermined character selects any one expected effect icon from among a plurality of expected effect icons. The state before the expected performance icon is selected may be the possibility suggestion state, and the state after the expected performance icon is selected may be the confirmed notification state.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example will be explained in which the expected performance icon can be displayed during all stages of the stage change performance (here, the first stage performance, second stage performance, and third stage performance). However, in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the expected performance icon is displayed only during the performance of some stages of the stage change performance. With this configuration, for example, the expected performance icon is not displayed during the first stage performance or the second stage performance, and only when the third stage performance has progressed, based on FIGS. 39(A) to 39(C). An example of such a configuration is that it is possible to execute the above-mentioned icon variation performance and expected performance icon fixed stop performance. When such a configuration is adopted, if the stage change performance ends at the first or second stage, no advance notice is given regarding the expected performance that will be executed after the stage change performance ends, and the stage change performance is the upper limit. Only when the stage has progressed to the third stage, a preview regarding the expected performance to be executed after the stage change performance is completed will be given.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be explained using an example in which the corresponding image corresponding to the expected performance is an expected performance icon representing characters that can identify the expected performance, but the corresponding image is an image that can identify the expected performance. If so, the icon is not limited to the expected performance icon, and may be, for example, a performance image that does not represent characters that can identify the expected performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the upper limit stage of the stage change production is the third stage will be explained as an example, but the upper limit stage is not limited to the third stage, and the second stage may be the upper limit stage, Alternatively, the fourth stage or higher may be set as the upper limit stage.

[Special button effect]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45, a special button effect executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. Here, FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of special button effects. FIG. 41 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the first half of the special button press effect. FIG. 42 is a screen diagram illustrating a specific example of the second half of the special button press performance that is executed prior to the winning notification performance. FIG. 43 is a screen diagram illustrating a specific example of the second half of the special button continuous press performance that is executed prior to the loss notification performance. FIG. 44 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a special button single-press performance executed prior to the winning notification performance. FIG. 45 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the second half of the special button single press performance that is executed prior to the loss notification performance.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a special button effect (see FIG. 40) during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. This special button effect includes a special button continuous press effect (see FIG. 8(M), FIG. ) to (G)) and the special button single-press effect (see Fig. 8 (Q), Fig. 40(I) to (M)). The special button repeated press effect changes an effective suggestion image that suggests that the operation of the first effect button 35 is valid in response to repeated presses of the first effect button 35, and changes the effect according to the characters that this effective suggestion image finally shows. This is an effect that suggests winning or losing (see Figures 41 to 43). The special button single-press effect changes an effective suggestion image that suggests that the operation of the first effect button 35 is valid in response to a single press of the first effect button 35, and this effective suggestion image ultimately indicates. This is an effect that suggests winning or losing by letters (see Figures 44 and 45).

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as the variation patterns of the first special symbol selected by the main CPU 81 in the normal gaming state, there are a variation pattern dedicated to the special button repeated press effect and a variation pattern dedicated to the special button single press effect. If a variable pattern dedicated to special button press effects is selected, a special button press effect will be executed, and if a variable pattern dedicated to special button press effects is selected, a special button press effect will be executed. Ru.

<Specific example of special button press effects during winning fluctuations>
Hereinafter, while referring to FIGS. 40(A) to 40(G) and FIGS. 41 and 42, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, A specific example of a special button continuous press effect executed when a variation pattern dedicated to the special button continuous press effect is selected will be described.

FIG. 41(A) shows a state in which one hold icon (for example, a green hold icon) is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 on the display screen 70, and corresponds to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72. In order to notify that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lost", the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and three production symbols showing the random number of "652" are displayed. The example shows a state in which the icon is stopped and displayed. In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.6 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (here, the green pending icon) is executed by the main CPU 81.

Here, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the first pending icon is "lose", and a variation pattern dedicated to special button continuous press effect is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol , the following effects are executed.

That is, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon, the earliest displayed in the pending icon display area 71 The pending icon shifts to the icon display area 72, and scrolling display of the three symbol rows starts (see FIGS. 40(A) and 41(A) to 41(B)). In this way, after the scrolling display of the three symbol rows has started, the three blue symbols (even numbered symbols in this embodiment) are pseudo-stopped in order, thereby creating a blue chance effect in which the three blue symbols are pseudo-stopped. is executed (see FIGS. 40(B) and 41(C)). This blue chance production is as described above based on FIG. 8(L).

In addition, although FIG. 41(C) shows how a blue chance eye effect is executed in which three blue symbols of "246" are pseudo-stopped, the combination of the three blue symbols forming the blue chance eye is shown as an example. is not limited to the one illustrated in FIG. 41(C), for example, a blue chance effect in which three blue symbols in other combinations such as "468" and "682" are pseudo-stopped may be executed.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the blue chance effect was executed, the first effect button continuous press promotion effect is started (see FIGS. 40(C) and 41(C) to (D)). . In this first performance button repeated press promotion performance, as illustrated in FIG. !” and a validity suggestion image indicating the remaining time of the validity period in which the operation of the first effect button 35 is valid are displayed.

In addition, after the first performance button repeated press promotion effect is started, in order to secure a display area for displaying various effect images related to the special button repeated press effect, three symbol rows are displayed as small symbols. (See FIGS. 41(C) to (I)).

As illustrated in FIG. 41(D), the effective suggestion image is a horizontally long effect image with rounded ends that is displayed directly below the first effect button image, and the inner area is the left area. It is divided into a right side area. The left side area (white area) of the effective suggestion image is an area that indicates the elapsed time from the start of the validity period related to the first performance button repeated press promotion performance, and the right side area (black area) is an area that indicates the elapsed time from the start of the validity period related to the first performance button continuous press promotion performance. This is an area indicating the remaining time of the validity period related to the one effect button continuous press promotion effect. In this way, when the first performance button repeated press promotion performance is started, it is suggested that the operation of the first performance button 35 is valid during the valid period (predetermined period) in which the operation on the first performance button 35 is valid. The effective suggestion image of the first display mode is displayed. Note that the effective suggestion image in the first display mode is a performance image expressed using blue (see FIG. 41(D)).

Next, in conjunction with the start of the first performance button repeated press promotion performance, a change performance that changes the effective suggestion image of the first display mode is started (see FIGS. 40(D) and 41(E)). . This change performance is a performance that moves the boundary between the left side area and the right side area of the effective suggestion image to the right as time passes. Therefore, after the start of the change effect, the area (right side area) indicating the remaining time of the validity period in the validity suggestion image of the first display mode gradually becomes narrower (Fig. 41(D)~ (See (E)).

Subsequently, when the first performance button 35 is pressed repeatedly during the valid period related to the first performance button repeated press promotion performance, a downward compression performance that compresses the effective suggestion image downward is performed as an operation corresponding performance corresponding to the repeated presses. (See FIG. 40(E)). When this downward compression effect is being executed, the position of the lower end of the effective suggestion image does not change, and the upper end of the effective suggestion image gradually moves downward (see FIGS. 41(E) to (G)). As a result, the vertical width of the effective suggestion image gradually becomes smaller (the effective suggestion image becomes thinner). In addition, in FIG. 40(E), the broken line extending in the horizontal direction represents the position of the lower end of the effective suggestion image in the vertical direction, and the downward arrow shown directly above the broken line indicates the upper end of the effective suggestion image. represents the direction of movement of the part.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the pressed part of the first effect button 35 moves in the up and down direction (an example of a predetermined operating direction) in response to the first effect button 35 being operated by the player. It is configured. On the other hand, if the player repeatedly presses the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the first performance button repeated press promotion performance, the upper end of the valid suggestion image will move in the common direction that is common to the operating direction of the first performance button 35. The image gradually moves downward (in this case, downward), and the effective suggestion image changes so as to be compressed in the vertical direction.

Therefore, in response to repeated presses of the first effect button 35, a downward compression effect is executed to compress the effective suggestion image in the first display mode downward, as illustrated in FIGS. 41(E) to (G). Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if the effective suggestion image is being crushed from above by repeatedly pressing the first performance button 35, and it is possible to obtain a high performance effect.

In this downward compression effect, the vertical thickness of the effective suggestion image in the first display mode (the blue effective suggestion image whose inner side is divided into a left area and a right area) becomes a predetermined thickness (for example, 5 mm). After that, as the first effect button 35 is continuously pressed, a downward expansion effect is started to extend the valid suggestion image downward (see FIG. 40(F)). In this downward expansion effect, the upper edge of the effective suggestion image, which has been moved downward by the downward compression effect, passes the lower edge of the effective suggestion image and moves to a position below the lower edge, and the upper edge moves further downward. It is a staged display that shows how it moves. FIGS. 41(G) to (I) illustrate how an effective suggestion image that has been compressed to a predetermined thickness is expanded downward. In addition, in FIG. 41(H), the broken line extending in the horizontal direction represents the position of the lower end of the effective suggestion image in the vertical direction, and the downward arrow shown directly below the broken line indicates the upper end of the effective suggestion image. represents the direction of movement of the part.

In this way, as the player continues to repeatedly press the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the first performance button repeated press promotion performance, the effective suggestion image compressed to a predetermined thickness is now moved downward. Since the image is stretched out, it is possible to give the player the impression that the squashed effective suggestion image is flipped upside down and then stretched downward by the player's own operation, creating a high level of performance. It is possible to obtain the effect.

Note that the display modes of the effective suggestion image until the downward compression effect ends and the effective suggestion image after the downward compression effect ends are different from each other. Specifically, the former effective suggestion image (the effective suggestion image of the first display mode) is a performance image expressed using blue, with the inside thereof divided into a left area and a right area (Fig. 41(D)). On the other hand, the latter effective suggestion image (the effective suggestion image of the second display mode) is a performance image expressed using red and whose inside is not partitioned (see FIG. 41(H)). ).

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in response to the first performance button 35 being repeatedly pressed, the valid suggestion image is displayed in the second display mode different from the time when the valid suggestion image is displayed in the first display mode. A downward extension effect (an example of a "change effect display") that changes in a common direction (downward here) that is common to the operating direction of the first effect button 35 is executed.

As is clear from the explanation so far, when the downward compression effect ends and the downward expansion effect starts, the display mode of the effective suggestion image changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the downward expansion effect has started based on the change in the display mode of the effective suggestion image, or in other words, that the downward compression effect has been switched to the downward expansion effect. is possible.

In addition, as the downward extension effect starts, the display color of the effective suggestion image changes from blue, which is associated with a relatively low jackpot confidence level, to red, which is associated with a relatively high jackpot confidence level. and changes. For this reason, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to continue hitting the first performance button 35 repeatedly even after the downward compression performance has ended, and also to encourage the player to continue hitting the first performance button 35 repeatedly even after the downward compression performance has ended. It becomes possible to effectively improve expectations.

Subsequently, when the valid suggestion image in the second display mode is expanded until the vertical width of the valid suggestion image reaches a predetermined length (for example, 10 cm), the downward expansion effect ends (see FIG. 42(A)), and the valid suggestion image is displayed. A display effect that displays winning/losing suggestion characters within the suggestion image is executed (see FIG. 40(G)). Here, since the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol this time is "jackpot", the variation of the first special symbol this time is shown in Fig. 42(B). At the final stage of the display, the word "BONUS" is displayed in rainbow colors within the effective suggestion image as a jackpot suggestion indicating a jackpot, and the scroll display of the three symbol rows that had been displayed as small symbols has ended. A state in which three small symbols indicating the number "333" are pseudo-stopped is illustrated.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display effect illustrated in FIG. The performance symbols are displayed in a pseudo-stop display in the performance symbol display area 73 (see FIG. 42(C)), and as the jackpot symbol is displayed in a static manner as the first special symbol, the three production symbols displayed in a pseudo-stop display remain as they are. The main stop is performed (see FIG. 42(D)). FIG. 42(E) exemplifies how an opening performance that notifies the type of jackpot is performed during the opening period of the jackpot game that starts after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol for a predetermined period of time. .

<Specific example of special button press effect during loss fluctuation>
Next, referring to FIG. 43, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment in the normal gaming state is "lose", and the variation pattern dedicated to the special button continuous press effect is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. A specific example of a special button press effect executed when

When a special button press effect is executed in a loss variation where a loss notification effect is finally executed, a display effect of winning/losing suggestion characters (jackpot suggestion letters or loss suggestion letters) is executed (see Fig. 40 (G)). The series of effects up to this point are the same as the case where a special button press effect is executed in the winning variation where the winning notification effect is finally executed, and this is described in Figs. 40(A) to (F), Fig. 41, This is as described above based on FIG. 42(A).

In the special button continuous press effect during loss variation, the downward extension effect ends when the effective suggestion image in the second display mode is expanded until the vertical width of the effective suggestion image reaches a predetermined length (for example, 10 cm) (Fig. 43(A) )reference). This is as described above based on FIG. 42(A). When the downward extension effect is completed, a display effect is executed to display winning/losing suggestion characters within the valid suggestion image (see FIG. 40(G)). Here, since the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time is "loss", as illustrated in FIG. 43(B), the first special symbol of this time At the end of the special symbol fluctuating display, the word "Unfortunate" is displayed in gray within the effective suggestion image as a symbol indicating a loss, and the scrolling display of the three symbol rows that were displayed as small symbols ends. Then, a display effect is performed in which three small symbols indicating a reach loss of "454" are pseudo-stopped.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display effect illustrated in FIG. The production symbols are displayed in a pseudo-stop display in the production symbol display area 73 (see FIG. 43(C)), and as the losing symbol is displayed in a pseudo-stop display as the first special symbol, the three production symbols displayed in a pseudo-stop display (here Then, "454") is stopped as is (see FIG. 43(D)).

In this way, in the special button repeated press effect, a change effect display (downward compression effect or downward expansion effect) in which the effective suggestion image changes downward, which is common to the operating direction of the first effect button 35, is executed, and then, A display effect is executed in which characters indicating winning or losing are displayed within the valid suggestion image. The validity suggestion image displayed on general gaming machines only has the function of suggesting the remaining time of the validity period, and when the validity period ends, the validity suggestion image is deleted, and the validity suggestion image is used to create a change effect using the validity suggestion image. Display is never executed. On the other hand, the effective suggestion image displayed in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment displays a change effect that changes in a common direction that is common to the operating direction of the first effect button 35, or displays winning/losing suggestion characters. Since it has a function that conventional effective suggestion images do not have, such as , it is possible to realize an extremely interesting performance.

(Variation example regarding special button press effect)
Note that the following configuration may be adopted regarding the special button press effect.
That is, in this embodiment, the case where the characters "BONUS" or "Unfortunate" are displayed in the valid suggestion image as the winning/losing suggesting text has been explained as an example, but the winning/losing suggesting text may be the same as the one exemplified in this embodiment. However, other characters may be used. In the special button press effect in the winning variation, for example, other characters associated with a jackpot, such as "success", "congratulations", and "yay!", may be displayed as jackpot suggesting characters. In addition, in the special button-hitting performance in the loss variation, for example, other characters associated with loss, such as "failure" and "no!", may be displayed as loss-suggesting characters.

In addition, the performance performed at the end of the special button press performance is not limited to the display performance of characters suggesting winning or losing, but for example, a notice announcing that a predetermined expected performance that makes the player expect a jackpot will be executed. It may be a production or a false production of this preview production.

In addition, in this embodiment, by repeatedly pressing the first effect button 35, the depressed part of the first effect button 35 is repeatedly moved downward, so the upper end of the effective suggestion image is moved downward by a predetermined distance. An example will be described in which the effect is performed each time the first effect button 35 is pressed. However, the first production button 35 alternately moves from the initial position to the pressed position (downward movement) and returns from the pressed position to the initial position (upward movement) by intermittent operations by the player. Therefore, in other embodiments, for example, a downward movement effect in which the upper end of the effective suggestion image is moved downward by a first distance in response to the downward movement of the first effect button 35, and a downward movement effect in which the upper end of the effective suggestion image is moved downward by a first distance, and An upward movement effect in which the upper end of the effective suggestion image is moved upward by a second distance (shorter than the first distance) in response to the upward movement may be performed alternately.

In this way, if the configuration is such that not only the downward movement effect but also the upward movement effect can be executed, not only when the player presses the first effect button 35, but also when the first effect button 35 changes from the pressed position to the initial position. Since the effective suggestion image is linked to the first effect button 35 even when returning to , it is possible to further improve interest.

<Specific example of special button single press effect during winning fluctuation>
Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 40(A), (H) to (M), and FIG. 44, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol Now, a specific example of a special button single press effect that is executed when a variation pattern dedicated to the special button single press effect is selected will be described. Regarding the special button single press effect described below, the explanation of the configuration common to the above-mentioned special button continuous press effect will be simplified or omitted.

FIG. 44(A) shows a state in which one hold icon (for example, a red hold icon) is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 on the display screen 70, and the corresponding icon is displayed in the icon display area 72. In order to notify that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lost", the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and three production symbols showing the random number of "825" are displayed. The example shows a state in which the icon is stopped and displayed. In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.6 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (here, the red pending icon) is executed by the main CPU 81.

Here, the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the first pending icon is "lose", and the variation pattern exclusively for special button single press effect is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. In this case, the following effects will be executed.

That is, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon, the earliest displayed in the pending icon display area 71 The pending icon is shifted to the icon display area 72, and scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 40(A) and 44(A) to 44(B)). In this way, after the scrolling display of the three symbol rows has started, the three red symbols (odd symbols in this embodiment) are pseudo-stopped in order to create a red chance eye effect in which the three red symbols are pseudo-stopped and displayed. is executed (see FIGS. 40(H) and 44(C)). This red chance effect is as described above based on FIG. 8(P).

In addition, although FIG. 44(C) shows how a red chance effect is executed in which the three red symbols "135" pseudo-stop, the combination of the three red symbols that make up the red chance symbol is shown as an example. is not limited to the one illustrated in FIG. 44(C), for example, a red chance effect in which three red symbols in other combinations such as "315" and "337" are pseudo-stopped may be executed.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the red chance effect was executed, the first effect button single press promotion effect is started (see FIGS. 40(I) and 44(C) to (D)). ). In this first performance button single press promotion performance, as illustrated in FIG. 44(D), a first performance button image imitating the first performance button 35 and a " "Push it!" and a validity suggestion image indicating the remaining time of the validity period in which the operation of the first effect button 35 is valid are displayed.

In addition, after the first performance button single press promotion performance has started, in order to secure a display area for displaying various performance images related to the special button single press performance, a win/loss notification performance (win notification performance or loss notification performance) will be used. Until the start of the notification effect, the three symbol rows are scrolled and displayed as small symbols (see FIGS. 44(C) to 44(I)). This is similar to the case where the above-described special button press effect is executed.

Furthermore, in the first performance button single-press promotion performance, an effective suggestion image in the first display mode is displayed, as in the case where the first performance button repeated press promotion performance is executed. The validity suggestion image of the first display mode (see FIG. 44(D)) displayed in this first performance button single press promotion performance is such that the inner area thereof indicates the validity period related to the first performance button single press promotion performance. The first performance button multiple press promotion performance is divided into a left side area that shows the elapsed time since the start, and a right side area that shows the remaining time of the validity period related to the first performance button single press promotion performance. It has an internal configuration similar to the effective suggestion image of the first display mode that is displayed (see FIG. 41(D)).

On the other hand, the valid suggestion image of the first display mode displayed in the first performance button single-press promotion performance has a different display color from the effective suggestion image of the first display mode displayed in the first performance button repeated press promotion performance. ing. In the first performance button continuous press promotion performance described above based on FIG. 41 and the like, an effective suggestion image in the first display mode colored in blue is displayed (see FIG. 41(D)). On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special button single press effect has higher jackpot reliability than the special button repeated press effect, so in the special button single press effect, the red A colored effective suggestion image in the first display mode is displayed (see FIG. 44(D)).

In this way, a blue valid suggestion image is displayed in the special button single press effect, whereas a red valid suggestion image is displayed in the special button press effect, so the player can Based on the display color of the effective suggestion image in the first display mode, it is possible to easily recognize whether the jackpot reliability is high or low.

Next, in conjunction with the start of the first performance button single-press promotion performance, a change performance that changes the effective suggestion image of the first display mode is started (see FIGS. 40(J) and 44(E)). ). This change effect is performed in the same way as the change effect in the first effect button repeated press promotion effect (see FIG. 41(E)).

Subsequently, when the first performance button 35 is single-pressed during the validity period related to the first performance button single-press promotion performance, a downward compression performance (see FIG. 40(K)) is performed as a performance corresponding to the single press. ) and an upward extension effect (see FIG. 40(L)) are performed.

The downward compression effect in the special button single-press effect (see FIGS. 44(E) to 44(F)) is an effect that compresses the effective suggestion image of the first display mode downward; This effect is similar to the downward compression effect in the special button continuous press effect described above based on G). On the other hand, the downward compression effect in the special button single press effect is different from the downward compression effect in the special button continuous press effect in how the effective suggestion image in the first display mode is compressed. Specifically, in the downward compression effect in the special button continuous press effect, the first display mode is changed as a result of the player repeatedly pressing the first effect button 35, that is, performing multiple operations on the first effect button 35. The effective suggestion image is compressed until the vertical thickness becomes a predetermined thickness (for example, 5 mm). This is as described above based on FIGS. 41(E) to (G). On the other hand, in the downward compression performance in the special button single press performance, the first display is The effective suggestion image of the first display mode is compressed downward so that the vertical thickness of the effective suggestion image of the mode becomes a predetermined thickness (for example, 5 mm).

In this way, in the special button repeated press effect, the downward compression effect is not completed unless the player operates the first effect button 35 multiple times, whereas in the special button single press effect, the player presses the first effect button 35 multiple times. Just push 35 once to complete the downward compression effect.

Next, in the special button single-press performance, the second display mode is set so that the player releases the pressed part of the first performance button 35 and the pressed part returns from the pressed position to the initial position. An upward expansion effect is performed in which the effective suggestion image of is expanded upward (see FIG. 40(L) and FIGS. 41(G) to (H)). That is, in the special button single press effect, a downward compression effect is performed as the player presses the first effect button 35, and when the player releases the first effect button 35, the pressed part returns to the initial position. Along with the return, an upward extension effect is performed.

In the special button single press effect, as described above, a downward compression effect is executed to compress the effective suggestion image of the first display mode in which the inner area is divided into a left area and a right area. On the other hand, in the upward expansion performance following this downward compression performance, a performance is performed in which the effective suggestion image of the second display mode in which the inner area is not partitioned is expanded. Specifically, in the special button single press effect, a downward compression effect is performed in which the upper end of the effective suggestion image in the first display mode is moved downward, and in the subsequent upward expansion effect, the effective suggestion moved downward is performed. An upward expansion effect is performed in which the upper end of the image is moved upward.

In this way, in the special button single press effect, the effective suggestion image is compressed downward in conjunction with the player pressing the first effect button 35, and when the player presses the first effect button 35, the effective suggestion image is compressed downward. The valid suggestion image is expanded upward in conjunction with the release of the button and the first effect button 35 (the pressed part) returning to its initial position. In the special button single press effect, the downward compression effect is completed by the player pressing down the first effect button 35 only once. Therefore, after the downward compression effect is completed, the words "Push!" are not displayed (see FIGS. 44(F) to (I)). FIGS. 44(G) to (H) illustrate how the effective suggestion image in the second display mode is extended to a height that covers the first presentation button image by the upward extension effect.

Note that the upward extension effect in the special button single-press effect is a effect that occurs when the player releases his/her hand from the first effect button 35. For this reason, for example, when the downward compression effect is finished, that is, when the effect display of FIG. 44(F) is being performed, characters such as "Let go!" may be displayed.

Up to this point, we have explained the downward compression effect and the upward expansion effect in the special button single press effect, but the effective suggestion image is expanded until the vertical width of the effective suggestion image in the second display mode reaches a predetermined length (for example, 15 cm). Then, the upward expansion effect is completed (see FIG. 44(H)), and a display effect for displaying winning/losing suggestion characters in the valid suggestion image is executed (see FIG. 40(M)). Here, since the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol this time is "jackpot", the variation of the first special symbol this time is shown in Fig. 44(I). At the final stage of the display, the word "congratulations" is displayed as a jackpot suggesting character in the valid suggestion image, and the scroll display of the three small symbol rows ends, and "333" is displayed. A state in which three small symbols indicating a double number are pseudo-stopped is illustrated.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display effect illustrated in FIG. In the same manner as described above, a normal size performance symbol indicating a double number of "333" is pseudo-stop-displayed in the performance-design display area 73, and as the jackpot symbol is stopped-displayed as the first special symbol, The three performance symbols displayed in a pseudo-stop state come to a real stop.

<Specific example of special button press effect during loss fluctuation>
Next, referring to FIG. 45, it is determined that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment in the normal gaming state is "lose", and the variation pattern dedicated to the special button single press effect is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. A specific example of the special button single-press effect that is executed when the button is pressed will be explained.

When a special button single-press effect is executed during a loss variation, the series of effects until the display effect of the win/loss suggestion characters (jackpot suggestion characters or loss suggestion characters) (see Figure 40 (M)) is executed. This is the same as when the special button single-press effect is executed in , and this is as described above based on FIGS. 40(A), (H) to (L), and FIG. 44.

In the special button single-press effect during loss variation, the upward extension effect ends when the vertical width of the effective suggestion image in the second display mode reaches a predetermined length (15 cm in this embodiment) (see FIG. 45(A)) . This is as described above based on FIG. 44(H) and the like. When the upward expansion effect is completed, a display effect is executed to display winning/losing suggestion characters within the valid suggestion image (see FIG. 40(M)). Here, since the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time is "loss", as illustrated in FIG. 45(B), the first special symbol of this time At the final stage of the special symbol fluctuating display, the character "x" is displayed in the valid suggestion image as a loss suggestion character indicating a loss, and the scrolling display of the three symbol rows that were displayed as small symbols has ended. , a display effect is performed in which three small symbols indicating reach misses of "232" pseudo-stop.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display effect illustrated in FIG. The production symbols are displayed in a pseudo-stop display in the production symbol display area 73 (see FIG. 45(C)), and as the losing symbol is displayed in a pseudo-stop display as the first special symbol, the three production symbols displayed in a pseudo-stop display ( Here, "232") is stopped as is (see FIG. 45(D)).

In this way, in the special button single press effect, a change effect display (downward compression effect or upward expansion effect) in which the effective suggestion image changes downward and upward, which is common to the operating direction of the first effect button 35, is executed. , After that, a display effect is executed in which characters indicating a win or a loss are displayed within the valid suggestion image. The validity suggestion image displayed on general gaming machines only has the function of suggesting the remaining time of the validity period, and when the validity period ends, the validity suggestion image is deleted, and the validity suggestion image is used to create a change effect using the validity suggestion image. Display is never executed. On the other hand, the effective suggestion image displayed by the special button single press effect in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment changes in the common direction (downward and upward direction) that is the same as the operating direction of the first effect button 35. Since it has functions that conventional effective suggestion images do not have, such as displaying change effects such as changing effects and displaying winning/losing suggestion characters, it is possible to realize an extremely interesting effect.

(Variation example regarding special button single press effect)
Note that the following configuration may be adopted regarding the special button single press effect.
That is, in this embodiment, the case where the characters "congratulations" or "×" are displayed as the winning/losing suggestion characters in the valid suggestion image has been explained as an example, but the winning/losing suggesting characters may be the same as those exemplified in this embodiment. However, other characters may be used. In the special button single-press effect in the winning variation, for example, other characters reminiscent of a jackpot, such as "success", "BONUS", or "yay!", may be displayed as jackpot suggesting characters. In addition, in the special button press effect for variation in loss, for example, other characters associated with loss, such as "failure", "no!", and "unfortunate", may be displayed as characters suggesting loss.

In addition, the performance performed at the end of the special button single-press performance is not limited to the display performance of characters suggesting winning or losing, but for example, a predetermined expectation performance that makes the player expect a jackpot is announced. It may be a preview performance or a fake performance of this preview performance.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a case is described in which a downward compression effect and an upward expansion effect are executed in response to the player single-pressing the first effect button 35 and then releasing his/her hand from the first effect button 35. Let's explain with an example. In contrast, in other embodiments, in response to a single press of the first effect button 35 by the player, the downward compression effect described above based on FIGS. 41(E) to (G) and the downward compression effect shown in FIG. 41(H) are performed. ~(I) and the downward extension effect described above based on FIG. 42(A) may be performed.

[Sub LCD linked button press effect]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50, a sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press effect executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram for explaining the first sub-liquid crystal 51 and the second sub-liquid crystal 52. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press effect. FIG. 48 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the first half of the sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press effect. FIG. 49 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the second half performance (successful performance) of the sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press performance. FIG. 50 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the second half performance (failure performance) of the sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press performance.

As described above based on FIG. 46). The first sub-liquid crystal 51 is a liquid crystal display device having a first sub-screen 510 smaller than the display screen 70. The second sub-liquid crystal 52 is a liquid crystal display device having a second sub-screen 500 smaller than the display screen 70.

The first sub-liquid crystal 51 and the second sub-liquid crystal 52 are arranged in front of the display screen 70 and are configured to be movable vertically and horizontally along the display screen 70. The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a sub-liquid crystal drive control circuit 57 (see FIG. 5). The lamp CPU 121 reads operation pattern data from the lamp ROM 122 in accordance with the command received from the sub control board 90, and the sub liquid crystal drive control circuit 57 controls the first sub liquid crystal motor and the second sub liquid crystal motor based on this operation pattern data. Controls the drive of the LCD motor.

FIG. 46(A) illustrates a state in which the first sub-liquid crystal 51 and the second sub-liquid crystal 52 are arranged at their respective initial positions. When the first sub-liquid crystal 51 is placed at the initial position, the first sub-screen 510 is located on the left side of the display screen 70, and when the second sub-liquid crystal 52 is placed at the initial position, the second sub-screen 510 is located at the left side of the display screen 70. Screen 520 is located on the right side of display screen 70. Therefore, in a state where the first sub-liquid crystal 51 and the second sub-liquid crystal 52 are arranged at their respective initial positions, the first sub-liquid crystal 51 and the second sub-liquid crystal 52 do not reduce the visibility of the display screen 70. It is possible to perform effects using the display screen 70.

FIG. 46(B) exemplifies a state in which the first sub-liquid crystal 51 and the second sub-liquid crystal 52 are arranged at their respective presentation positions. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute a sub-liquid crystal linked button repeated press effect, which will be described later. When the sub-liquid crystal linked button repeated press effect is executed, the first sub screen 510 The first sub-liquid crystal 51 and the second sub-liquid crystal 52 are moved to the presentation position where the second sub-screens 520 are arranged side by side, and the first sub-liquid crystal 51 and the second sub-liquid crystal 52 are placed in the presentation position. In this state, a sub-liquid crystal linked button press effect using the first sub-screen 510 and the second sub-screen 520 is executed.

When the main CPU 81 executes the first special symbol determination in response to the game ball entering the first starting hole 21, the main CPU 81 causes the sub-control board 90 to start changing as the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner. Send commands. In response, the sub CPU 91 of the sub control board 90 sets a performance pattern based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, and sends a command to the image and sound control board to instruct execution of the performance of the set performance pattern. 100 and lamp control board 120. Here, if a performance pattern including a sub-liquid crystal interlocking button continuous press performance is set, the following series of performances will be executed.

That is, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state, a variable performance including a variable display of performance symbols (scrolling display of three symbol rows) is started (see FIG. 47(A)). Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the start of this variable effect, the first sub-liquid crystal 51 and the second sub-liquid crystal 52 change from the initial position (see FIG. 46(A)) to the effect position (see FIG. 46(A)). (B)) (see FIG. 47(B)).

In this way, when the first sub-liquid crystal 51 and the second sub-liquid crystal 52 are placed at their respective presentation positions, various presentation images of balloons, air pumps, and characters are displayed at the first stage, as illustrated in FIG. 48(A). 1 sub-screen 510 (an example of a "second display area") (see FIG. 47(C)), and various effect images such as an intermittent input prompt image and a validity period gauge are displayed on a second sub-screen 520 (an example of a "second display area"). (see FIG. 47(D)).

Here, the intermittent input promotion image is a performance image that prompts the player to perform intermittent operations on the first performance button 35, and in this embodiment, the first performance button image imitating the first performance button 35 and the index finger It consists of a hand image imitating a human hand thrust downward, and a hand image imitating a human hand. The validity period gauge is a performance image that suggests the remaining time of the validity period related to the sub-liquid crystal interlocking button continuous press performance, and is a performance image similar to the validity suggestion image described above based on FIG. 41. However, in the sub-liquid crystal linked button press performance, the downward compression performance, downward expansion performance, and upward expansion performance using effective suggestion images, which are performed in the special button performance, are not performed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 47, as described above based on FIGS. 47(C) and (D), various effect images necessary for the sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press effect are displayed on the first sub-screen 510 and the second sub-screen 520. When displayed, the validity period related to the sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press effect starts (see FIG. 47(E)). The validity period gauge, like the validity suggestion image described above, is divided into a left area that shows the elapsed time since the validity period started, and a right area that shows the remaining time of the validity period. Accordingly, these boundary portions move to the right.

In this way, when the validity period related to the sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press performance starts and the validity period gauge starts to change, the intermittent input promotion performance starts accordingly (see FIG. 47(F)). This intermittent input promotion effect uses the above-described first effect button image and hand image to encourage the player to perform intermittent input (i.e., repeated hits) on the first effect button 35, and in this embodiment, In the second sub-screen 520, the first effect button image and hand image in the first state (see FIG. 48(B)) and the first effect button image and hand image in the second state (see FIG. 48(C)) are displayed. , is configured as a display effect that alternately displays.

Here, the first effect button image and hand image in the first state (see FIG. 48(B)) indicate that the player is holding his/her hand over the first effect button 35 but is not touching the first effect button 35. , is an effect image representing a state in which the first effect button 35 is placed at the initial position. On the other hand, the first effect button image and hand image in the second state (see FIG. 48(C)) are such that the player presses the lower part of the first effect button 35 and the first effect button 35 is at the initial position. This is a performance image that shows the state in which the button has moved from the button to the pressed position.

During the validity period related to the sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press effect, such an intermittent input promotion effect is executed using the second sub-screen 520, whereby the first effect button 35 and the hand move up and down together. (In other words, it appears that the first performance button 35 is being pressed repeatedly), the player is encouraged to repeatedly press the first performance button 35 based on the intermittent input promotion performance. can be easily recognized.

On the other hand, on the first sub-screen 510, the pump effect is started in conjunction with the start of the intermittent input promotion effect on the second sub-screen 520 (see FIG. 47(G)). This pump effect is an effect that displays a repetitive action effect image showing how a predetermined display object performs a specific repetitive action, and in this embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 48(B) and (C), , the display shows a predetermined character using an air pump to inflate a balloon.

FIG. 48(B) illustrates an example of a first state effect image related to pump effect, and FIG. 48(C) illustrates an example effect image of a first state related to pump effect. Here, the effect image for the first state is a effect image showing the character grasping the handle of the inflator and pulling the piston rod upward, and the effect image for the second state is the effect image showing the character holding the handle of the inflator. This is a staged image showing how the piston rod is squeezed and pushed downward.

In the sub-liquid crystal linked button press effect, an intermittent input promotion effect using the first sub-screen 510 and a pump effect using the second sub-screen 520 are simultaneously executed, and as a result, as illustrated in FIG. 48(B). The effect display in the first state and the effect display in the second state illustrated in FIG. 48(C) are alternately performed. Here, in the performance display in the first state, the hand before touching the first performance button 35 and the air pump with the piston rod pulled upward are simultaneously displayed on separate display screens (Fig. 48(B) )reference). In addition, in the performance display in the second state, the hand pressing down the first performance button 35 and the air pump whose piston rod is pushed downward are displayed simultaneously on separate display screens (see FIG. 48(C)). ). For this reason, the vertical movement of the hand represented by the hand image and the vertical movement of the piston rod of the inflator are linked, and the first production button It is possible to effectively encourage the player to hit 35 consecutively.

Note that such intermittent input promotion performance and pump performance continue even after the player starts repeatedly pressing the first performance button 35 until the effective period for the sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous pressing performance ends (Fig. 49(B) ) continues until the balloon bursting effect is performed.

Next, during the valid period of the sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press effect, as the player starts repeatedly pressing the first effect button 35, an air filling effect is performed (see FIG. 47(H)). This air filling effect is a display effect showing how the balloon displayed on the first sub-screen 510 is gradually filled with air and inflated in response to the player repeatedly pressing the first effect button 35. It becomes. As illustrated in FIG. 48, although an inflator hose is connected to the balloon, the balloon will not be inflated until the player starts repeatedly hitting the first performance button 35. Figures 48(B) to (C) illustrate how the balloon is not inflated even when the pump effect is performed, and Figures 48(D) and 49(A) show the air filling effect at the same time as the pump effect. This example shows how the balloon is filled with air.

In this way, when the air filling effect is performed together with the pump effect on the first sub-screen 510 and the balloon is inflated to a predetermined size, the validity period for the sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press effect ends, and accordingly, the balloon A burst effect is executed (see FIG. 47(I)). This balloon bursting effect is a display effect showing how a balloon filled with too much air bursts, as illustrated in FIG. 49(B).

After this balloon bursting effect is performed, there are cases in which a success pattern effect is performed and cases in which a failure pattern effect is performed. Here, the successful pattern presentation represents the success in displaying a suggestion item that suggests that the expected presentation will be executed, prior to the expected presentation that makes people expect a jackpot (see FIG. 47(K)). This is a suggestion item display success effect (see FIG. 47(J)). On the other hand, the failure pattern effects include a suggested item display failure effect (see Figure 47 (L)) that shows a failure in displaying the suggested item, and an end effect of the sub-liquid crystal linked button repeated press effect (Figure 47 (M)). This is a production consisting of (see) and.

49(C) to (D) show an example of how a success pattern effect is executed following a balloon bursting effect. As a suggestion item that suggests that the production in the special production mode (an example of the expected production) will be executed, the appearance of successfully acquiring the ZONE icon (the appearance of the ZONE icon coming out of a broken balloon) In addition, in FIG. 49(D), with the start of the performance in "Gekinetsu ZONE", a super hot ZONE entry notification effect is executed to notify in advance that entering the super hot ZONE. An example of how this is done is shown below. In addition, in FIGS. 50(A) to 50(C), following the balloon bursting effect described above based on FIG. 49(B), a suggested item display failure effect in which no suggested item appears from the broken balloon is executed. Then, the end effect of the sub-liquid crystal interlocking button continuous press effect showing the character leaving after failing to acquire the suggested item is illustrated.

In this way, in the sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press effect of this embodiment, when the intermittent input promotion image is displayed on the second sub-screen 520, the piston rod of the air pump moves up and down in the same way as the first effect button 35. A repetitive motion effect image representing a specific repetitive motion of "doing" is displayed on the first sub-screen 510 (see FIGS. 48(B) to 48(C)). Therefore, by visually recognizing the repetitive motion effect image, the player can intuitively recognize that intermittent input to the first effect button 35 is being encouraged, and the display of the intermittent input promotion image and , and the display of the repetitive action effect image, it is possible to effectively urge the player to make intermittent inputs to the first effect button 35.

(Variation example regarding sub-LCD linked button press effect)
Regarding the sub-liquid crystal linked button press effect, the following configuration may be adopted.
That is, in the present embodiment, a "repetitive action effect image showing how a predetermined display object performs a specific repetitive action" is replaced by a "repetitive action effect image showing how a predetermined display object performs a specific repetitive action" than a effect image showing how the piston rod of an inflator moves up and down (displayed as a pump effect). The repetitive motion performance image is not particularly limited as long as it is a performance image that shows a predetermined display object performing a specific repetitive motion. It goes without saying that other performance images may be used, such as a performance image showing a character moving up and down by jumping rope, or a performance image showing a character dribbling with a ball.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the pump effect corresponding to the display of the "repetitive motion effect image" (see FIGS. 48(B) to 48(C)) is displayed before the player starts repeatedly hitting the first effect button 35. An example will be explained in which the pump effect is started from the front, but in other embodiments, the pump effect (and air filling effect) is started when the player starts repeatedly hitting the first effect button 35. You can. If such a configuration is adopted, the pump effect will not start unless the player operates the first effect button 35, but the pump effect and the air filling effect will be executed in response to repeated hits of the first effect button 35. Since the performance corresponds to the operation, the player can more effectively feel that the balloon is being filled with air by his or her repeated hits, and it is possible to obtain a high performance effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 48, a case will be explained in which an intermittent input promotion image is displayed on the second sub-screen 520 and a repetitive motion effect image is displayed on the first sub-screen 510. . On the other hand, in other embodiments, both the intermittent input promotion image and the repetitive motion effect image are displayed on the first sub-screen 510, or both the intermittent input promotion image and the repetitive motion effect image are displayed on the second sub-screen 510. A configuration in which the intermittent input promotion image and a repetitive motion effect image are both displayed on the display screen 70 may be adopted.

Further, in this embodiment, a case will be described as an example in which the intermittent input promotion image is composed of a first effect button image and a hand image, but in other embodiments, the intermittent input promotion image is composed of a first effect button image and a hand image. The effect image is made up of only the first effect button image of the hand image, and the intermittent input promotion shows how the first effect button image moves up and down, regardless of the operation of the first effect button 35 by the player. It may also be possible to perform a performance.

[Rotating performance]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54, a rotation effect (an example of a display change effect) executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. Here, FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rotation permission image and the rotation restriction image. FIG. 52 is a screen diagram showing a first specific example of rotation effect. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing process related to rotation effect. FIG. 54 is a screen diagram showing a second specific example of rotation effect.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a large number of performance images such as a background image, a performance pattern, a character image, a text image, a pending icon, and the relevant icon are displayed on the display screen 70, and these performance images are displayed. Under certain circumstances, a rotation effect may be executed in which a part of the effect image is rotated and the rotated state is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, see FIG. 52).

By the way, when a rotation effect is executed to rotate the effect image displayed on the display screen 70, the effect image will be displayed in a different orientation from normal. This increases the variety of display effects using effect images, so it is possible to improve interest without increasing the types of effect images displayed on the display screen 70.

However, among the plurality of effect images displayed on the display screen 70, there are some effect images whose visibility or interest may be reduced by making them the target of rotation effect. It is included. Further, among the plurality of performance images displayed on the display screen 70, there are performance images that may interfere with the game if used as targets for rotation performance.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plurality of effect images displayed on the display screen 70 are classified into "rotation permitted images" and "rotation restriction images", and the effect images classified as "rotation permitted images" are While performing a rotation effect using one or more of the effect images, the effect images classified as "rotation-restricted images" are basically not subject to rotation effects (rotation effects using rotation-restricted images) (prohibiting or restricting the execution of).

Here, the "rotation permitted image" is a performance image that is always permitted to be rotated by rotation performance. A "rotation-restricted image" is a performance image for which rotation by a rotation effect is completely prohibited, or a performance image for which rotation is basically prohibited but rotation is permitted under specific conditions.

As shown in FIG. 51, examples of the "rotation permitted image" include a background image, a production pattern (normal), a character image, and a text image. Here, the background image (an example of a "first effect image") is an effect image that functions as a background for various effect images displayed on the display screen 70, and is normally displayed full screen on the display screen 70. This is a production image (see FIG. 51). FIG. 52(A) exemplifies a state in which the background image 700 is displayed full screen on the display screen 70 in a normal posture. Further, in FIG. 52(B), the background image 700 of FIG. 52(A) is rotated from the normal attitude by a predetermined angle (for example, 5 degrees) clockwise with the depth direction of the display screen 70 as the axis direction. The displayed state is illustrated.

The performance pattern (normal) is a performance image that notifies the judgment result of the special pattern determination, and is a normal size performance pattern displayed in the performance pattern display area 73 (see FIG. 2) (see FIG. 51). In FIG. 52(A), as the production symbols (normal) displayed in the production symbol display area 73, the 5 symbols on the left and the 5 symbols on the right in the normal posture are displayed in a pseudo-stop state, and the middle symbol is hidden. An example of the situation is shown below. This effect pattern (normal) is displayed superimposed on the background image 700, and in FIG. An example of the situation is shown below.

The character image (see FIG. 51) is a performance image that represents a predetermined character, and for example, indicates the jackpot reliability depending on the type of character (for example, see FIG. 28), or a dialogue performance that utters a predetermined line (see FIG. 28). For example, it is an effect image used for example (see FIG. 52(A)). The character image (for example, see FIG. 39(E)) is a performance image representing a predetermined character, and is a performance image that suggests jackpot reliability based on the content and color of the character (see FIG. 51). In FIG. 52(A), a character image in a normal posture and a text image are displayed in the lower right of the display screen 70, showing a character with both legs spread and both hands raised and uttering the line "Chance!" The state is illustrated. These character images and text images are displayed superimposed on the background image 700 in the same way as the production designs (normal), and in FIG. Together with the background image 700, a state in which the normal posture has changed to the rotated posture is illustrated.

Note that FIGS. 52(A) and 52(B) illustrate how both a character image and a text image are displayed at the same time, and a display effect using these character images and text images is performed. However, there are display effects that display only character images among character images and text images (for example, see FIG. 28(A)), and display effects that display only character images among character images and text images (for example, 10(E)) may also be used.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 51, performance images classified as "rotation restriction images" (an example of "second performance images") include operation promotion images, performance patterns (small patterns), reservation number information, decorations, etc. Examples include a close-up image, a decorative effect image, performance customization information, the relevant icon, and a hold icon.

The operation promotion image (see FIG. 51) is an effect image that prompts the player to operate the operating means, and includes a first effect button operation promotion image that urges the player to operate the first effect button 35 (see FIG. 1), Examples include a second performance button operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the second performance button 36 (see FIG. 1), and a control lever operation promotion image that urges the player to operate the control lever 98 (see FIG. 5).

Here, as illustrated in FIG. In this case, the effect image is composed of a character image representing the character "Press!" (characters "Press!") and a validity suggestion image (validity period gauge) indicating the remaining time of the validity period during which operation of the first performance button 35 is valid. It is. The second performance button operation promotion image, as illustrated in FIG. This effect image is composed of a character image representing the character "!") and a validity suggestion image (validity period gauge) indicating the remaining time of the validity period in which the operation of the second performance button 36 is valid. As illustrated in FIG. 14(B), the operation lever operation promotion image includes an arrow image representing the direction in which the operation lever 98 is tilted, and a lever button image imitating the lever button that the operation lever 98 has. This is a produced image composed of

The period during which such an operation promotion image is displayed is set to the valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, and the player can display the image on the display screen 70 in order to generate an operation corresponding effect according to the operation. It is necessary to identify the operating means that is prompted to operate by looking at the operation promotion image displayed, and to operate the operating means within the valid period. Although the validity period varies depending on the content of the operation, in this embodiment, it is a relatively short period of time of about 2 seconds to 5 seconds (for example, 2 seconds for a single press, 5 seconds for a long press or repeated presses). is set to .

Here, on the assumption that the operation promotion image is classified as a "rotation permission image", problems that may occur when a rotation effect is performed using the operation promotion image will be described. For example, if a rotation performance is performed using a manipulation promotion image, the visibility of the manipulation promotion image decreases during the posture change because the manipulation promotion image changes its posture from a normal posture to a rotational posture. There is a possibility that identification of the operating means to be operated by the player may be delayed. When the operation promotion image is in a rotated position, the validity suggestion image (validity period gauge) is displayed diagonally, so players who are not accustomed to seeing the validity period gauge displayed in this rotated position may be confused about the remaining validity period. It can be difficult to keep track of time.

In this way, if a rotation effect using an operation promotion image is performed easily, it becomes difficult for the player to perform the operation even though the player is encouraged to perform the operation, and as a result, the game becomes difficult to perform. There are concerns that problems may arise, such as people feeling uncomfortable. Therefore, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation promotion image is classified as a "rotation restriction image" to encourage the player to operate the operation means at least during the valid period in which the operation of the operation means is valid. Rotation effects using operation promotion images are not executed (prohibited).

Note that a problem may occur when performing a rotation effect using an operation promotion image during the validity period in which the operation of the operation means is valid, and before the start of the validity period, the operation promotion image Even if a rotating effect is performed using some of the effect images that make up the image, it is thought that the possibility of the above problem occurring is low. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, before the validity period during which the operation of the second performance button 36 is valid comes, one of the plurality of performance images that constitute the second performance button operation promotion image, Only the second effect button image (the effect image imitating the second effect button 36) is displayed on the display screen 70, and the second effect button image is displayed while rotating by using the time until the validity period starts. A movement effect display showing movement to the central area of the screen 70 is executed.

If a moving effect display using such a second effect button image is executed before the validity period related to the second effect button 36 starts, the player will not need to operate the second effect button 36 in the near future. It is possible to recognize in advance that the second effect button 36 is about to expire and that the valid period of the second effect button 36 is approaching, and it is possible to operate the second effect button 36 with plenty of time to spare within the valid period.

As is clear from the explanation so far, the moving effect display using the second effect button image has the advantage of making it easy for the player to operate the second effect button 36 within the valid period. , since there is a low possibility that a problem will occur, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment prohibits the rotating effect using the second effect button operation promotion image that is displayed during the valid period, while the second effect button operation promotion image that is displayed before the valid period is prohibited. Execution of a rotating effect (here, the above-mentioned "moving effect display") using the second effect button image is permitted. In this way, the second performance button image constituting the second performance button operation promotion image is sometimes permitted to perform a rotation performance using the second performance button image, and sometimes prohibited. In the button operation promotion image, execution of the rotation effect is temporarily permitted on condition that the operation of the second effect button 36 is before the start of the valid period and only the second effect button image is used. .

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, while a moving effect display using the second effect button image is executed, a moving effect display using a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 35, A movement effect display using an operation lever image imitating the operation lever 98 is not executed. Therefore, the first performance button operation promotion image and the operation lever operation promotion image are always treated as "rotation restriction images" (execution of rotation performance is always prohibited). That is, the rotation effect using the first effect button operation promotion image is not executed (see FIGS. 52(A) and (B)), and the rotation effect using the operation lever operation promotion image is executed. Not at all.

The performance design (small design) is a reduction of the performance design (“performance design (normal)” in FIG. 51) displayed in the performance design display area 73 (see FIG. 2), and is displayed in the upper right display area of the display screen 70. It is displayed in a small size (small pattern display) (see Fig. 51). FIG. 52(A) shows an example of how the center row of symbols is scrolled and displayed as production symbols (small symbols) in a state where a reach is established using the 5 symbols on the left and the 5 symbols on the right. . In the example shown in FIG. 52(A), since the first effect button operation promotion image is displayed in the center area of the display screen 70, the normal size medium symbols in the effect pattern display area 73 are not displayed. However, since the effect symbol (small symbol) is displayed in the upper right display area, the player can confirm that the fluctuating display of the effect symbol (normal) has not ended by viewing the effect symbol (small symbol). ) can be recognized by looking at it.

In addition, the production design (small design) is always displayed in the upper right display area of the display screen 70 when some or all of the three production symbols that make up the production design (normal) are hidden. For example, as shown in FIGS. 44(C) to 44(D), even if all three performance symbols constituting the production symbol (normal) are temporarily hidden, the player It is possible to easily recognize by looking at the effect symbols (small symbols) that the variable display of the effect symbols (normal) continues.

In this way, the performance design (small design) has an important role of accurately informing the display state of the performance design (normal), and if the rotation performance using the performance design (small design) is performed easily, There is a risk that it will not be able to fulfill its original role of accurately informing the display state of the performance symbols (normal). For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the performance symbols (small symbols) are classified as rotation restriction images, and the execution of rotation performance using the performance symbols (small symbols) is prohibited (FIG. 52(A) ) and (B)).

Because the performance symbols (small symbols) classified as such rotation-restricted images are displayed, a major problem may occur even if the production symbols (normal) are rotated or temporarily hidden. There isn't. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the performance symbols (normal) are classified as rotation permitted images, and the execution of the rotation performance using the performance symbols (normal) is permitted. The rotation performance using this performance symbol (normal) is as described above based on FIGS. 52(A) and 52(B).

The reservation number information (see FIG. 51) indicates the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination and the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination in numbers. A state in which pending number information of "20" is displayed in the display area is illustrated. This reservation number information of "20" represents that the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is "2" and that the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination is "0". In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 is hidden during execution of a highly reliable reach such as SPSP reach, but the display in the upper left corner of the display screen 70 Since the information on the number of reservations is always displayed in the area, there is no major problem even if the reservation icon is hidden, and the player can check the number of reservations for the first special symbol judgment by looking at the information on the number of reservations. It is possible to easily recognize the pending number of second special symbol determination.

In this way, the number of reservations information has an important role of accurately informing the number of reservations for special symbol determination. There is a risk that it will not be able to fulfill its original role of informing the public. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the number of reservations information is classified as a rotation restriction image, and the execution of a rotation effect using the number of reservations information is prohibited (see FIGS. 52(A) and 52(B)). ).

The decorative close-up image (see FIG. 51) is a representation of a shape corresponding to the movable decorative member 14 (and decorative member 13), which is displayed at a position close to the movable decorative member 14 (and decorative member 13) on the display screen 70. It is an image. In FIG. 54(A), in the upper display area of the display screen 70, along the lower end of the decorative member 13 and the lower end of the movable decorative member 14 placed at the initial position (storage position), A state in which a strip-shaped decorative close-up image 141 extending in a meandering manner in the horizontal direction is displayed is illustrated. This decorative close-up image 141 has a function of enhancing the production effect of the decorative member 13 and the movable decorative member 14, and FIG. Although not shown in the figure, when the board lamp 5 built into the decorative member 13 emits light, a decoration of the same color as the board lamp 5 is shown. A close-up image 141 may be displayed.

In this way, the decorative close-up image 141 has the function of enhancing the effect of the presentation by the decorative member 13 and the movable decorative member 14, but if the rotating effect using the decorative close-up image 141 is easily performed, the decoration The close-up image 141 becomes a performance image that does not follow the lower end of the decorative member 13 and the lower end of the movable decorative member 14, which actually reduces the performance effect. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative close-up image 141 is classified as a rotation-restricted image, and execution of a rotation effect using the decorative close-up image 141 is prohibited (FIGS. 54A and 54B). )reference).

The decorative effect image (see FIG. 51) is an effect image that is displayed in a position close to the decorative member 13 and enhances the effect of the decorative member 13. Although not shown in the figure, this decorative effect image has something in common with the decorative close-up image 141 in that it is a presentation image that enhances the presentation effect of the decorative member 13. On the other hand, while the decorative close-up image 141 is a production image shaped along the lower end of the decorative member 13 and the lower end of the movable decorative member 14, the decorative effect image is It differs from the decorative close-up image 141 in that it is an effect image representing a display object whose shape is unrelated to the shape of the decorative close-up image 141 . Furthermore, the decorative close-up image 141 is displayed when there is a possibility that the movable decorative member 14 will operate, whereas the decorative effect image is displayed when there is no possibility that the movable decorative member 14 will operate. This is different from the decorative close-up image 141 in this respect.

The decorative member 13 has the above-mentioned board lamp 5 built-in, and this board lamp 5 emits blue light when the jackpot reliability is relatively low, and emits green light when the jackpot reliability is slightly high. It emits light, and if the jackpot reliability is relatively high, it emits red light. In this way, while the board lamp 5 built into the decorative member 13 emits light in a color that indicates jackpot reliability, the display screen 70 displays a decorative effect image of the same color as the luminescent color of the board lamp 5. be done. Specifically, as the board lamp 5 built into the decorative member 13 emits blue light, a blue decorative effect image is displayed in the upper area of the display screen 70, and the board lamp 5 built into the decorative member 13 emits green light. As this occurs, a green decorative effect image is displayed in the upper area of the display screen 70, and as the panel lamp 5 built into the decorative member 13 emits red light, a red decorative effect image is displayed in the upper area of the display screen 70. is displayed.

In this way, as the decorative effect image displayed in the upper area of the display screen 70, an effect image having the same color as the light emission color of the board lamp 5 built into the decorative member 13 is displayed, so that the light from the decorative member 13 is reflected on the display screen. It is possible to give the player the impression that the number of players is as high as 70, and it is possible to obtain a high performance effect.

As described above, the decorative effect image has the function of enhancing the effect of the presentation by the decorative member 13, but if the rotation effect using the decorative effect image is performed carelessly, the decorative effect image may not be in its original position. Since they will be displayed in different positions, this will actually reduce the production effect. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, decorative effect images are classified as rotation-restricted images, and execution of rotation effects using decorative effect images is prohibited (see FIG. 51).

The performance customization information (see FIG. 51) is information indicating the current setting status regarding the performance customization function that allows the player to arbitrarily select settings regarding the performance in the gaming machine 1. An example of this effect customization function is an auto button function. This auto button function means that even if the player does not operate the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the first performance button 35, the performance corresponding to the operation is automatically performed in the same way as if the operation had been performed. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the auto button function is turned on by the player pressing and holding the first effect button 35 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) when it is not the valid period. ”, and if the player operates the first effect button 35 even once while the auto button function is “ON”, the auto button function is turned “OFF”. In FIG. 54(A), effect customization information representing the words "AUTO BUTTON ON" is displayed in the lower right area of the display screen 70 in order to notify that such an auto button function is set to "ON". A state in which the image is displayed in a small size is illustrated.

Since the effect customization information displayed in the lower right area of the display screen 70 informs the player of the current settings regarding effect customization, even if such effect customization information is rotated, the interest will be reduced. It is hard to imagine that it will improve. Furthermore, since the effect customization information is displayed in a small size at the edge of the display screen 70 (in the present embodiment, the lower right corner of the display screen 70), the effect customization information is displayed along with the background image 700, etc. If it is rotated in the clockwise direction, part or all of the performance customization information will be outside the display screen 70, and there is a concern that the player will not be able to confirm the current settings regarding performance customization.

For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, performance customization information is classified into rotation restriction images (see FIG. 51), and execution of a rotation performance using the performance customization information is prohibited (see FIG. 51).

The icon is a performance image that indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the pending icon is a performance image that indicates that the special symbol determination is on hold. In FIG. 52(A), a special icon is displayed in the icon display area 72, and two pending icons (suggesting that the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved) are displayed in the pending icon display area 71. The example shows a state where is displayed.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an icon change effect that displays the pending icon (or the icon) in a display mode different from normal may be executed, and the pending icon display area 71 or When a special icon is displayed in the icon display area 72, a light emission effect may be performed in which the first starting port lamp 215 (see FIG. 2) emits light in the same color as the special icon. In this way, there is a close relationship between the icon change effect and the light emitting effect, and the pending icon (or the icon) to be read in advance used in the icon change effect is displayed at a position corresponding to the first starting port lamp 215. A high performance effect can be obtained by the synergistic effect of the special icon displayed by the icon change performance and the first starting port lamp 215 that emits light by the light emission performance.

The special icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (or the icon display area 72) has the characteristic that it is displayed as an effect image of the same color as the emission color of the first starting port lamp 215. If the rotation effect used is carried out too easily, the display position of the special icon will change regardless of the shift process for the special icon, so there is a concern that the above-mentioned effect will not be sufficiently obtained. Furthermore, since the hold icon and the relevant icon are displayed at the lower end of the display screen 70, depending on the rotation angle when rotating the rotation-permitted image, the hold icon and the relevant icon may move out of the display screen 70. As a result, there is a concern that the first starting port lamp 215 may not be able to sufficiently produce the effect of emitting light in the same color as the special icon.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the icon and the pending icon are classified as "rotation restricted images", and basically, rotation performance using these icons is prohibited.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, the number of reservations information is always displayed in the upper left display area of the display screen 70, and in the upper right display area of the display screen 70, A production pattern (small pattern) is displayed. For this reason, even if the icon or the pending icon is classified as a "rotation permitted image" and a rotation effect using these icons is permitted, there is a low possibility that a major hindrance will occur in the progress of the game. For this reason, in other embodiments, the icons and pending icons may be classified as "rotation-permitted images" and execution of a rotation effect using these icons may be permitted.

(First specific example of rotating performance)
Next, a first specific example of rotation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 52. The background image 700 described above (see FIG. 52(A)) functions as a background for various effect images displayed on the display screen 70, and various effect images are displayed superimposed on this background image 700. . FIG. 52(A) shows a production pattern (normal), a character image, a text image, an operation promotion image related to the first production button 35, a production pattern (small pattern), pending number information, and the icon. , and the hold icon are displayed in their respective normal postures in a superimposed manner on a background image 700 also in the normal posture.

Among these effect images superimposed on the background image 700, those classified as "rotation permitted images" are effect designs (normal), character images, and text images. Therefore, when the rotation effect is executed, the background image 700, the effect design (normal), the character image, and the text image are integrated, and the depth of the display screen 70 is expanded at the center of the display screen 70. Display control is performed for various effect images so that they appear to be rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 10 degrees) clockwise around a rotation axis (not shown) extending in the direction (see FIGS. 52(A) and 52(B)). ).

Note that among the performance images superimposed on the background image 700, the operation promotion image, the performance pattern (small design), the number of reservations information, the relevant icon, and the reservation icon are all classified as "rotation restriction images". Basically, rotation effects using these effect images are not executed. In FIGS. 52(A) and (B), the display positions and postures of various effect images classified as "rotation-permitted images" are changing, while various effects classified as "rotation-restricted images" are shown. The example shows how the display position and posture of the image are maintained.

(About production control regarding rotation production)
Next, the effect control for realizing the rotating effect will be explained.
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the first special symbol determination is executed by the main CPU 81, a fluctuation start command including the determination result etc. is transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 of the sub control board 90 analyzes the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, and based on the analysis result, the fluctuation performance pattern of the fluctuation performance accompanying the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. is set, and performance patterns of various preview performances to be executed when the performance symbols are variably displayed in the set variable performance pattern are set. Then, the sub CPU 91 sends a variable performance start command to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) to instruct the start of a variable performance in the set variable performance pattern and the execution of a preview performance in the set preview performance pattern. Send to.

In response to this, the image and sound control CPU 101 of the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp CPU 121 of the lamp control board 120 execute processing based on the variable effect start command from the sub control board 90. The variable performance and preview performance of the performance pattern set in are realized.

When executing processing based on such a fluctuation start command from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the above-described rotation effect by, for example, executing a lottery using effect random numbers. do. When it is determined to perform a rotation performance, for example, one timing is selected from among a plurality of timings at which the rotation performance can be executed by a performance lottery, and one or more performances to be rotated by the rotation performance are selected. Select an image. The effect images that can be selected here are basically "rotation-permitted images," but as mentioned above, some "rotation-restricted images" are conditionally permitted to perform rotation effects. Yes, and a "rotation restriction image" may be selected as the effect image used for the rotation effect.

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 shows the image types of effect images classified as "rotation permitted images" and the image types of effect images classified as "rotation restricted images." Information is stored. After determining the execution timing of the rotating performance, the sub CPU 91 determines the execution timing of the rotating performance (the start of the rotating performance) based on the setting information indicating the performance pattern of the variable performance and the setting information indicating the performance pattern of the preview performance. The effect image to be displayed on the display screen 70 at the timing) is specified. Then, with reference to information stored in the sub-ROM 92, one or more rotation-permitted images are selected from among the specified effect images. At this time, even if the effect image is classified as a rotation-restricted image, the rotation-restricted image may be selected as a rotation-permitted image if it satisfies the conditions for performing the rotation effect.

In this way, when one or more rotation-permitted images are selected, the sub CPU 91 provides information indicating the type of the selected rotation-permitted image, information indicating the execution timing of the rotation effect, and rotation information when rotating the rotation-permitted image. The information indicating the corner is set in the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the rotation effect, and the variable effect start command including the setting information for the rotation effect is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120).

In contrast, the image and sound control CPU 101 of the image and sound control board 100 controls the drawing process by the VDP 104 based on the setting information of the rotation effect included in the variable effect start command received from the sub control board 90. As a result, the above-mentioned rotation effect is realized.

As described above with reference to FIG. 5, the VRAM 106 includes a display list storage area, a development storage area, a frame buffer, and the like. For example, the VDP 104 (see FIG. 5) executes the following drawing process on a frame-by-frame basis in order to realize the effect display in the pre-rotation state described above based on FIG. 52(A). That is, as illustrated in FIG. 53(A), the VDP 104 reads out the first rotation permitted image, the second rotation permitted image, the first rotation restricted image, and the second rotation restricted image from the CGROM 105. The expanded image data is expanded and stored in the expanded storage area. Based on the display list stored in the display list storage area, the VDP 104 uses the Z-buffer method or the like to perform processing to draw a composite image in the frame buffer by combining the plurality of images stored in the expansion storage area. Further, the VDP 104 generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the composite image stored in the frame buffer, and outputs the generated RGB signal to the image display device 7.

Note that, as illustrated in FIG. 53(A), the second rotation permission image, the first rotation restriction image, and the second rotation restriction image are all superimposed and displayed on the first rotation permission image indicating the background image 700. It is something that Here, the second rotation permission image shows a production pattern (normal), a character image, and a text image. The first rotation restriction image shows the icon or the pending icon. The second rotation restriction image shows an operation promotion image, a production pattern (small pattern), and pending number information.

By the way, the display list output from the image and sound control CPU 101 and stored in the display list storage area includes information indicating the rotation angle of the image to be drawn. In a state where the rotation effect is not being executed, a display list including information indicating that the rotation angle of all images to be drawn is "0 degree" is stored in the display list storage area. Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 52(A), a plurality of effect images are displayed on the display screen 70 in a state where none of them are tilted.

On the other hand, when starting the rotation effect, information indicating that the final rotation angle is to be "10 degrees" for the first rotation permission image and the second rotation permission image illustrated in FIG. 53(A) is sent. The containing display list is stored in a display list storage area. As a result, the rotation permitted images (first rotation permitted image and second rotation permitted image) displayed on the display screen 70 gradually rotate clockwise with the depth direction of the display screen 70 at the center of the display screen 70 as the rotation axis. The screen is rotated 10 degrees clockwise and finally displayed in a state rotated 10 degrees clockwise (see FIG. 52(B)). Note that for the rotation limited images (the first rotation limited image and the second rotation limited image), a display list containing information indicating that the rotation angle is to be maintained at "0 degrees" is stored in the display list storage area. , Basically, rotation-limited images are never rotated.

FIG. 53(B) is a schematic diagram for explaining the drawing process executed by the VDP 104 to realize the effect display illustrated in FIG. 52(B). The VDP 104 compositely draws a plurality of images stored in the expansion storage area on the frame buffer based on the display list stored in the display list storage area, but the first rotation permitted image and the second rotation permitted image are Rotate the image clockwise by 10 degrees and perform drawing processing.

(Second specific example of rotating performance)
Next, a second specific example of rotation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 54. In FIG. 54(A), the performance design (normal), the performance design (small design), the pending number information, the decorative proximity image 141, the performance customization information, the relevant icon, and the pending icon are shown. A state in which the image is displayed in a normal posture and superimposed on a background image 700 also in the normal posture is illustrated.

Among these performance images superimposed on the background image 700, only the performance symbols (normal) are classified as "rotation permitted images." For this reason, when the rotation effect is executed, the background image 700 and the effect pattern (normal) are integrated into a rotation axis (not shown) extending in the depth direction of the display screen 70 at the center of the display screen 70. The display control of various effect images is executed so that they appear to be rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 10 degrees) (see FIGS. 54(A) and 54(B)).

Note that among the performance images superimposed on the background image 700, the performance design (small design), pending number information, decorative proximity image 141, performance customization information, the relevant icon, and the pending icon are all "rotation restriction images". Basically, rotation effects using these effect images are not executed. In FIGS. 54(A) and (B), the display positions and postures of various effect images classified as "rotation-permitted images" are changing, while various effects classified as "rotation-restricted images" are shown. The example shows how the display position and posture of the image are maintained.

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can display the rotation restriction image (an example of a "second effect image") superimposed on the background image 700 (an example of a "first effect image"). Yes, a rotation effect that rotates the background image 700 etc. so that the background image 700 (and other effect images classified as "rotation permitted images") changes from the normal attitude (first attitude) to the rotated attitude (second attitude). However, rotation of the rotation-limited image is restricted. For this reason, by restricting (or prohibiting) the rotation of rotation-restricted images, it is possible to prevent interference with games and performances, and to rotate rotation-permitted images such as the background image 700, thereby increasing the entertainment level. It is possible to realize the performance.

(Variation example regarding rotation performance)
Regarding the rotation performance, the following configuration may be adopted.
That is, in the present embodiment, as an example of a display change effect that changes the display of the rotation-permitted image so that the rotation-permitted image changes from the first orientation to the second orientation, rotation is performed with the depth direction of the display screen 70 as the axial direction. An example will be explained in which a rotation effect is executed in which the permitted image is rotated clockwise and the rotated orientation is maintained. On the other hand, in other embodiments, as a display change effect, a rotation effect is executed in which the rotation-permitted image is rotated counterclockwise with the depth direction of the display screen 70 as an axis direction, and the rotated attitude is maintained. configuration may be adopted.

Further, the axial direction when rotating the rotation-permitted image is not limited to the depth direction of the display screen 70. For example, the rotation-permitted image may be rotated by a predetermined angle with the vertical direction of the display screen 70 as the axis direction. A configuration may be adopted in which a rotation effect is performed to maintain the posture. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation-permitted image is rotated by a predetermined angle with the left-right direction (width direction) of the display screen 70 as the axis direction, and a rotation effect is executed in which the rotated posture is maintained.

Further, in this embodiment, a case where the rotation angle of the rotation permission image is 10 degrees will be described as an example, but the rotation angle of the rotation permission image is not limited to 10 degrees, and may be an angle of less than 10 degrees, It goes without saying that the angle may be greater than 10 degrees.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example will be explained in which the rotation effect is an effect in which the rotation permission image maintains the rotation posture for a predetermined period of time after the rotation permission image becomes the rotation posture (second posture). In other embodiments, a rotation effect may be performed in which the rotation-permitted image is rotated for a predetermined period of time without being held still, or the rotation effect may be an effect in which the rotation-permitted image is rotated. In this way, various rotation effects using rotation-permitted images can be considered as display change effects, but display change effects change the orientation of the display object represented by a predetermined effect image before and after the effect occurs. For example, the shape of a display object (or It goes without saying that a performance different from a rotation performance, such as a performance that changes the shape and size, may also be used.

Hereinafter, the RAM configuration of each control board for realizing the game control and performance control described based on the drawings up to FIG. 54, and the processing performed by each control board will be described.

[Example of configuration of main RAM 83]
FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining storage areas of the main RAM 83 and information stored in each storage area. As illustrated in FIG. 55(A), the main RAM 83 includes a judgment storage area 830, a special memory area 830, etc. as a storage area for storing acquired information etc. acquired when a game ball wins in the first starting port 21. FIG. 1: A first reservation storage area 831, a special figure 1 and second reservation storage area 832, a special figure 1 and third reservation storage area 833, and a special figure 1 and fourth reservation storage area 834 are provided. In addition, the main RAM 83 has the above-mentioned judgment storage area 830, special figure 2/first reservation storage area 835 as a storage area for storing acquired information etc. acquired when a game ball wins in the second starting port 22. , a special figure 2/second reservation storage area 836, a special figure 2/third reservation storage area 837, and a special figure 2/fourth reservation storage area 838 are provided.

The determination storage area 830 is a storage area in which various information used for special symbol determination is stored when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to the special figure 1/4th reservation storage area 834 are storage areas in which various information related to the first special symbol determination are stored, and the special figure 2/first reservation storage area 835 to special figure 2/4th reservation storage area 838 is a storage area in which various information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. When both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are pending, the second special symbol determination is prioritized over the first special symbol determination. Therefore, in the determination storage area 830, when the second special symbol determination is suspended, when executing the reserved special symbol determination, if the second special symbol determination is suspended, the information is stored in the special symbol 2/first reservation storage area 835. Various information is shifted, and when only the first special symbol determination is pending, various information stored in the special symbol 1/first pending storage area 831 is shifted.

As illustrated in FIG. 55(B), the reservation storage areas 831 to 838 are areas for storing information for reserving the right to judge special symbols, and each of the reservation storage areas 831 to 838 is an area for storing information for reserving the right to judge a special symbol, and each of the reservation storage areas 831 to 838 is an area for storing information for reserving the right to judge a special symbol. It includes an area for storing , an area for storing symbol random numbers, an area for storing reach random numbers, an area for storing fluctuating pattern random numbers, an area for storing preliminary determination information which is information indicating the preliminary determination results, etc.

Here, the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number are as described above. The preliminary determination information is information obtained by the special 2 preliminary determination process (see FIG. 58) or the special 1 preliminary determination process (see FIG. 59), which will be described later, based on the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number. be. The advance determination information is as described above based on FIG. Stored within the area.

In the gaming machine 1, each time a game ball enters the first starting port 21, the five pieces of information explained based on FIG. - Stored in any of the first reserved storage area 831 to special figure 1/fourth reserved storage area 834. In addition, each time a game ball enters the second starting port 22, the above five pieces of information are stored in order from the special figure 2 first reservation storage area 835 to the special figure 2 first reservation storage area 835 to the special figure 2. It is stored in any of the fourth reserved storage areas 838.

For example, in a state where information is stored in the determination storage area 830 and information is not stored in any of the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to the special figure 1/4th reservation storage area 834, the first When a game ball wins in the starting hole 21, five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination newly acquired according to the winning are stored in the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831. Further, for example, when five pieces of information are stored in each of the judgment storage area 830, the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831, and the special figure 1/second reservation storage area 832, the first starting port 21 is stored. When the game ball wins, five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination newly acquired in accordance with the prize are stored in the special symbol 1/3rd reservation storage area 833.

In addition, when the information stored in the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 is shifted to the judgment storage area 830 when executing the first special symbol determination, the information stored in the special figure 1/second reservation storage area 832 and subsequent The information stored in the reserved storage area related to the first special symbol determination is shifted to the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 side. For example, while information is stored in each of the special figure 1/first pending storage area 831 to special figure 1/3rd pending storage area 833, the information stored in the special figure 1/first pending storage area 831 is When shifted to the judgment storage area 830, the information stored in the special figure 1/second reservation storage area 832 is shifted to the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831, and the information stored in the special figure 1/second reservation storage area 831 is The information stored in the area 833 is shifted to the special figure 1/second reservation storage area 832.

Such information shift processing is similarly performed in the special figure 2/first reservation storage area 835 to special figure 2/4th reservation storage area 838 where information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are pending, that is, the special symbol 1/first pending storage area 831 and the special symbol 2/first pending storage area If information is stored in both of the storage areas 835, prior to the shift process targeting the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to the special figure 1/4th reservation storage area 834, the special figure 2/first reservation storage area 834 is stored. Shift processing targeting the 1st reservation storage area 835 to the special figure 2/4th reservation storage area 838 is performed with priority.

By the way, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 or the second starting hole 22 and various random numbers are obtained during the special symbol fluctuation display or jackpot game, the special symbol judgment and special symbol fluctuation display cannot be performed. It cannot be done immediately. For this reason, when various random numbers are acquired under such circumstances, the main CPU 81 stores the acquired various random numbers etc. in the reservation storage area 831 as information that reserves the right to judge special symbols, as described above. -838. On the other hand, if the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol determination is not pending, and the jackpot game is not in progress, the main CPU 81 generates various random numbers etc. obtained in response to the start-up win. It is directly stored in the determination storage area 830.

[Interrupt processing by main control board 80]
Next, interrupt processing executed in the main control board 80 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. Here, FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing executed in the main control board 80. The main control board 80 repeatedly executes the series of processes illustrated in FIG. 56 at fixed time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation, excluding special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. . Note that the processing of the main control board 80 described based on the flowcharts from FIG. 56 onwards is performed according to instructions issued by the main CPU 81 based on a program stored in the main ROM 82.

First, the main CPU 81 executes a random number update process to update various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, a fluctuation pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1). The jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation pattern random number, and the normal symbol random number are incremented by "1" each time the process of step S1 is performed. Note that a loop counter is used as a counter for processing step S1, and after each random number reaches a preset maximum value, it is returned to "0" and updated.

Following the process in step S1, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers in response to input of detection signals from the first starting port sensor 211, the second starting port sensor 221, and the gate sensor 251. Sensor detection processing including processing is executed (step S2). This sensor detection process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 57.

Following the process of step S2, the main CPU 81 executes special symbol determination, causes the first special symbol display 41 or second special symbol display 42 to variably display the special symbol, and then displays the result of the special symbol determination. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying a special symbol indicating , etc. is executed (step S3). This special symbol processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 60.

Following the process in step S3, the main CPU 81 executes normal symbol determination, including processing to cause the normal symbol display 43 to variably display the regular symbol, and then stop and display the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4).

Following the processing in step S4, the main CPU 81 controls the second starting port solenoid 222 that operates the opening/closing member 23 when it is determined that the second starting port 22 is to be opened as a result of normal symbol determination. A second starting port opening/closing control process for opening and closing the second starting port 22 is executed (step S5).

Following the process of step S5, the main CPU 81 determines that it is a "jackpot" in the jackpot determination process executed in the special symbol process of step S3. A big winning opening opening/closing control process is executed to open and close the first big winning opening 26 (or the second big winning opening 28) by controlling the mouth solenoid 282) (step S6). This big winning opening opening/closing control process will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 64 to 66.

Following the process of step S6, the main CPU 81 executes a prize ball process to control the payout of prize balls according to winning of game balls (step S7).

Following the processing in step S7, the main CPU 81 transmits to the sub-control board 90 information necessary for determining the various commands and performance contents set (stored) in the main RAM 83 in the processing steps before step S7. Processing is executed (step S8).

[Sensor detection processing by main control board 80]
FIG. 57 is a detailed flowchart of the sensor detection process in step S2 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 57, following the random number update process in step S1, the main CPU 81 determines whether the gate sensor 251 detects whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 25 based on whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate sensor 251. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (step S201). Here, if it is determined that the gate sensor 251 has detected the passing of the game ball to the gate 25 (step S201: YES), the pending number F of normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is set to the preset normal It is determined whether the maximum number of reservations for symbol determination is less than Fmax ("4" in this embodiment) (step S202).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the number of reservations F is less than "4" (step S202: YES), the main CPU 81 updates the number of reservations F to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S203), and the random number update process of step S1 is performed. Regarding the normal symbol random number that is updated every time the game is played, the value of the timing at which the passage of the game ball to the gate 25 is detected is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S204).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S204 and determines that the gate sensor 251 has not detected the passing of the game ball to the gate 25 (step S201: NO), the number of reservations F is less than "4". If it is determined that it is not (step S202: NO), the second starting port sensor 221 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22 based on the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 221. It is determined whether or not (step S206). Here, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 221 has detected the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22 (step S206: YES), the number of pending second special symbol determinations stored in the main RAM 83 T2 It is determined whether or not is less than the preset maximum pending number T2max (“4” in this embodiment) of the second special symbol determination (step S207).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the number of reservations T2 is less than "4" (step S207: YES), the main CPU 81 updates the number of reservations T2 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S208), and the random number update process of step S1 is performed. Regarding the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variable pattern random number that are updated every time the game is played, the values of the timing at which winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 22 is detected are respectively obtained (step S209).

In this way, in response to the establishment of the acquisition condition that winning of a game ball to the second starting port 22 is detected in a state where the number of reservations T2 is less than the maximum number of reservations T2max, various random numbers related to the second special symbol determination are be obtained. In addition, if various random numbers are obtained in a situation where the second special symbol determination and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830 and cannot be executed immediately. When various random numbers are obtained depending on the situation, these random numbers are stored in any one of the special figure 2 first reservation storage area 835 to the special figure 2 fourth reservation storage area 838.

Following the process of step S209, the main CPU 81 executes a preliminary determination process (special 2 preliminary determination process) regarding suspension of the second special symbol determination (step S210). In addition, if a game ball enters the second starting port 22 when the number of pending special symbols T2 in the second special symbol determination is "0" and the game ball is not in the middle of a jackpot game or while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, The obtained various random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830, and the second special symbol determination based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, since the second special symbol determination is not suspended, the special 2 preliminary determination process related to the second special symbol determination is not performed. Such special 2 preliminary determination processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 58.

Following the process of step S210, the main CPU 81 sets a hold command related to the second special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S212). This suspension command is a command that notifies that the second special symbol determination is suspended, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. Note that if the process of step S212 is performed without performing the special 2 preliminary determination process of step S210, a suspended command that does not include preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub control board 90. On the other hand, if the process of step S212 is performed after the special 2 preliminary determination process of step S210 is performed, the pending command containing the preliminary determination information stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 83 is It will be transmitted to the sub control board 90.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S212 and determines that the second starting port sensor 221 has not detected the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22 (step S206: NO), the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S212. When it is determined that the pending number T2 of the special symbol determination is not less than "4" (step S207: NO), the first starting port sensor 211 is activated based on the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 211. It is determined whether or not winning of the game ball to the first starting port 21 is detected (step S214). Here, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 211 has detected the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 21 (step S214: YES), the number of reservations T1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is less than the preset maximum pending number T1max (“4” in this embodiment) of the first special symbol determination (step S215).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the number of reservations T1 is less than "4" (step S215: YES), the main CPU 81 updates the number of reservations T1 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S216), and the random number update process of step S1 is performed. Regarding the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variable pattern random number that are updated every time the game is played, the value of the timing at which winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 21 is detected is obtained (step S217).

In this way, in response to the establishment of the acquisition condition that winning of a game ball to the first starting port 21 is detected in a state where the number of reservations T1 is less than the maximum number of reservations T1max, various random numbers related to the first special symbol determination are be obtained. In addition, if various random numbers are obtained in a situation where the first special symbol determination and the variable display of the first special symbol can be executed immediately, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830 and cannot be executed immediately. When various random numbers are obtained depending on the situation, these random numbers are stored in any of the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to special figure 1/4th reservation storage area 834.

Following the process of step S217, the main CPU 81 executes a special 1 preliminary determination process related to suspension of the first special symbol determination (step S218). In addition, if a game ball enters the first starting port 21 when the number of pending special symbols T1 in the first special symbol determination is "0" and the game ball is not in a jackpot game or while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, The obtained various random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830, and the first special symbol determination based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, since the first special symbol determination is not suspended, the special 1 preliminary determination process related to the first special symbol determination is not performed. Such special 1 preliminary determination processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 59.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S218, it sets a pending command related to the first special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S220). This suspension command is a command to notify that the first special symbol determination has been suspended, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. Note that if the process of step S220 is performed without performing the special 1 preliminary determination process of step S218, a suspended command that does not include preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, if the process of step S220 is performed after the special 1 preliminary determination process of step S218 is performed, the pending command containing the preliminary determination information stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 83 is It is transmitted to the sub control board 90.

[Special 2 preliminary determination processing by main control board 80]
The Special 2 preliminary determination process executed by the main control board 80 will be described below with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 58 is a detailed flowchart of the Special 2 preliminary determination process in step S210 of FIG.

Following the process of step S209 in FIG. 57, the main CPU 81 stores winning starting opening information (here, information indicating the second starting opening 22) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S2100). Next, it is determined whether the current state is a high probability state based on information indicating the gaming state stored in the main RAM 83 (step S2101). Here, if it is determined that the current state is a high probability state (step S2101: YES), that is, if the current gaming state is a "probability variable gaming state", the jackpot random number for high probability/Special 2 prior determination The table is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2102). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current state is not a high probability state (step S2101: NO), that is, if the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "time-saving gaming state", the low probability state/special 2 The preliminary determination jackpot random number table is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2103).

In the jackpot random number table for high probability/special 2 preliminary determination, as described above based on the column of "high probability state" in FIG. Numerical values are stored, random numbers from "4" to "13" are stored as "temporary winning random numbers", and random numbers from "14" to "839" are stored as "determined loss random numbers". On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 2 preliminary determination, as described above based on the column of "low probability state" in FIG. A random number of ``4'' to ``13'' is stored as a ``temporary loss random number,'' and a random value of ``14'' to ``839'' is stored as a ``confirmed loss random number.''

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S2102 or when the process of step S2103 is executed, the main CPU 81 executes the jackpot random number type identification process (step S2104). This jackpot random number type specifying process is a process for specifying the type of jackpot random number acquired by the process of step S209 in FIG. 57.

When the main CPU 81 sets the jackpot random number table for high probability/Special 2 preliminary determination through the process of step S2102, the acquired jackpot random number is determined by the value specified by the jackpot random number table for high probability/special 2 preliminary determination. The type of the obtained jackpot random number is specified based on which random number among the "confirmed winning random number", "provisional winning random number", and "confirmed loss random number" matches. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 19(A), in the high-probability/Special 2 preliminary determination jackpot random number table, random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored as "confirmed hit random numbers" as described above. , "4" to "13" are stored as "temporary winning random numbers", and "14" to "839" are stored as "determined loss random numbers". The main CPU 81 compares the obtained jackpot random number with the random number in the jackpot random number table for high probability/Special 2 preliminary determination, and uses the jackpot random number type information corresponding to the matched random number as the high probability/Special 2 preliminary determination. The type of jackpot is identified by reading it from the jackpot random number table. For example, if the acquired jackpot random number is "3", the type of the jackpot random number is specified as a "win confirmed random number". Further, for example, if the acquired jackpot random number is "215", the type of the jackpot random number is specified as a "determined loss random number".

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 sets the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 2 preliminary determination by the process of step S2103, the acquired jackpot random number is specified by the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 2 preliminary determination. The type of the obtained jackpot random number is specified based on which of the "confirmed hit random number", "temporary loss random number", and "confirmed loss random number" it matches. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 19(A), in the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 2 preliminary determination, random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored as "confirmed hit random numbers", and "4" The random numbers from "13" to "13" are stored as "tentative loss random numbers", and the random numbers from "14" to "839" are stored as "confirmed loss random numbers". The main CPU 81 compares the obtained jackpot random number with the random number in the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 2 preliminary determination, and uses the jackpot random number type information corresponding to the matched random number as the low probability/Special 2 preliminary determination. The type of jackpot is identified by reading it from the jackpot random number table. For example, if the acquired jackpot random number is "5", the type of the jackpot random number is specified as a "temporary loss random number". Further, for example, if the acquired jackpot random number is "835", the type of the jackpot random number is specified as a "determined loss random number".

Following the process of step S2104, the main CPU 81 stores the jackpot preliminary determination information in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S2105). As is clear from the notation in FIG. 19(A), if the jackpot random number type identified by the process in step S2104 is a "confirmed hit random number", it is considered a "jackpot" in both the low probability state and the high probability state. "Win confirmation information" indicating that the jackpot will be won is stored as jackpot advance determination information. In addition, if the jackpot random number type identified in the process of step S2104 is a "loss confirmed random number", "loss confirmed information" indicating that the jackpot will be a "loss" in both the low probability state and the high probability state is sent to the jackpot. Stored as advance judgment information. In addition, if the jackpot random number type identified in the process of step S2104 is a "temporary loss random number", if it is pending and extinguished in a low probability state, it will be a "lose"; ``Temporary loss information'' indicating that it will be a ``jackpot'' if the winning occurs is stored as jackpot preliminary determination information. In addition, if the jackpot random number type identified in the process of step S2104 is a "temporary hit random number", it will be a "jackpot" if it is suspended while remaining in a high probability state, but it will be a "jackpot" if it is suspended after shifting to a low probability state. If it does, "temporary hit information" indicating that it will be a "lose" is stored as jackpot preliminary determination information.

Subsequently, the main CPU 81 determines whether the jackpot preliminary determination information stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 through the process of step S2105 is "loss confirmation information" (step S2106). Here, if it is determined that the stored jackpot preliminary determination information is not "confirmed loss information" (step S2106: NO), that is, the stored jackpot preliminary determination information is "confirmed win information", "provisional loss information", or If it is "temporary win information", it is certain that it will be a jackpot, or there is a possibility that it will be a jackpot, so the following process is performed to specify the type of jackpot.

That is, if the main CPU 81 determines that the stored jackpot preliminary determination information is not "loss confirmation information" (step S2106: NO), the main CPU 81 uses the second starting opening winning symbol determination table (see FIG. 6(C)) as the main CPU. It is read from the ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2107), and jackpot type identification processing is executed (step S2108).

In the second starting opening winning symbol determination table (see Figure 6(C)), 80 random numbers are associated with "10R probability variation" and 10 random numbers are associated with "3R probability variation". 10 random numbers are associated with "3R normal". On the other hand, in step S2108, the main CPU 81 selects the jackpot type (jackpot type) corresponding to the random number value that matches the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot random number type identification process in step S2104. The type of jackpot to be selected when it is determined to be a jackpot is specified by reading from the 2-start opening winning symbol determination table. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 6(C), the jackpot type specified by the process of step S2108 is "10R probability variation", "3R probability variation", or "3R normal".

Next, the main CPU 81 stores information indicating the jackpot type identified by the process of step S2108 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 as jackpot type preliminary determination information (step S2109).

Subsequently, the main CPU 81 determines whether the jackpot preliminary determination information stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 through the process of step S2105 is "provisional loss information" (step S2110). Here, if it is determined that the stored jackpot preliminary determination information is not "provisional loss information" (step S2110: NO), that is, the stored jackpot preliminary determination information is "confirmed hit information" or "provisional win information". In this case, for example, it is determined whether the current state is a high base state based on information indicating the gaming state stored in the main RAM 83 (step S2111).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is the high base state (step S2111: YES), that is, when it is the probability variable gaming state or the time saving gaming state, the main CPU 81 selects the special 2 jackpot variation pattern selection table in the high base state. It is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2112). Conversely, if it is determined that the current state is not the high base state (step S2111: NO), that is, if it is the normal gaming state, the variable pattern selection table for special 2 jackpots in the low base state is read out from the main ROM 82. It is set in the main RAM 83 (step S2113).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot preliminary determination information stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 83 through the process of step S2105 is "loss confirmation information" (step S2106: YES), or the stored jackpot preliminary determination information If it is determined that is "temporary loss information" (step S2110: YES), it is determined whether the current state is a high base state (step S2114), similarly to the process of step S2111.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is the high base state (step S2114: YES), the main CPU 81 reads out the special 2 loss variation pattern selection table in the high base state from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2115). ). Conversely, if it is determined that the current state is not the high base state (step S2114: NO), the variation pattern selection table for special 2 loss in the low base state is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2116). .

When the main CPU 81 sets the variation pattern selection table by the process of step S2112, the process of step S2113, the process of step S2115, or the process of step S2116, the main CPU 81 executes special 2 variation pattern specifying process (step S2117). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is specified by reading from the fluctuation pattern selection table in which the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number obtained together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2104 is set. Then, special 2 variation pattern information indicating the variation pattern of the identified second special symbol is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S2118), and gaming state information indicating the current gaming state is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83. (Step S2119).

By executing the series of processes shown in FIG. 58, various types of preliminary determination information described above based on FIG. 19(B) are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83, and these preliminary determination information It is included in the suspension command related to the right of the suspended second special symbol judgment and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

[Special 1 advance determination processing by main control board 80]
The special 1 preliminary determination process executed by the main control board 80 will be described below with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 59 is a detailed flowchart of the special 1 preliminary determination process in step S218 of FIG.

Following the process of step S217 in FIG. 57, the main CPU 81 stores winning starting opening information (here, information indicating the first starting opening 21) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S2180). Subsequently, similarly to the process of step S2101 in FIG. 58, it is determined whether the current state is a high probability state (step S2181). Here, if it is determined that the current state is a high probability state (step S2181: YES), that is, if the current gaming state is a "probability variable gaming state", the jackpot random number for high probability / special 1 preliminary determination The table is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2182). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current state is not a high probability state (step S2181: NO), that is, if the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "time-saving gaming state", the low probability state/Special 1 The preliminary determination jackpot random number table is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2183).

In the jackpot random number table for high probability/special 1 preliminary determination, as described above based on the column of "high probability state" in FIG. Numerical values are stored, random numbers from "4" to "13" are stored as "temporary winning random numbers", and random numbers from "14" to "839" are stored as "determined loss random numbers". On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 1 preliminary determination, as described above based on the column of "low probability state" in FIG. A random number of ``4'' to ``13'' is stored as a ``temporary loss random number,'' and a random value of ``14'' to ``839'' is stored as a ``confirmed loss random number.''

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S2182 or when the process of step S2183 is executed, the main CPU 81 executes the jackpot random number type identification process (step S2184). This jackpot random number type specifying process is a process for specifying the type of jackpot random number acquired by the process of step S217 in FIG. 57.

When the main CPU 81 sets the jackpot random number table for high probability/Special 1 preliminary determination by the process of step S2182, the acquired jackpot random number is determined by the value specified by the jackpot random number table for high probability/Special 1 preliminary determination. The type of the obtained jackpot random number is specified based on which random number among the "confirmed winning random number", "provisional winning random number", and "confirmed loss random number" matches. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 19(A), in the high-probability/Special 1 preliminary judgment jackpot random number table, random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored as "confirmed winning random numbers" as described above. , "4" to "13" are stored as "temporary winning random numbers", and "14" to "839" are stored as "determined loss random numbers". The main CPU 81 compares the obtained jackpot random number with random numbers in the jackpot random number table for high probability/Special 1 preliminary determination, and uses the jackpot random number type information corresponding to the matched random number as a high probability/Special 1 preliminary determination. The type of jackpot is identified by reading it from the jackpot random number table. For example, if the acquired jackpot random number is "1", the type of jackpot random number is specified as a "win confirmed random number". For example, if the acquired jackpot random number is "11", the type of the jackpot random number is specified as a "provisional win random number".

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 sets the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 1 preliminary determination by the process of step S2183, the acquired jackpot random number is specified by the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 1 preliminary determination. The type of the obtained jackpot random number is specified based on which of the "confirmed hit random number", "temporary loss random number", and "confirmed loss random number" it matches. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 19(A), in the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 1 preliminary determination, random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored as "confirmed winning random numbers", and "4" The random numbers from "13" to "13" are stored as "tentative loss random numbers", and the random numbers from "14" to "839" are stored as "confirmed loss random numbers". The main CPU 81 compares the obtained jackpot random number with random numbers in the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 1 preliminary determination, and uses the jackpot random number type information corresponding to the matched random number for low probability/Special 1 preliminary determination. The type of jackpot is identified by reading it from the jackpot random number table. For example, if the acquired jackpot random number is "12", the type of jackpot random number is specified as a "temporary loss random number". Further, for example, if the acquired jackpot random number is "96", the type of the jackpot random number is specified as a "determined loss random number".

Following the process of step S2184, the main CPU 81 stores the jackpot preliminary determination information in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S2185). As is clear from the notation in FIG. 19(A), if the jackpot random number type identified by the process in step S2184 is a "confirmed hit random number", it is considered a "jackpot" in both the low probability state and the high probability state. "Win confirmation information" indicating that the jackpot will be won is stored as jackpot advance determination information. In addition, if the jackpot random number type identified by the process in step S2184 is a "loss confirmed random number", "loss confirmed information" indicating that the jackpot will be a "loss" in both the low probability state and the high probability state is sent to the jackpot. Stored as advance judgment information. In addition, if the jackpot random number type identified in the process of step S2184 is a "temporary loss random number", it will be a "lose" if it is pending in a low probability state, but it will be a "lose" after moving to a high probability state. ``Temporary loss information'' indicating that it will be a ``jackpot'' if the winning occurs is stored as jackpot preliminary determination information. In addition, if the jackpot random number type identified in the process of step S2184 is a "temporary hit random number", it will be a "jackpot" if it is held in a high probability state, but it will be a "jackpot" if it is held in a high probability state, but it will be held in a low probability state and then If it does, "temporary hit information" indicating that it will be a "lose" is stored as jackpot preliminary determination information.

Subsequently, the main CPU 81 determines whether the jackpot preliminary determination information stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 through the process of step S2185 is "loss confirmation information" (step S2186). Here, if it is determined that the stored jackpot preliminary determination information is not "confirmed loss information" (step S2186: NO), that is, the stored jackpot preliminary determination information is "confirmed win information", "provisional loss information", or If it is "temporary win information", it is certain that it will be a jackpot, or there is a possibility that it will be a jackpot, so the following process is performed to specify the type of jackpot.

That is, if the main CPU 81 determines that the stored jackpot preliminary determination information is not "loss confirmation information" (step S2186: NO), the main CPU 81 uses the first starting opening winning symbol determination table (see FIG. 6(B)) as the main CPU. It is read from the ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2187), and jackpot type identification processing is executed (step S2188).

In the first starting opening winning symbol determination table (see Figure 6(B)), 50 random numbers are associated with "5R Probable Variable" and 50 random numbers are associated with "5R Normal". It is attached. On the other hand, in step S2188, the main CPU 81 selects the jackpot type (jackpot type) corresponding to the random number value that matches the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot random number type identification process in step S2184. The type of jackpot to be selected when it is determined to be a jackpot is specified by reading from the first opening winning symbol determination table. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 6(B), the jackpot type specified by the process of step S2188 is "5R probability variation" or "5R normal".

Next, the main CPU 81 stores information indicating the jackpot type identified by the process of step S2188 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 as jackpot type preliminary determination information (step S2189).

Subsequently, the main CPU 81 determines whether the jackpot preliminary determination information stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 through the process of step S2185 is "temporary loss information" (step S2190). Here, if it is determined that the stored jackpot advance determination information is not "provisional loss information" (step S2190: NO), that is, the stored jackpot advance determination information is "confirmed hit information" or "provisional win information". If so, it is determined whether the current state is a high base state (step S2191).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is a high base state (step S2191: YES), that is, when it is a probability variable gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 81 selects a variation pattern selection table for special 1 jackpot in the high base state. It is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2192). Conversely, if it is determined that the current state is not the high base state (step S2191: NO), that is, if it is the normal gaming state, the variable pattern selection table for extra jackpot in the low base state is read out from the main ROM82. It is set in the main RAM 83 (step S2193).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot preliminary determination information stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 83 through the process of step S2185 is "loss confirmation information" (step S2186: YES), or the stored jackpot preliminary determination information If it is determined that is "temporary loss information" (step S2190: YES), it is determined whether the current state is a high base state (step S2194).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is the high base state (step S2194: YES), the main CPU 81 reads out the special 1 loss variation pattern selection table in the high base state from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2195). ). Conversely, if it is determined that the current state is not the high base state (step S2194: NO), the variation pattern selection table for special 1 loss in the low base state is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2196). .

When the main CPU 81 sets the variation pattern selection table through the process of step S2192, step S2193, step S2195, or step S2196, it executes special 1 variation pattern specifying process (step S2197). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is specified by reading from the fluctuation pattern selection table in which the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number obtained together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2184 is set. Then, special 1 variation pattern information indicating the variation pattern of the identified first special symbol is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S2198), and gaming state information indicating the current gaming state is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83. (Step S2199).

By executing the series of processes shown in FIG. 59, various types of preliminary determination information described above based on FIG. 19(B) are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83, and these preliminary determination information , is included in a suspension command related to the suspended first special symbol determination right and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

[Special pattern processing by main control board 80]
Next, details of the special symbol processing executed by the main control board 80 will be explained with reference to FIG. 60. Here, FIG. 60 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 56.

As illustrated in FIG. 60, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not a jackpot game is being played based on whether the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" ( Step S301). This jackpot game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being executed, and is set to "ON" at the start of the jackpot game, and set to "OFF" at the end of the jackpot game. Here, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to normal symbol processing in step S4.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is not in progress (step S301: NO), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302). Here, if it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not the pending number T2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is "1" or more. (Step S303). Here, if it is determined that the number of reservations T2 is greater than or equal to "1" (step S303: YES), the number of reservations T2 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S304).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the number of reservations T2 is not equal to or greater than "1" (step S303: NO), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of reservations T1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is equal to or greater than "1". (Step S305). Here, if it is determined that the number of reservations T1 is greater than or equal to "1" (step S305: YES), the number of reservations T1 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S306).

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S304 or the process of step S306, the main CPU 81 executes a shift process for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 83 (step S307). Specifically, when executing the process of step S307 following the process of step S304, a shift process is executed to shift the information stored in the special figure 2/first reservation storage area 835 to the determination storage area 830. do. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved storage area after the special figure 2 second reserved storage area 836, a shift process is performed to shift this information to the special figure 2 first reserved storage area 835 side. Also execute. On the other hand, when performing a shift process following the process of step S306, a shift process is performed to shift the information stored in the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to the determination storage area 830. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved storage area after the special figure 1/second reserved storage area 832, a shift process is performed to shift this information to the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 side. Also execute.

When the main CPU 81 stores information necessary for second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination), such as jackpot random numbers and symbol random numbers, in the determination storage area 830 through the shift process in step S307, the , executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 and the fluctuation pattern selection process in step S309.

In addition, the game ball is not in the middle of a jackpot game, is not in the midst of a special symbol fluctuation display, and the game ball is first started when the number of reservations T1 of the first special symbol determination and the number of reservations T2 of the second special symbol determination are both "0". When a prize is won in the opening 21 (or the second starting opening 22), information such as a jackpot random number and a random symbol number obtained in accordance with the winning is directly stored in the determination storage area 830. In such a case, the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process will be executed without executing the shift process in step S307.

The main CPU 81 executes a jackpot determination process based on the random numbers stored in the determination storage area 830 (step S308). By executing this jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot (jackpot symbol) is determined. Then, special symbol setting information indicating the results of these processes is set in the main RAM 83. This jackpot determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 61.

Following the jackpot determination process in step S308, the main CPU 81 executes a variation pattern selection process to select a variation pattern of the special symbol (step S309). This variation pattern selection process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 62.

Following the process of step S309, the main CPU 81 determines whether the special symbol setting information set in the process of step S308, this special symbol setting information, is related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination. A fluctuation start command is set in the main RAM 83, including information indicating whether the processing is related to the above, setting information of the fluctuation pattern selected in the process of step S309, information regarding the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, etc. (step S310). This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the performance associated with the variable display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, a variable performance including a variable display of the performance symbols on the display screen 70 is started.

Following the process of step S310, the main CPU 81 starts variable display of the special symbol based on the setting information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command set in the process of step S310 (step S311). At that time, if the processing from step S308 to step S310 is performed with the information related to the first special symbol determination stored in the determination storage area 830, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 41 Start displaying fluctuations in . On the other hand, when the processing from step S308 to step S310 is performed with the information related to the second special symbol determination stored in the determination storage area 830, the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 42 is Start variable display.

Next, the main CPU 81 starts measuring the elapsed time after starting the variable display of the special symbol in step S311 (step S312). When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S312 or determines that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302: YES), the elapsed time from which measurement was started in the process of step S312 is changed to the change in step S309. It is determined whether the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the pattern selection process has been reached (step S313). Here, if it is determined that the elapsed time has not reached the variable time (step S313: NO), the process proceeds to normal symbol processing in step S4.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the elapsed time has reached the variable time (step S313: YES), it sets a variable end command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the variable display of the special symbol ends (step S314). This variation end command is transmitted to the sub control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, a process is performed in which the performance symbols that have been variably displayed on the display screen 70 are stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates the determination result of the special symbol determination.

Following the process of step S314, the main CPU 81 ends the variable display of the special symbols started in the process of step S311 (step S315). Specifically, the special symbol (jackpot symbol or losing symbol) set in the process of step S308 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device that was variably displaying the special symbol. Note that this stop display of the special symbol continues until at least a predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed.

In this way, the main CPU 81 causes the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to variably display the special symbol, and then displays the special symbol (jackpot symbol or loss symbol) that indicates the determination result of the jackpot determination process. The first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 is stopped and displayed.

Following the process in step S315, the main CPU 81 resets the elapsed time from which the measurement was started in the process in step S312 (step S316), and when the special figure is stopped, including a process to start a jackpot game if it is a jackpot. The process is executed (step S317). This special figure stop processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 63.

[Jackpot determination processing by main control board 80]
FIG. 61 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. The main CPU 81 first executes a jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area 830 (step S3081). Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot based on whether the jackpot random number stored in the judgment storage area 830 matches a preset winning value (see FIG. 6(A)). judge. The winning value here is the jackpot winning value defined in the jackpot random number table for high probability times or the jackpot random number table for low probability times. When a jackpot determination is executed in a high probability state (this embodiment corresponds to the "probability variable gaming state"), the winning value stored in the high probability jackpot random number table is used. On the other hand, when a jackpot determination is executed in a low probability state (in this embodiment, "normal gaming state" and "time-saving gaming state" correspond to this state), the jackpot random number table for low probability states is stored in the jackpot random number table for low probability states. The winning value will be used.

In this way, the main CPU 81 performs a startup process in which acquired information such as a jackpot random number obtained when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22 is stored in the judgment storage area 830. When the conditions are met, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player based on the jackpot random number.

Following the process of step S3081, the main CPU 81 determines whether the determination result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" (step S3082). Here, if it is determined that the determination result of the jackpot determination is not a "jackpot" (step S3082: NO), that is, if the determination result of the jackpot determination is a "lose", the setting information of the losing symbol is set in the main RAM 83. (Step S3083). As a result, during the process of step S315, the losing symbol set here will be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. In this case, no jackpot game is played.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the judgment result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" (step S3082: YES), the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 A jackpot symbol selection process is executed to select (step S3084). Specifically, if the symbol random number stored in the determination storage area 830 together with the jackpot random number used for the jackpot determination in step S3081 is related to the first special symbol determination, the symbol random number is , one of the jackpot symbols is selected based on which jackpot symbol matches the random number value defined in the first starting opening winning symbol determination table (see FIG. 6(B)). In this case, one of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 illustrated in FIG. 6(B) is selected. In addition, if the random symbol number is related to the second special symbol determination, the random number of the symbol matches the random number value of which jackpot symbol specified in the symbol determination table for winning the second starting opening. Based on this, select one of the jackpot symbols. In this case, one of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y3 illustrated in FIG. 6(C) is selected.

Then, the main CPU 81 sets the setting information of the selected jackpot symbol in the main RAM 83 (step S3085). As a result, during the process of step S315, the jackpot symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and thereafter, a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol is played. will be held.

[Variation pattern selection processing by main control board 80]
FIG. 62 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S309 of FIG. After executing the jackpot determination process in step S308 in FIG. 60, the main CPU 81 determines whether the determination result in step S3081 is a jackpot (step S3091). Here, if it is determined that it is a jackpot (step S3091: YES), the jackpot variation pattern selection table is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3092).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a jackpot (step S3091: NO), the reach random number stored in the determination storage area 830 is the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 82 (reach effect effect). Based on whether or not the game player matches the corresponding random number value), it is determined whether or not to perform a reach effect that makes the player expect a jackpot (step S3093). Here, if it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (step S3093: YES), the variable pattern selection table for reach loss is read out from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3094). On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach effect is not to be performed (step S3093: NO), the variable pattern selection table for no reach loss is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3095).

The main CPU 81 refers to the variation pattern selection table set in the main RAM 83 by the process of step S3092, the process of step S3094, or the process of step S3095, and executes the variation pattern random number determination process (step S3096). Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern selection table for jackpot or the fluctuation pattern selection table for reach loss is set in the main RAM 83, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area 830 is set. One variation pattern is selected by reading from the variation pattern selection table. In addition, when the variation pattern selection table for no-reach loss is set in the main RAM 83, based on the number of reservations T1 of the first special symbol determination (or the number of reservations T2 of the second special symbol determination) stored in the main RAM 83. One fluctuation pattern is selected by specifying the number of reservations and reading the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the specified number of reservations from the fluctuation pattern selection table for no-reach loss. By selecting the special symbol variation pattern in this way, the special symbol variation time is inevitably determined.

When the main CPU 81 selects a variation pattern, the main CPU 81 sets the setting information of the selected variation pattern in the main RAM 83 (step S3097). This fluctuation pattern setting information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub control board 90 together with the symbol setting information set in the main RAM 83 by the jackpot determination process in step S308 described above.

[Special figure stop processing by main control board 80]
FIG. 63 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol stop processing in step S317 of FIG. 60. After resetting the elapsed time through the process in step S316, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, as illustrated in FIG. S3171). Here, if it is determined that it is a jackpot (step S3171: YES), the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S3172).

Next, the main CPU 81 sets the variable probability game flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "OFF" (step S3173), and sets the time-saving game flag also stored in the main RAM 83 to "OFF" (step S3174). ). Here, the variable probability game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol determination is in a high probability state where the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is relatively high.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the gaming state is controlled by setting the variable probability game flag and the time saving game flag. That is, when controlling the gaming state to the "probability variable gaming state", both the probability variable game flag and the time saving game flag are set to "ON". Further, when controlling the gaming state to the "normal gaming state", both the variable probability gaming flag and the time saving gaming flag are set to "OFF". Further, when controlling the gaming state to the "time-saving gaming state", the variable probability game flag is set to "OFF" and the time-saving gaming flag is set to "ON".

Following the process of step S3174, the main CPU 81 sets an opening command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the jackpot game is started (step S3175). This opening command includes information such as the type of jackpot and the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 26 (or the second big winning hole 28 or the V winning hole 287) during the jackpot game, and is sent in the transmission process of step S8. It is transmitted to the sub control board 90 by.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a jackpot (step S3171: NO), the main CPU 81 determines whether the variable probability game flag is set to "ON" (step S3176). Here, if it is determined that the variable probability game flag is set to "ON" (step S3176: YES), that is, if the special symbol determination is performed in a high probability state, the high probability stored in the main RAM 83 The remaining number of games K is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3177). This high probability game remaining number K indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol determination is executed in the high probability state.

Following the process of step S3177, the main CPU 81 determines whether the remaining number of high probability games K is "0" (step S3178). Here, if it is determined that the remaining number of high probability games K is "0" (step S3178: YES), the variable probability game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3179). As a result, special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S3179, when it is determined that the variable probability game flag is not set to "ON" (step S3176: NO), or when the remaining number of high probability games K is not "0". If it is determined (step S3178: NO), it is determined whether the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3180). Here, if it is determined that the time-saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3180: YES), the remaining number of time-saving games J stored in the main RAM 83 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3181). This time saving game remaining number J indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol determination is executed in the time saving state (high base state).

Following the process of step S3181, the main CPU 81 determines whether the remaining number of time saving games J is "0" (step S3182). Here, when it is determined that the remaining number of time-saving games J is "0" (step S3182: YES), the time-saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3183). As a result, the support function that facilitates the winning of game balls into the second starting port 22 is no longer provided.

[Big prize opening/closing control process by main control board 80]
64 to 66 are detailed flowcharts of the big winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 56. Following the second starting port opening/closing control process in step S5 in FIG. 56, the main CPU 81 determines whether the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" as illustrated in FIG. 64 (step S601). ). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot game flag is not set to "ON" (step S601: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S601: YES), the main CPU 81 sets the opening command related to the jackpot game by the process of step S3175 (see FIG. 63), for example. Based on whether or not the elapsed time has reached a predetermined opening time, it is determined whether or not the opening period of the jackpot game is in progress (step S602).

If the main CPU 81 determines that it is during the opening period of the jackpot game (step S602: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the opening time has elapsed (step S603). Here, if it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S603: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7. On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), it sets the number of rounds Rmax of the jackpot game, the operation pattern, etc., and stores the setting information in the main RAM 103 (step S604). . Specifically, the main CPU 81 sets the number of rounds Rmax based on the opening pattern of the jackpot in each jackpot illustrated in FIGS. 6(B) and (C), and sets the number of rounds Rmax, and The respective operation patterns of the opening/closing member 27, opening/closing member 29, and slide member 285 are set so that the two major winning openings 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot.

By executing the process of step S604, various times related to the jackpot game, such as the interval time that is the time from the end of a round game until the start of the next round game, and the ending time after the end of the final round game, are also determined. It is also set.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S604, the main CPU 81 updates the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S605). This round number R is set to "0" before the jackpot game is started, and is updated to a value in which "1" is added each time the process of step S605 is performed.

Following the process of step S605, the main CPU 81 determines whether the number of rounds R updated in the process of step S605 is "1" (step S606). In this embodiment, as described above based on FIGS. 6(B) and (C), for all jackpots, the second jackpot 28 is used for the first round game, and the second jackpot 28 is used for the second round and subsequent rounds. The first grand prize opening 26 is used for the round game. Therefore, when the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R is "1" (step S606: YES), the main CPU 81 enters the second big winning hole via the second big winning hole solenoid 282 (and the V winning hole solenoid 286). 28 (and V winning hole 287) is started (step S607). Then, a second big winning hole opening/closing round game start command is set in the main RAM 83 to notify that a round game for opening and closing the second big winning hole 28 is to be started (step S808).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R updated in the process of step S605 is not "1" (step S606: NO), that is, if the number of rounds R is "2" or more, the main CPU 81 The first big winning hole opening/closing control that controls opening and closing of the first big winning hole 26 via the winning hole solenoid 262 is started (step S609).

Following the processing in step S609, the main CPU 81 sets a first big prize opening/closing round game start command in the main RAM 83 to notify that a round game for opening and closing the first big prize opening 26 is to be started (step S610 ).

The second big prize opening opening/closing round game start command set in the process of step S608 and the first big winning opening opening/closing round game start command set in the process of step S610 are transmitted by the transmission process of step S8 in FIG. , is transmitted to the sub control board 90.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines in the process of step S602 that the opening period of the jackpot game is not in progress (step S602: NO), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not it is in the ending period of the jackpot game (step S613). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending period is in progress based on whether the elapsed time after the end of the final round of the jackpot game has reached a predetermined ending time. Here, if it is determined that the ending period is in progress (step S613: YES), the process proceeds to step S626 (see FIG. 66), which will be described later.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the ending period in the jackpot game is not in progress (step S613: NO), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the ending period in the jackpot game is in progress (step S613: NO). It is determined whether or not (step S614). Here, if it is determined that it is not during the interval period (step S614: NO), the process proceeds to step S617 (see FIG. 65), which will be described later.

If the main CPU 81 determines that it is in the interval period (step S614: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the interval time set in the process of step S604 has elapsed since the previous round game ended. (Step S615). Here, if it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S615: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7. Conversely, if it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S615: YES), the processes from step S605 described above are executed.

When the main CPU 81 determines that it is not during the interval period (step S614: NO), that is, when the round game is in progress, the main CPU 81 determines whether the second grand prize opening 28 is being opened, as illustrated in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S617). Specifically, after executing the process of step S607, the first end condition regarding the opening/closing control of the second grand prize opening 28 is that a predetermined number of game balls win from the start of opening of the second grand prize opening 28; Based on whether or not the second termination condition regarding the opening/closing control of the second big prize opening 28, that a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the start of opening of the second big prize opening 28, is not satisfied. , it is determined whether or not the second big prize opening 28 is being opened. If neither the first end condition nor the second end condition is satisfied, it can be determined that the second big prize opening 28 is being opened. Here, if it is determined that the second big prize opening 28 is not open (step S617: NO), the process proceeds to step S621, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the second big winning hole 28 is being opened (step S616: YES), the game ball is placed in the V winning hole 287 based on the presence or absence of the detection signal from the V winning hole sensor 283. It is determined whether or not the vehicle has passed (step S618). Here, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the V winning hole 287 (step S618: NO), the process proceeds to step S621, which will be described later.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 287 (step S618: YES), the main CPU 81 sets the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "ON" (step S619). This V winning flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 287 (that is, whether the game ball has won a V prize or not), and although it is normally set to "OFF", When the passage of a game ball is detected by the V winning a prize opening sensor 283, it is set to "ON".

Following the process of step S619, the main CPU 81 sets a V winning command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the game ball has won a V prize (step S620).

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S620, when it determines that the second big prize opening 28 is not opened (step S617: NO), or when it determines that the game ball has not passed through the V prize opening 287. If so (step S618: NO), it is determined whether the second big winning opening opening/closing control started in the process of step S607 (or the first big winning opening opening/closing control started in the process of step S609) has ended ( Step S621). Here, if it is determined that the grand prize opening/closing control has not been completed (step S621: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the grand prize opening opening/closing control has ended (step S621: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 matches the number of rounds Rmax set in the process of step S604. It is determined whether or not (step S622). Here, if it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R matches the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: YES), it starts measuring the ending time, which is the elapsed time since the ending period started (step S623), and determines whether the ending period is the same as the ending period. An ending command notifying the start is set in the main RAM 83 (step S624). This ending command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the ending period is in progress in the process of step S613 in FIG. 64 (step S613: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed, as illustrated in FIG. (Step S626). Specifically, it is determined whether the ending time has elapsed based on whether the ending time whose measurement was started in the process of step S623 has reached the ending time set in the process of step S604. Here, if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S626: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the ending time has elapsed (step S626: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S627). Here, if it is determined that the V winning flag is set to "ON" (step S627: YES), the probability variable game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S628), and the main RAM 83 The remaining number of high probability games K stored in is set to "100" (step S629), and although not shown in FIG. 66, the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "OFF". .

If the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S629 or determines that the V winning flag is not set to "ON" (step S627: NO), the main CPU 81 sets the time-saving game flag to "ON" (step S630). Then, the remaining number of time-saving games J is set to "100" (step S631), the jackpot game flag is set to "OFF", and the series of processing is ended (step S632).

[Interrupt processing by sub control board 90]
When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the sub CPU 91 of the sub control board 90 sets an interrupt cycle, which is a cycle for performing interrupt processing, which will be described later. Then, the sub CPU 91 repeats a random number update process for updating performance random numbers and the like used to determine the content of the performance at a predetermined period shorter than the interrupt period. That is, while the gaming machine 1 is activated, the sub CPU 91 repeats the random number update process at a predetermined period, and repeats the interrupt process at an interrupt period.

The interrupt processing executed in the sub control board 90 will be described below with reference to FIG. 67. Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing executed in the sub control board 90. Similar to the interrupt processing performed by the main control board 80 (see FIG. 56), the sub CPU 91 repeatedly executes a series of processing illustrated in FIG. 67 at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Note that the processing performed by the sub control board 90, which will be explained based on the flowcharts from FIG. 67 onwards, is performed according to instructions issued by the sub CPU 91 based on the program stored in the sub ROM 92.

When the sub CPU 91 receives a command from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 first executes a command reception process to perform processing according to the command (step S10). This command receiving process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 68.

Following the process of step S10, the sub CPU 91 executes an operation reception process that performs a process according to the operation of the operation means provided in the gaming machine 1 (step S30). This operation reception process will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 85 to 87.

Following the process in step S30, the sub CPU 91 executes a command transmission process (step S40). Specifically, the command set in the sub-RAM 93 through the command reception process in step S10 and the operation reception process in step S30 is transmitted to the image-acoustic control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120). By executing this command transmission process, the image and sound control board 100 is instructed to perform effects such as displaying images and outputting effects sounds, and the lighting of various lamps and the execution of effects using movable accessories are performed using lamps. An instruction is given to the control board 120.

Following the processing in step S40, the sub CPU 91 executes data transfer processing (step S50). Specifically, since data related to image and sound control is transmitted from the image and sound control board 100, the data is transferred to the lamp control board 120. Thereby, the performance by the performance means such as the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, etc. is controlled by the lamp control board 120 so as to be synchronized with the performance performed on the display screen 70 and the speaker 38.

[Command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 68 is a detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. 67. As illustrated in FIG. 68, the sub CPU 91 first determines whether or not it has received a command from the main control board 80 (step S11). Here, if it is determined that no command has been received (step S11: NO), the process proceeds to step S30 described above.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that a command from the main control board 80 has been received (step S11: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines that the command is not transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the process of step S212 or the process of step S220 in FIG. It is determined whether the command is a pending command (step S12). Here, if it is determined that the command is not a pending command (step S12: NO), the process proceeds to step S15, which will be described later.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is a pending command (step S12: YES), it executes pending command reception processing (step S13). This pending command receiving process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 69.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a pending command (step S12: NO), the sub CPU 91 determines whether the command is a fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the process of step S310 in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S15). Here, if it is determined that the received command is not a fluctuation start command (step S15: NO), the process proceeds to step S17, which will be described later.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is a fluctuation start command (step S15: YES), it executes fluctuation start command reception processing (step S16). This fluctuation start command reception process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 71.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a fluctuation start command (step S15: NO), the sub CPU 91 determines that the command is a fluctuation end command transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the process of step S314 in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S17). If the sub CPU 91 determines that it is a variation end command (step S17: YES), it ends the variation display of the production symbols and stops the production symbols in a manner that shows the determination result of the special symbol determination executed at the start of the symbol variation. A variable effect end command that instructs execution of the display process is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S18).

A special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) is generated by transmitting this variation production end command to the image sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process in step S40. is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or second special symbol display 42), and the effect symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) is displayed on the display screen. It will be stopped and displayed at 70.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a variation end command (step S17: NO), the sub CPU 91 determines whether the command is an opening command sent from the main control board 80 in accordance with the process of step S3175 in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S19). Here, if it is determined that the received command is an opening command (step S19: YES), an image is displayed to announce the start of an opening effect that notifies the type of jackpot or encourages the player to play right during the opening period of the jackpot game. An opening performance start command for instructing the sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S20).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not an opening command (step S19: NO), it determines whether the command is a round game start command (step S21). That is, the second grand prize opening opening/closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S608 in FIG. 64, or the command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process in step S610 in FIG. It is determined whether the first big prize opening opening/closing round game start command has been received.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is a round game start command (step S21: YES), it executes a round game start command reception process that performs processing according to the received round game start command (step S22). .

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a round game start command (step S21: NO), the sub CPU 91 determines that the command is the V winning command transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the process of step S620 in FIG. It is determined whether there is one (step S23). Here, if it is determined that the received command is a V-winning command (step S23: YES), a V-winning command reception process is executed in accordance with the V-winning command (step S24). Specifically, a V winning notification command is set in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) to execute the V winning notification performance illustrated in FIG.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a V winning command (step S23: NO), it instructs the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) to execute a predetermined ending effect. The ending command receiving process including the process of setting the ending effect start command in the sub RAM 93 is executed (step S25). The ending effect start command set in the sub-RAM 93 through the process of step S25 is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120), thereby executing the mode selection promotion effect described above.

[Pending command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 69 is a detailed flowchart of the pending command reception process in step S13 of FIG. 68. When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is a pending command (step S12: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 69, the sub CPU 91 adds "1" to the number of pending special symbol determinations stored in the sub RAM 93. The value is updated to the value (step S130). Specifically, when a suspension command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the number of reservations in the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1", and a suspension command related to the second special symbol determination is updated. If received, the pending number of second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1".

Following the process of step S131, the sub CPU 91 stores the preliminary determination information included in the received pending command in the sub RAM 93 (step S131). Next, the sub CPU 91 obtains an icon change effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S132). This icon change performance random number is incremented by "1" every time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time of receiving the hold command as the icon change performance random number. Then, an icon change effect lottery is executed based on the obtained change effect random number (step S133). Specifically, it is determined whether the acquired change effect random number matches any of the random values related to the icon change effect random numbers stored in the sub ROM 92 in advance.

Although not shown in the figure, in the sub ROM 92, the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the random value regarding the icon change production random number are associated. The table is memorized. The sub CPU 91 refers to this table and determines whether the acquired icon change effect random number is the result of the first special symbol determination specified from the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S134 and the first special symbol. It is determined whether or not to perform the icon change effect based on whether or not the icon matches any of the random numbers associated with the variation pattern. In addition, in this table, regarding the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination, more random numbers are associated with "jackpot" than with "loss". Furthermore, the longer the variation time of the first special symbol is, the more random numbers are associated with it. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability is, the easier it is to execute the icon change effect, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability is, the harder it is to execute the icon change effect.

The sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to perform the icon change effect based on the lottery result in step S133 (step S134). Here, if it is determined that the icon change effect is not to be executed (step S134: NO), a pending icon display command is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S135). In this way, when the process proceeds to step S135 following step S134, a pending command that does not include icon change effect pattern information is set in the sub-RAM 93 by the process of step S135, and the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120). In this case, although a pending icon is displayed based on the pending command, an icon change effect using this pending icon is not performed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the icon change effect (step S134: YES), the jackpot preliminary determination information of the preliminary determination information included in the pending icon received this time is "provisional loss information". It is determined whether or not (step S137). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot preliminary determination information is not "temporary loss information" (step S137: NO), it is determined whether the jackpot preliminary determination information is "loss confirmed information" (step S138).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the jackpot preliminary determination information is "loss confirmation information" (step S138: YES), the sub CPU 91 reads the icon change production pattern selection table for losses from the sub ROM 92 and sets it in the sub RAM 93 (step S139). . On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot preliminary judgment information is not "loss confirmed information" (step S138: NO), that is, if the jackpot preliminary judgment information is "win confirmed information" or "provisional winning information", the jackpot icon The change effect pattern selection table is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S139). If it is determined that the jackpot preliminary determination information is "temporary loss information" (step S137: YES), the temporary loss icon change performance pattern selection table is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S141).

When the sub CPU 91 sets any icon change effect pattern selection table by the process of step S139, the process of step S140, or the process of step S141, it executes the icon change effect pattern selection process (step S142). In the icon change effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93, a random value is associated with each of a plurality of icon change effect patterns. In the process of step S142, the sub CPU 91 reads out the icon change effect pattern corresponding to the random number that matches the icon change effect random number obtained in the process of step S132 from the icon change effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93. By this, one effect pattern of the icon change effect is selected. Then, icon change effect pattern information indicating the selected icon change effect effect pattern is stored in the sub-RAM 93 (step S143), and the process of step S135 is executed.

In this way, when executing the process of step S135 following the process of step S143, the sub CPU 91 sends the pending icon display command including the icon change effect pattern information stored in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S143 to a predetermined location in the sub RAM 93. Set to area.

The hold icon display command set in the sub-RAM 93 by the process in step S135 is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S40. On the other hand, if the icon change effect pattern information is included in the received pending icon display command, the image and sound control CPU 101 of the image and sound control board 100 uses the icon change effect pattern information as setting information for the icon change effect. The setting information is stored in the control RAM 103, and based on this setting information, the VDP 104 and the audio DSP 107 are instructed to execute the processing necessary to realize the icon change effect.

In addition, when comparing the icon change performance pattern selection table for loses and the icon change performance pattern selection table for jackpots, it is better to select the icon change performance pattern based on the latter table. Compared to the case where a change effect pattern is selected, the final display mode of the icon is more likely to change to a higher-order display mode. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, an icon change effect may be executed in which the display color of the icon changes from white, which is the default display color, to blue, green, and red in that order, and based on the latter table, If you select the icon change effect pattern, the icon display color will eventually change to green or red, whereas if you select the icon change effect pattern based on the latter table, the icon display color will change. There is a tendency that the color of the icon rarely changes to red, and the display color of the icon often changes only to blue or green.

On the other hand, the icon change performance pattern selection table for temporary loss stores icon change performance patterns for realizing the icon change performance related to the special figure 1 third reservation described based on FIG. In addition, receiving a pending command that includes "temporary loss information" means that if a jackpot random number etc. is acquired in a low probability state and a special symbol determination is executed in a low probability state, it will be determined as a "lose". However, it means that if a special symbol determination is executed after transitioning from a low probability state to a high probability state, it will be determined as a "jackpot". Therefore, in the temporary loss icon change performance pattern selection table, for example, in the situation shown in FIG. An icon change performance pattern for executing the icon change performance after the game state is set to the "probable variable game state" at the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the special figure 1 first hold without executing the target icon change performance. is stored.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a pending command including "confirmed win information" or "temporary win information" is received, the icon change performance pattern is selected by referring to the jackpot icon change performance pattern selection table. On the other hand, when a hold command including "temporary loss information" is received, an icon change effect pattern is selected by referring to another table called a temporary loss icon change effect pattern selection table.

On the other hand, in other embodiments, not only when a pending command including "confirmed win information" or "provisional winning information" is received, but also when a pending command including "provisional loss information" is received. The icon change performance pattern may be selected by referring to the jackpot icon change performance pattern selection table.

[Special drawing 2 pending jackpot suggestion production processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating the special drawing 2 pending jackpot suggestion production process. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, on the condition that the reserved second special symbol determination right includes one that will be determined as a "jackpot", the third round in the jackpot game The special drawing 2 pending jackpot suggestion effect (see FIG. 22) can be executed during the round game. The processing executed by the sub CPU 91 to execute this special drawing 2 pending jackpot suggestion effect is as follows.

That is, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the third round game is to be started based on whether or not the third round game start command has been received from the main control board 80 after the jackpot game has started. (Step S2301). Here, if it is determined that the third round game is not started (step S2301: NO), the special drawing 2 pending jackpot suggestion production process is completed and the process is returned to step S2301.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the third round game is to be started (step S2301: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether special 2 preliminary determination information is stored in the sub RAM 93 (step S2302). Here, if it is determined that the special 2 preliminary determination information is not stored, that is, the right to determine the second special symbol is not reserved (step S2302: NO), the special symbol 2 pending jackpot suggestion production process is executed. Upon completion, the process returns to step S2301.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the special 2 preliminary determination information is stored in the sub RAM 93 (step S2302: YES), the sub CPU 91 transmits the V winning prize transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the process of step S620 in FIG. It is determined whether the command has been received (step S2303). Specifically, for example, when a V-winning command is received, V-winning command received information indicating that fact is stored in the sub-RAM 93, and whether or not this V-winning command received information is stored in the sub-RAM 93 is checked. Based on this, it is determined whether the V winning command has been received.

Here, if the V winning command has been received, the processes of steps S628 and 629 in FIG. 66 are executed at the end of the current jackpot game, so that after the jackpot game ends, the second special prize will be played in a high probability state. Symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) will be executed. Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the V winning command has been received (step S2303: YES), it sets the provisional high certainty flag stored in the sub RAM 93 to ON (step S2304). This provisional high probability flag is used to perform subsequent processing assuming that the high probability state has been reached when the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) is executed in the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game. This is the flag.

The special figure 2 pending jackpot suggestion production process illustrated in FIG. 70 is performed at the start of the third round of the jackpot game. That is, the special figure 2 pending jackpot suggestion production process is a process that is performed when the state related to special symbol determination is a "low probability state." If the game ball wins a V prize during the first round of the jackpot game, at the end of the jackpot game, the gaming state changes from the normal gaming state to the variable probability gaming state, that is, from the low probability state to the high probability state. state, if the state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high probability state, it is assumed that the state becomes a high probability state at the start of the third round (temporary high probability flag (set to ON) and perform the subsequent processing.

As described above, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the V winning command has been received (step S2303: YES), it sets the provisional high certainty flag to ON through the process of step S2304. In addition, even if this jackpot game is triggered by a "normal jackpot" or if it is a jackpot game related to a guaranteed variable jackpot, if the game ball does not win a V prize during the first round of play, , V winning commands are never transmitted from the main control board 80. Therefore, if it is determined that the V winning command has not been received (step S2303: NO), the process proceeds to step S2305, which will be described later, without executing the process of step S2304.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process in step S2304, or when it is determined that the V winning command has not been received (step S2303: NO), the sub CPU 91 executes the special process determined to be stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process in step S2302. 2. It is determined whether "win confirmation information" as jackpot preliminary determination information is included in the preliminary determination information (step S2305). Here, if it is determined that "win confirmation information" is included (step S2305: YES), regardless of whether the state after the end of the current jackpot game is a low probability state or a high probability state, A jackpot will definitely occur within the hold. Therefore, if it is determined that "hit confirmation information" is included (step S2305: YES), in order to execute the above-mentioned special drawing 2 pending jackpot suggestion performance based on FIG. 22, step S2308 described later Processing will proceed.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the "winning confirmation information" is not included (step S2305: NO), the sub CPU 91 determines that the "win confirmed information" is not included in the special 2 advance determination information determined to be stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S2302. It is determined whether or not all of the jackpot preliminary determination information is "loss confirmation information" (step S2306). Here, if all the jackpot preliminary judgment information is "loss confirmation information", regardless of whether the state after the jackpot game is low probability state or high probability state, the pending second special symbol judgment All judgment results are "lost". In this case, since the execution conditions for the special drawing 2 pending jackpot suggestion performance are not met, if all the jackpot preliminary determination information is determined to be "loss confirmation information" (step S2306: YES), a series of special drawing 2 pending The inner jackpot suggestion production process is completed, and the process returns to step S2301.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that not all of the jackpot preliminary determination information is "loss confirmation information" (step S2306: NO), that is, it determines that the jackpot preliminary determination information is stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S2302. Special 2 If the jackpot preliminary judgment information included in the preliminary judgment information includes “provisional loss information” or “provisional winning information”, check whether the provisional high certainty flag is set to ON or not. Determination is made (step S2307).

As shown in FIG. 19(A), the "temporary loss information" is determined to be a "lose" if the state at the start of the fluctuation (during pending expiry) is a low probability state; This information indicates that if the state of (time) is a high probability state, it will be determined as a "jackpot". In addition, "temporary hit information" is determined to be a "jackpot" if the state at the start of the fluctuation (when the hold is exhausted) is a high probability state, and if the state at the start of the fluctuation (when the hold is exhausted) is a low probability state. If there is, this is information indicating that it is determined to be a "lose".

In this way, the "temporary loss information" and the "temporary hit information" indicate that when the special symbol determination is executed in a low probability state, the determination result will be "loss", and the determination result will be "loss" when the special symbol determination is executed in a high probability state. Both have in common that in some cases, the judgment result is a "jackpot." If "temporary loss information" or "temporary win information" is stored in the sub-RAM 93, and if the state after the end of the jackpot game is a high probability state, the conditions for executing the special drawing 2 pending jackpot suggestion performance are satisfied. Conversely, if the state after the end of the jackpot game is a low probability state, the conditions for executing the special drawing 2 pending jackpot suggestion performance will not be satisfied.

Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the "temporary loss information" or "temporary win information" is stored, and determines that the tentative high certainty flag is set to ON (step S2307: YES) In other words, if the second special symbol determination corresponding to the "temporary loss information" or "temporary win information" is executed in a high probability state, the execution condition of the special symbol 2 pending jackpot suggestion performance is satisfied, Execute the following processing.

That is, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the tentative high probability flag is set to ON (step S2307: YES), or when it determines that "win confirmation information" is included (step S2305: YES) , it is determined whether the special drawing 2 jackpot that occurs during the hold is a "probable jackpot" (step S2308).

By the way, when the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved, the main control board 80 provides jackpot advance determination information (here, "confirmed hit information," "provisional loss information," or "temporary win information"). "Jackpot type advance determination information" is also included in the pending command and transmitted together. This is as described above based on the column of jackpot type preliminary determination information in FIG. 19(B). Based on this jackpot type preliminary determination information, it is specified whether the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the jackpot preliminary determination information transmitted together is a "probable variable jackpot" or a "normal jackpot". Is possible.

Therefore, in step S2308, the sub CPU 91 uses the "jackpot type preliminary determination information" stored in the sub RAM 93 together with the "jackpot preliminary determination information" that is the target of the special drawing 2 pending jackpot suggestion effect. , it is determined whether the special drawing 2 jackpot that occurs during the hold is a "probable jackpot" or not.

Here, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the jackpot that occurs within the hold is a "probable variable jackpot" (step S2308: YES), the sub CPU 91 performs the special drawing 2 pending probable variable jackpot suggestion performance based on FIG. 22(A). In order to execute this, a pending probability variable jackpot suggestion background display command is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S2309). On the contrary, if it is determined that the jackpot that occurs in the hold is not a "probable strange jackpot" (step S2308: NO), to execute the above-mentioned special drawing 2 hold normal jackpot suggestion effect based on FIG. 22(B) Then, a pending normal jackpot suggestion background display command is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S2310).

The jackpot suggestion background display command set by the process of step S2309 or step S2310 is transmitted to the image sound control board 100 by the command transmission process of step S40 in FIG. 67. On the other hand, by executing processing based on the received command by the image and sound control CPU 101 of the image and sound control board 100, a performance suggesting a special jackpot in the special drawing 2 reservation or a performance suggesting a normal jackpot in the special drawing 2 reservation is realized. That will happen.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S2309 or the process of step S2310, the sub CPU 91 sets the provisional high certainty flag stored in the sub RAM 93 to OFF (step S2311), and suggests a series of special drawings 2 pending jackpot. Finish the production process.

[Variation start command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 71 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S16 of FIG. 68. If the sub CPU 91 determines that the command received from the main control board 80 is a fluctuation start command (step S15: YES), it executes a series of fluctuation start command reception processes illustrated in FIG. 71.

That is, the sub CPU 91 obtains the value at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 regarding the effect random number that is updated as appropriate by the random number update process in the sub control board 90, and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S161). . Then, the received variation start command is analyzed (step S162).

As described above, this fluctuation start command includes symbol setting information indicating the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process, and whether this symbol setting information is related to the first special symbol judgment or the second special symbol judgment. It includes winning start opening information indicating whether the game is a special symbol, setting information for a variation pattern of special symbols, information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation start command, the type and result of special symbol determination can be specified. That is, it is possible to specify whether it is a jackpot or a loss, and if it is a jackpot, what type of jackpot it is. In addition, by identifying whether the fluctuation pattern is a losing fluctuation pattern based on the setting information of the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to determine whether it is necessary to perform a reach performance or a no-reach performance. . Also, based on the setting information of the variation pattern, the variation time of the special symbol can be specified. Further, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the gaming state.

After analyzing the variation start command, the sub CPU 91 executes a variation production pattern setting process for setting a variation production pattern of a variation production accompanying the variation display of the special symbol based on the analysis result (step S163). By executing this fluctuation performance pattern setting process, the variation mode of the performance symbols, the presence or absence of the reach performance, the presence or absence of the pseudo-continuous performance, the type of performance symbols that make up the reach pattern, the type and content of the reach performance, the pseudo-continuation performance, etc. The content, the type of effect pattern to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined. This variation effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 72.

Following the process of step S163, the sub CPU 91 executes a preview performance pattern setting process that performs settings regarding various preview performances to be executed when the performance symbols are variably displayed in the variable performance pattern set in the process of step S163. (Step S164). This preview effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 73.

Next, the sub CPU 91 sends a variable effect start command to the sub CPU 91 that instructs to start a variable effect in the variable effect pattern set in the process of step S163 and to execute a preview effect in the preview effect pattern set in the process of step S164. It is set in the RAM 93 (step S173).

This variable effect start command includes information indicating the variable effect pattern set by the process of step S163 and information indicating the preview effect pattern set by the process of step S164, and includes information indicating the variable effect pattern set by the process of step S164, and includes information indicating the preview effect pattern set by the process of step S164. The command is transmitted to the image-acoustic control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 through the command transmission process. As a result, the variable effects and preview effects whose effect patterns are determined by the sub-control board 90 are realized by the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

Following the process in step S173, the sub CPU 91 updates the pending number stored in the sub RAM 93 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S174). Specifically, if the variation start command received from the main control board 80 is to notify the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the number of pending determinations of the first special symbol. Update to. On the other hand, when the received variation start command notifies the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, the number of pending determinations of the second special symbol is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1".

[Variation effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 72 is a detailed flowchart of the variable effect pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. 71. Following the process of step S162, the sub CPU 91 sets a final performance symbol to be finally displayed (main stop) on the display screen 70 along with the stop display of the first special symbol (or second special symbol). A symbol setting process is executed (step S1631).

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game is controlled in the variable probability gaming state (or time-saving gaming state), the "hit notification effect" is included in the reserved second special symbol judgment right. If the execution includes the one that will be executed, specifically, a suspension command including "win confirmation information" is received from the main control board 80 in response to the suspension of the right to determine the second special symbol. In this case, using the symbol variation before the symbol variation executed in response to the second special symbol determination, the discomfort loss notification performances A to C described above based on FIGS. 25 to 27 are performed. I am planning to do one of these.

Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 receives a hold command related to the right to determine the second special symbol including "win confirmation information" while the game is being controlled in the variable probability gaming state (or the time saving gaming state), the sub CPU 91 feels something strange. It is decided whether to execute the loss notification effect or not. In addition, in the discomfort loss notification performance, the variation pattern of the second special symbol for the no-reach loss performance is selected for the symbol fluctuations that are performed before the symbol fluctuation that causes the hit notification performance to be executed. It will be carried out on the condition that Therefore, based on the variation pattern information included in the pending command received before the above-mentioned pending command, it was possible to identify that the variation pattern of the second special symbol was a variation pattern for a no-reach effect. Only in certain cases will we perform a performance to notify you of a loss.

When the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the discomfort loss notification performance, for example, it executes a lottery using random numbers to determine which discomfort loss notification performance among the discomfort loss notification performances A to C to be executed. Then, by the process of step S1631, regarding the symbol variation for executing the determined discomfort loss notification performance, a process is performed to set three performance symbols on the display screen 70 that cause a pseudo stop and then a real stop.

Here, when performing the discomfort loss notification effect A (see Fig. 25), three effect symbols are used as the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol, which are composed of two number symbols and one character symbol. Set the combination of Furthermore, when performing the discomfort loss notification performance B (see FIG. 26), a combination of three performance symbols including the middle 7 symbols is set as the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. In addition, when performing the discomfort loss notification performance C (see FIG. 27), a combination of three performance symbols whose display positions are shifted from the normal one is set as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol.

Based on such processing, the variable performance and the stop performance in the variable probability gaming state (or time-saving gaming state) are executed, thereby realizing the discomfort loss notification performances A to C.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether it is necessary to perform a reach effect in conjunction with the current variable display of the special symbol, based on the setting information of the special symbol variation pattern included in the received variation start command. is determined (step S1632). Here, if it is determined that there is no need to perform a reach effect (step S1632: NO), a variable effect pattern for a reach effect is set (step S1633). For example, from the no-reach variable performance pattern selection table in which multiple types of variable performance patterns for no-reach performance are associated with each special symbol variation pattern, any one of the effects corresponding to the random number obtained in step S161 is selected. The variable performance pattern is read out, and information indicating the variable performance pattern is set in the sub-RAM 93.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that it is necessary to perform the reach effect (step S1632: YES), it sets a variable effect pattern for the reach effect (step S1634). For example, in step S161, from the variable effect pattern selection table for ready-to-reach effects in which multiple types of variable effect patterns for effects with reach are associated with each combination of the judgment result of special symbol determination and the variable pattern of special symbols, Any one variable performance pattern corresponding to the random performance number obtained in the process is read out, and information indicating the variable performance pattern is set in the sub-RAM 93.

By performing the process of step S1633 or step S1634, it is possible to determine in what kind of variation pattern the performance symbols are displayed, which reach performance to perform when performing a reach performance, and when developing a reach performance. This will determine how the reach performance will be developed.

Regarding the subjugation reach described above based on FIG. 17, the sub ROM 92 stores information indicating a variation pattern of the second special symbol exclusively for the subjugation reach (variation pattern exclusively for the subjugation reach). When the sub CPU 91 receives a variation start command related to the second special symbol determination including information indicating the same variation pattern as the subjugation reach dedicated variation pattern while the game is being controlled in the variable probability gaming state, the sub CPU 91 performs the steps described above. By executing the process of S1634, a variation effect pattern of subjugation reach is set.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a variable performance start command instructing to start a variable performance in the variable performance pattern set in the process of step S1633 (or process of step S1634) is sent from the sub-control board 90 to the image and sound control board. 100 (and the lamp control board 120), a variable effect including a variable display of effect symbols is realized.

As explained based on FIGS. 40 to 45, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special button for notifying the win or loss is repeatedly pressed in response to the operation of the first performance button 35 by the player without executing the reach performance. Performances and special button single press performances can be executed, and as variation patterns of the first special symbol, a variation pattern dedicated to the special button continuous press performance and a variation pattern dedicated to the special button single press performance are prepared.

The sub CPU 91 determines that the first special symbol fluctuation pattern specified based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern setting information included in the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80 is a fluctuation pattern exclusively for special button press effects. If it is determined that this is the case, the process of step S1633 executes the blue chance effect (see FIG. 8(L)) at the beginning of the variable display of the first special symbol, and then the variable display of the first special symbol. At the end of the process, a variable effect pattern is set for a variable effect in which a winning notification effect (see FIG. 8(N)) or a loss notification effect (see FIG. 8(O)) is executed.

When the sub CPU 91 sets the variable effect pattern for the special button continuous press effect in this way, the sub CPU 91 executes the blue chance effect after the blue chance effect is executed by the effect pattern setting process for the special button effect, which will be described in detail later based on FIG. 81. , sets a performance pattern for a special button press performance (see FIG. 8(M)) that is performed until the winning notification performance (or loss notification performance) is executed.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 determines that the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified based on the setting information of the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80 is exclusive to the special button single press effect. If it is specified that the fluctuation pattern is the one shown in FIG. A variable effect pattern is set for a variable effect in which a win notification effect (see FIG. 8(N)) or a loss information effect (see FIG. 8(C)) is executed at the end of the variable display.

When the sub CPU 91 sets the variable effect pattern for the special button single-press effect in this way, the red chance effect is executed by the effect pattern setting process for the special button effect, which will be described in detail later based on FIG. 81. A performance pattern for a special button single-press performance (see FIG. 8(Q)) is set between then and the time when the winning notification performance (or loss notification performance) is executed.

[Advance presentation pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 73 is a detailed flowchart of the preview effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. 71. Following the variable effect pattern setting process in step S163, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of advance notice effect pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG.

The sub CPU 91 first executes special cut-in effect pattern setting processing (step S165). This special cut-in effect pattern setting process determines whether or not to execute the above-mentioned special cut-in based on FIGS. 12 and 13, and if it is determined to execute it, what effect pattern (at what timing) This is the process for determining whether to execute (). This special cut-in effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 74.

Following the process of step S165, the sub CPU 91 executes a character standby effect pattern setting process (step S166). This character standby effect pattern setting process determines whether or not to execute the character standby effect described above based on FIG. This is a process for making a decision. This character standby performance pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 75.

Following the process of step S166, the sub CPU 91 executes a subjugation performance pattern setting process (step S167). This subjugation effect pattern setting process is a process that is performed when a variable effect pattern of the effect pattern for subjugation reach is set by the process of step S1634 in FIG. This is a process for determining the flow in which each of the constituent performances should proceed. This subjugation performance pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 76.

Following the process of step S167, the sub CPU 91 executes a chance production pattern setting process (step S168). This chance effect pattern setting process is a process for determining whether or not to execute the above-mentioned chance effect based on FIGS. 23 and 24, and if so, determining what effect pattern to use. be. This chance effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 77.

Following the process of step S168, the sub CPU 91 executes a suggestive effect pattern setting process (step S169). This suggestion effect pattern setting process determines whether or not to execute the above-mentioned suggestion effect (low suggestion effect or high suggestion effect) based on FIGS. 23 and 24, and if so, which suggestion effect to execute. This is the process for determining the This suggestion effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 78.

Following the process of step S169, the sub CPU 91 executes a performance pattern setting process for the first change performance/related performance (step S173). This first change effect/related effect effect pattern setting process determines whether or not to execute the above-described first change effect and related effect based on FIGS. This is a process for determining whether to execute with such a production pattern. The performance pattern setting process for the first change performance/related performance will be described in detail later based on FIG. 79.

Following the process of step S173, the sub CPU 91 executes a performance pattern setting process for the second change performance/foreshadowing performance (step S174). This performance pattern setting process for the second change performance and foreshadowing performance determines whether or not to execute the foreshadowing performance and the second change performance described above based on FIGS. 30 to 35, and if it is determined to execute, This is a process for determining what kind of performance pattern is to be executed. The performance pattern setting process for the second change performance/foreshadowing performance will be described in detail later based on FIG. 80.

Following the process of step S174, the sub CPU 91 executes a production pattern setting process for special button production (step S177). In this special button performance performance pattern setting process, the variable performance pattern regarding the special button performance (special button repeated press performance or special button single press performance) described above based on FIGS. 40 to 45 is set in the process of step S1633 in FIG. This is a process for setting a special button performance pattern when the button is pressed. The performance pattern setting process for this special button performance will be described in detail later based on FIG. 81.

Following the process of step S177, the sub CPU 91 executes a production pattern setting process for a sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press production (step S178). This production pattern setting process for the sub-liquid crystal linked button repeated press effect determines whether or not to execute the sub-liquid crystal linked button repeated press effect described above based on FIGS. This is a process for determining whether to execute a performance pattern. The production pattern setting process for this sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press production will be described in detail later based on FIG. 82.

Following the process of step S178, the sub CPU 91 executes another preview performance pattern setting process (step S171). Other advance notice performance pattern setting processing includes each advance notice performance for which a performance pattern is set by the process of steps S165 to S174, step S177, and step S178 illustrated in FIG. This is a process for setting a performance pattern for a preview performance different from the preview performance for which this is set. Other preview performance pattern setting processing is performed in the same manner as the conventional processing for setting performance patterns for existing preview performances, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Following the processing in step S171, the sub CPU 91 executes performance pattern setting processing for stage change performance and expected performance (step S176). This stage change performance/expected performance pattern setting process determines whether or not to execute the above-mentioned stage change performance and expected performance based on FIGS. This is a process for determining whether to execute a performance pattern. The performance pattern setting process for this stage change performance/expected performance will be described in detail later based on FIG. 83.

Following the process of step S176, the sub CPU 91 executes related effect pattern setting process (step S172). This related effect pattern setting process determines whether or not to execute each of the related effects described above based on FIGS. 14 to 16, and if so, determines what type of effect pattern to use to execute the related effects. This is the process to do so. This related effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 84.

[Special cut-in effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 74 is a detailed flowchart of the special cut-in effect pattern setting process in step S165 of FIG. Following the variable effect pattern setting process of step S163 in FIG. 71, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of special cut-in effect pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG.

The sub CPU 91 first obtains a special cut-in effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1650). This special cut-in effect random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the above-mentioned special cut-in based on FIGS. 12 and 13, and is incremented by 1 every time the above-mentioned random number update process is performed. Ru. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state as a special cut-in effect random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93.

Next, the sub CPU 91 executes a special cut-in lottery (step S1651). The sub ROM 92 stores a random number (winning value) to be compared with the special cut-in effect random number, and the sub CPU 91 stores the special cut-in effect random number acquired and stored in the process of step S1650 in the sub ROM 92. It is determined whether or not to execute a special cut-in based on whether the winning value matches any of the random numbers (winning values).

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 stores a random number for jackpot (winning value) and a random number for loss (winning value) as the above-mentioned random number (winning value). There is. When the sub CPU 91 specifies that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "jackpot" based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 changes the obtained and stored special cut-in effect random number to the above-mentioned. Compare with the random value for jackpot (winning value). On the other hand, if it is determined that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "loss" based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, the obtained and stored special cut-in effect random number is used for the above-mentioned loss. Compare with the random value (winning value).

It should be noted that the sub ROM 92 stores more random numbers as random numbers for jackpots (winning values) than random numbers for loses (winning values). For this reason, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is "jackpot", it is likely to be decided to execute the special cut-in, and conversely, " If it is a "loss", executing a special cut-in makes it difficult to determine.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute a special cut-in based on the lottery result in step S1651 (step S1652). Here, if it is determined that the special cut-in is not to be executed (step S1652: NO), a series of special cut-in effect pattern setting processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the character standby effect pattern setting process of step S166, which will be described later. It will be done.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines to execute a special cut-in (step S1652: YES), it executes a special cut-in effect pattern selection process (step S1653). The special cut-in in this embodiment has one type of effect, but is a preview effect whose execution timing is variable. Therefore, in step S1653, the sub CPU 91 executes processing for selecting the special cut-in execution timing.

For example, when a variable production pattern that directly develops from normal reach to SPSP reach is set by the process of step S1634 in FIG. Select as the execution timing of the input. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 12(H), (L), and (M), it is possible to generate a special cut-in at a predetermined timing immediately after the normal reach ends and before it develops into the SPSP reach. becomes.

In addition, in this embodiment, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 13(A), the special cut-in is not limited to the timing immediately after the normal reach ends, but also during character reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach. A configuration that is executable is adopted. For this reason, if the sub CPU 91 determines to execute a special cut-in when a variable effect pattern different from a variable effect pattern that directly develops from normal reach to SPSP reach is selected, the sub CPU 91 performs a special cut-in at a predetermined timing during character reach, SP reach One of the predetermined timing during SPSP reach and the predetermined timing during SPSP reach is selected as the special cut-in execution timing.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the special cut-in effect pattern selection process in this way, the sub CPU 91 stores information indicating the result of the selection process (execution timing of the selected special cut-in) in the sub RAM 93 as special cut-in effect pattern setting information. It is stored in a predetermined area (step S1654). This special cut-in performance pattern setting information is included in the variable performance start command and transmitted to the image and sound control board 100, so that the special cut-in is executed at the execution timing selected by the sub CPU 91.

[Character standby performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 75 is a detailed flowchart of the character standby performance pattern setting process in step S166 of FIG. Following the special cut-in effect pattern setting process of step S165 in FIG. 73, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of character standby effect pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG.

The sub CPU 91 first obtains a character standby effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1660). This character standby effect random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the character standby effect described above based on FIGS. 12 and 13, and is incremented by 1 every time the random number update process described above is performed. . On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state as a character standby effect random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93.

Next, the sub CPU 91 executes a character standby effect lottery (step S1661). The sub ROM 92 stores a random number (winning value) to be compared with the character standby effect random number, and the sub CPU 91 stores the character standby effect random number acquired and stored in the process of step S1660 in the sub ROM 92. It is determined whether or not to execute the character standby performance based on whether or not the character matches any of the random numbers (winning values).

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 contains random numbers (winning values) for jackpots and random numbers (winning values) for losers as the above-mentioned random numbers (winning values) related to the character standby effect lottery. is remembered. When the sub CPU 91 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 uses the obtained and stored character standby effect random number to generate the jackpot. Compare with the random value (winning value) for On the other hand, if it is determined that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "lose" based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, the acquired and stored character standby effect random number is Compare with random number (winning value).

In addition, the sub ROM 92 stores more random numbers (winning values) for jackpots related to the character standby effect lottery than random values (winning values) for losers related to the character standby effect lottery. . For this reason, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is "Jackpot", it is likely to be decided to execute the character standby performance, and conversely, " If it is a "loss", it is difficult to make a decision by executing the character standby effect.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the character standby effect based on the lottery result in step S1661 (step S1662). Here, if it is determined that the character standby performance is not to be performed (step S1662: NO), a series of character standby performance pattern setting processing is completed, and the process proceeds to subjugation performance pattern setting processing in step S167, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the character standby effect (step S1662: YES), the special cut-in effect pattern information is set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S1654 in FIG. It is determined whether or not to perform cut-in (step S1663). Here, if it is determined that the special cut-in is to be executed (step S1663: YES), the character standby effect pattern selection table for with special cut-in is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1664). Conversely, if it is determined that the special cut-in is not to be executed (step S1663: NO), the character standby effect pattern selection table for no special cut-in is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1665).

Then, the sub CPU 91 selects one performance pattern for the character standby performance by reading the performance pattern from the character standby performance pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 through the process of step S1664 or the process of step S1665. Performance pattern selection processing is executed (step S1666). Then, information indicating the selection result in step S1666 is stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 as performance pattern setting information for character standby performance (step S1667). This character standby effect pattern setting information is included in the variable effect start command and transmitted to the image and sound control board 100, whereby the character standby effect is executed in the effect pattern selected by the sub CPU 91.

[Suppression production pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 76 is a detailed flowchart of the subjugation performance pattern setting process in step S167 of FIG. 73. Following the character standby performance pattern setting process in step S166 in FIG. 73, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of subjugation performance pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG. This subjugation effect pattern setting process is a process for determining in what flow each effect shown in FIG. 17 should proceed in the symbol variation in which the above-mentioned subjugation reach is performed.

The sub CPU 91 first determines whether or not to execute the subjugation reach based on whether or not a variable production pattern of the production symbol related to the subjugation reach has been set by the process of step S1634 in FIG. 72 (step S1670). . Here, if it is determined that the subjugation reach is not to be executed (step S1670: NO), the subjugation effect pattern setting process is completed and the process proceeds to the chance effect pattern setting process (see FIG. 73) of step S168, which will be described later. .

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the subjugation reach (step S1670: YES), the sub CPU 91 uses the symbol setting information included in the variation start command related to the second special symbol determination received from the main control board 80. , it is determined whether or not the determination result of the current second special symbol determination is "10R probability variation" (step S1671). Here, if it is determined that the determination result of the current second special symbol determination is "10R probability variation" (step S1671: YES), a performance pattern selection process for subjugation/pursuit continuous hit production for 10R probability variation is executed (step S1672 ).

In this embodiment, as described above based on FIG. 17, "variable performance pattern A" and "variable performance pattern B" are prepared regarding the flow of each performance that constitutes the subjugation reach. Here, the "variable effect pattern A" is a variable effect pattern in which the effect progresses from a subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (see FIG. 17(C)) to a subjugation success effect (see FIG. 17(E)). On the other hand, "variable effect pattern B" changes from the effect of promoting the repeated pressing of the subjugation button (see Figure 17(C)) to the effect of promoting failure in subjugation (see Fig. 17(G)) and the effect of promoting repeated pressing of the pursuit button (see Fig. 17(K)). This is a variable effect pattern in which the effect progresses to the second pursuit success effect (see FIG. 17(O)).

Here, when comparing "variable performance pattern A" and "variable performance pattern B", "variable performance pattern B" has a larger number of performances that make up the subjugation reach, so "variable performance pattern A" It is clear that the overall performance takes longer than the execution of the subjugation reach.

In this embodiment, as a variation pattern of the second special symbol when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "10R probability variation", there is a variation pattern A in which the variation time is the first time, and a variation pattern A in which the variation time is the first time. A variation pattern B, which is longer than , is prepared. In the process of step S1672, the sub CPU 91 specifies the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern setting information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80. Then, when the specified variation pattern is variation pattern A, "variation effect pattern A" is selected, and when the specified variation pattern is variation pattern B, "variation effect pattern B" is selected.

In addition, when the subjugation reach progresses with "variable effect pattern A", as described above based on FIG. The probability that the subjugation success performance (see FIG. 17(E)) and the 10R probability variable jackpot notification performance (see FIG. 17(F)) will be executed in response to the operation of the performance button 36 is 100%. On the other hand, when the subjugation reach progresses with "variable effect pattern B", after the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (see Fig. 17(C)), instead of the subjugation success effect (see Fig. 17(E)), It is necessary to execute a subjugation failure effect (see FIG. 17(G)). For this reason, when the subjugation reach progresses in "variable effect pattern B", the second effect button 36 is operated during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (see FIG. 17(C)). Therefore, the subjugation success effect (see FIG. 17(E)) and the 10R probability-variable jackpot notification effect (see FIG. 17(F)) are never executed.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the determination result of the current second special symbol determination is not "10R probability variation" (step S1671: NO), the sub CPU 91 determines whether the determination result of the current second special symbol determination is "3R probability variation". It is determined whether or not (step S1673). Here, if it is determined that the determination result of the second special symbol determination this time is "3R probability variation" (step S1673: YES), a production pattern selection process for subjugation/pursuit continuous hit production for 3R probability variation is executed (step S1674 ). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when executing the subjugation reach in response to winning the "3R Kokuhen", from the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (see FIG. 17(C)) to the subjugation failure presentation (see FIG. 17(C)) A variable performance pattern in which the performance progresses to the first pursuit success performance (see Figure 17(M)) and the 3R guaranteed variable jackpot notification performance via the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance (see Figure 17(K)) Only C is available. Therefore, the sub CPU 91 executes the process of selecting this variable effect pattern C in step S1674.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the determination result of the current second special symbol determination is not "3R fixed variation" (step S1673: NO), that is, if it is a "lose", the sub CPU 91 controls the subjugation/pursuit continuous hit performance for the loser. Performance pattern selection processing is executed (step S1675).

For the case where the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment at the start of the variation is a "lose" and the subjugation reach is executed, a "variable performance pattern D" and a "variable performance pattern E" are prepared. "Variable performance pattern D" is from the suppression button repeated press promotion effect (see Figure 17 (C)) to the failure notification effect (see Figure 17 (I)) via the suppression failure effect (see Figure 17 (G)). This is a variable performance pattern in which the performance progresses. "Variable performance pattern E" is a process that goes from the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (see Figure 17 (C)) to the subjugation failure effect (see Figure 17 (G)) and the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect (see Figure 17 (K)). This is a variable performance pattern in which the performance progresses to a pursuit failure performance (see FIG. 17(Q)) and a loss notification performance (see FIG. 17(R)).

In this way, since the "variable performance pattern D" and the "variable performance pattern E" are prepared for the case where the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "lose" and the subjugation reach is executed, the sub CPU 91 , in the process of step S1675, "variable effect pattern D" or "variable effect pattern E" is selected.

After selecting a performance pattern for the subjugation/pursuit continuous hit performance through the process of step S1672, step S1674, or step S1675, the sub CPU 91 uses information indicating the selected performance pattern to produce the subjugation/pursuit continuous hit performance. It is set in the sub RAM 93 as pattern setting information (step S1676). The performance pattern setting information for this subjugation/pursuit continuous hit performance is included in the variable performance start command together with the information indicating the variable performance pattern of the performance symbol related to the subjugation reach set by the process of step S1634 in FIG. 72, and is included in the image sound control The information is transmitted to the board 100, and as a result, each performance constituting the subjugation reach will proceed according to the performance pattern set by the sub CPU 91.

Note that, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 17, in the subjugation reach, the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (see FIG. 17(C)) is always executed. Therefore, in the process of step S1676, performance pattern setting information including information indicating the valid period of the subjugation button continuous press promotion performance is set. Additionally, the performance progresses from the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (see Figure 17(C)) to the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect (see Figure 17(K)) via the subjugation failure effect (see Figure 17(G)). When the variable performance pattern is selected, performance pattern setting information is set which further includes information indicating the validity period of the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the determination result of the second special symbol determination may be "3R normal" (see FIG. 6(C)), but if the determination result is "3R normal" subjugation reach will not be executed. Therefore, in the subjugation performance pattern setting process shown in FIG. 76, the performance pattern selection process for the 3R normal subjugation/pursuit continuous hit performance is not executed.

[Chance performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 77 is a detailed flowchart of the chance effect pattern setting process in step S168 of FIG. Following the subjugation effect pattern setting process in step S167 of FIG. 73, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of chance effect pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG. This chance performance pattern setting process is a process for setting the performance pattern of the chance performance described above based on FIG. 23.

The sub CPU 91 first obtains a chance effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1680). This chance effect random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the above-mentioned chance effect based on FIGS. 23 and 24, and is incremented by 1 every time the above-described random number update process is performed. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state as a chance production random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93.

Next, the sub CPU 91 executes a chance effect lottery (step S1681). The sub ROM 92 stores a random number value (winning value) to be compared with the chance effect random number, and the sub CPU 91 determines whether the chance effect random number acquired and stored in the process of step S1680 is one of the numbers stored in the sub ROM 92. Based on whether the random number value (winning value) matches or not, it is determined whether or not to execute the chance performance.

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 stores a random number for jackpot (winning value) and a random number for loss (winning value) as the above-mentioned random number (winning value). There is. When the sub CPU 91 identifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 uses the obtained and stored chance production random number for the jackpot. Compare with the random value (winning value). On the other hand, if it is determined that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "lose" based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, the obtained and stored chance effect random number is Compare with the numerical value (winning value).

The sub ROM 92 stores a larger number of random numbers as jackpot random numbers (winning values) related to the chance performance than random numbers for loses (winning values). For this reason, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot", it is likely to be decided to execute a chance performance, and conversely, it is likely to be decided to execute a "loss". ”, it is difficult to make a decision if the chance effect is executed.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the chance effect based on the lottery result in step S1681 (step S1682). Here, if it is determined that the chance effect is not to be executed (step S1682: NO), the series of chance effect pattern setting processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the suggestion effect pattern setting process of step S169, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the chance effect (step S1682: YES), it executes the effect pattern selection process for the chance effect (step S1683). The chance performance in this embodiment has only one type of performance, and is a preview performance whose execution timing is also fixed. Therefore, in step S1683, the sub CPU 91 executes a process of selecting one performance pattern prepared for the chance performance.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the performance pattern selection process for the chance performance in this manner, it sets information indicating the selection result in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 as performance pattern setting information for the chance performance (step S1684). The performance pattern setting information for this chance performance is included in the variable performance start command and transmitted to the image and sound control board 100, whereby the sub CPU 91 executes the chance performance in which the performance pattern is set.

[Suggestive performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 78 is a detailed flowchart of the suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S169 of FIG. 73. Following the chance effect pattern setting process in step S168 of FIG. 73, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of suggestion effect pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG.

The sub CPU 91 first obtains a suggested effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1690). This suggestion effect random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the above-mentioned suggestion effect based on FIGS. 23 and 24, and is incremented by 1 every time the above-described random number update process is performed. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state as a suggested performance random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93.

Next, by the process of step S1684 in FIG. 77, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not chance production pattern setting information for chance production is set in the sub RAM 93 during the variable display of the current first special symbol. is executed (step S1691).

As described above based on FIGS. 23 and 24, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a low suggestion performance can be combined within the same fluctuation as a chance performance, whereas a high suggestion performance can be combined within the same fluctuation as a chance performance. A configuration is adopted in which there is no possibility of compounding. Therefore, if it is determined that the chance effect will be executed during the current variable display of the first special symbol (step S1691: YES), in order to avoid performing the process for executing the highly suggestive effect, The process advances to step S1699, which will be described later.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the chance performance is not to be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol this time (step S1691: NO), the sub CPU 91 conducts a high suggestion performance lottery to determine whether or not to execute the high suggestion performance. (Step S1692). The sub ROM 92 stores a random value (winning value) to be compared with the suggestion effect random number regarding the highly suggestive effect, and the sub CPU 91 stores the suggestion effect random number acquired and stored in the process of step S1690 in the sub ROM 92. Based on whether or not it matches any of the stored random numbers (winning values), it is determined whether or not to execute the highly suggestive performance.

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 contains random numbers (winning values) for jackpots and random numbers (winning values) for losses as the above-mentioned random numbers (winning values) related to the highly suggestive drawing lottery. is remembered. When the sub CPU 91 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 uses the acquired and stored suggestion effect random number for the jackpot. Compare with the random value (winning value). On the other hand, if it is determined that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "lose" based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, the acquired and stored suggestion effect random number is used as the random number for the above-mentioned loss. Compare with the numerical value (winning value).

In addition, the sub ROM 92 stores more random values (winning values) for jackpots related to the high suggestion effect lottery than random values (winning values) for losers related to the high suggestion effect lottery. . For this reason, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot", it is likely to be decided to perform a highly suggestive performance, and conversely, " If it is a "loss", it is difficult to make a decision by performing a highly suggestive performance.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the highly suggestive performance based on the lottery result in step S1692 (step S1693). Here, if it is determined that the highly suggestive effect is not to be executed (step S1693: NO), the process proceeds to step S1699, as in the case where it is determined in step S1691 that the chance effect is to be executed.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the highly suggestive effect (step S1693: YES), based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80, the first special symbol of this time is It is determined whether the determination result is a "jackpot" (step S1694). Here, if it is determined that it is a "jackpot" (step S1694: YES), the production pattern selection table for the highly suggestive production for jackpot is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1695). Conversely, if it is determined that it is not a "big hit" (step S1694: NO), the effect pattern selection table for the highly suggestive effect for loses is read out from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1696).

Then, the sub CPU 91 refers to the performance pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93, executes a highly suggestive performance pattern selection process to select a highly suggestive performance pattern (step S1697), and high-levels information indicating the selection result. It is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 as suggested effect pattern setting information (step S1698). This highly suggestive performance pattern setting information is included in the variable performance start command and transmitted to the image and sound control board 100, whereby the highly suggestive performance is executed using the performance pattern selected by the sub CPU 91.

Although not shown in the figure, in the production pattern selection table for the high suggestion production for jackpots, each of the high suggestion productions of the first high suggestion production, the second high suggestion production, and the third high suggestion production , different numbers of random numbers are associated with each other, and when arranged in order from the least number of associated random numbers to the highest number, the results are the first highly suggestive effect, the second highly suggestive effect, and the third highly suggestive effect. The order of performance is highly suggestive.

Although not shown in the figure, in the production pattern selection table for the high suggestion production for losing, each of the high suggestion productions of the first high suggestion production, the second high suggestion production, and the third high suggestion production , different numbers of random numbers are associated with each other, and when arranged in order from the least number of associated random numbers to the highest number, the results are 3rd highly suggestive performance, 2nd highly suggestive performance, and 1st highly suggestive performance. The order of performance is highly suggestive.

In the process of step S1697, the sub CPU 91 determines the type of highly suggestive effect (first highly suggestive effect, second highly suggestive effect, or The first highly suggestive effect is selected by reading out the third highly suggestive effect) from the effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93.

In addition, in this embodiment, regarding the distribution of random numbers, there are three types, since the performance pattern selection table for the highly suggestive performance for jackpots and the performance pattern selection table for the highly suggestive performance for loses have the above-mentioned characteristics. When the highly suggestive performances are arranged in order of jackpot reliability from low to high, the order is the first highly suggestive performance, the second highly suggestive performance, and the third highly suggestive performance (see FIG. 24).

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the chance production will be executed during the current variable display of the first special symbol (step S1691: YES), or if it determines that the highly suggestive production will not be executed (step S1693: NO). , performs the following processing regarding low suggestion effects.

That is, the sub CPU 91 performs a low suggestion effect lottery (step S1699). The sub ROM 92 stores a random value (winning value) to be compared with the suggestion effect random number regarding the low suggestion effect, and the sub CPU 91 stores the suggestion effect random number acquired and stored in the process of step S1690 in the sub ROM 92. It is determined whether or not to execute a low suggestion performance based on whether or not it matches any of the stored random numbers (winning values).

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 contains random numbers (winning values) for jackpots and random numbers (winning values) for losers as the above-mentioned random numbers (winning values) related to the low suggestion lottery. is remembered. When the sub CPU 91 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 uses the acquired and stored suggestion effect random number for the jackpot. Compare with the random value (winning value). On the other hand, if it is determined that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "lose" based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, the acquired and stored suggestion effect random number is used as the random number for the above-mentioned loss. Compare with the numerical value (winning value).

In addition, the sub ROM 92 stores more random numbers as random numbers (winning values) for jackpots related to the low suggestion effect lottery than random numbers (winning values) for losers related to the low suggestion effect lottery. . For this reason, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot", it is difficult to determine that a low suggestion performance will be executed; If it is a "loss", it is more likely to be decided to perform a low suggestion effect.

In this way, a low-suggestive performance is more likely to be executed in the case of a “lose” and difficult to be executed in the case of a “big hit,” so as illustrated in FIG. It is a very low preview performance that is difficult to lead to a jackpot.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 78, after executing the low suggestion effect lottery in step S1699, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the low suggestion effect based on the lottery result (step S1700). Here, if it is determined that the low suggestion effect is not to be executed (step S1700: NO), the series of suggestion effect pattern setting processing is completed and the process proceeds to step S173 in FIG. 73.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the low suggestion effect (step S1700: YES), based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80, the first special symbol of this time is It is determined whether the determination result is a "jackpot" (step S1701). Here, if it is determined that it is a "big hit" (step S1701: YES), the production pattern selection table for the low suggestion production for jackpot is read out from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1702). Conversely, if it is determined that it is not a "big hit" (step S1701: NO), the performance pattern selection table for the low suggestion performance for loses is read out from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1703).

Then, the sub CPU 91 refers to the effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93, executes a low suggestion performance pattern selection process to select a performance pattern of low suggestion performance (step S1704), and stores information indicating the selection result. It is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 as suggested effect pattern setting information (step S1705). This low suggestion performance pattern setting information is included in the variable performance start command and transmitted to the image and sound control board 100, whereby the low suggestion performance is executed with the performance pattern selected by the sub CPU 91.

Although not shown in the figure, in the performance pattern selection table for low-suggestion performances for jackpots, each of the low-suggestion performances of the first low-suggestion performance, the second low-suggestion performance, and the third low-suggestion performance , different numbers of random numbers are associated with each other, and when arranged in order from the least number of associated random numbers to the highest number, the first low suggestion effect, the second low suggestion effect, and the third low suggestion effect are arranged. The order of performance is low suggestive.

Although not shown in the figure, in the performance pattern selection table for the low-suggestion performance for losing, each of the low-suggestion performances of the first low-suggestion performance, the second low-suggestion performance, and the third low-suggestion performance , different numbers of random numbers are associated with each other, and when arranged in order from the least number of associated random numbers to the highest number, the results are: 3rd low suggestion effect, 2nd low suggestion effect, 1st low suggestion effect. The order of performance is low suggestive.

In the process of step S1704, the sub CPU 91 determines the type of low suggestion effect (first low suggestion effect, second low suggestion effect, or The first low-suggestive performance is selected by reading out the third low-suggestive performance) from the performance pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93.

In addition, in this embodiment, regarding the distribution of random numbers, there are three types, since the performance pattern selection table for low suggestion performance for jackpot and the performance pattern selection table for low suggestion performance for loss have the above characteristics. When the low-suggestion performances are arranged in order of jackpot reliability from low to high, the order is the first low-suggestion performance, the second low-suggestion performance, and the third low-suggestion performance (see FIG. 24).

[Performance pattern setting processing of first change performance and related performance by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 79 is a detailed flowchart of the production pattern setting process of the first change production/related production in step S173 of FIG. 73. In order to execute and control the first change effect and related effects described above based on FIGS. 28 and 29, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of steps illustrated in FIG. 79 following the suggested effect pattern setting process in step S169 of FIG. A performance pattern setting process for the first change performance/related performance is executed.

The sub CPU 91 first obtains the first change effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1730). This first change performance random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the first change performance described above based on FIGS. 28 and 29, and is incremented by "1" every time the random number update process described above is performed. be done. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state as the first change effect random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the first change effect random number obtained by the process of step S1730 matches any of the predetermined random values stored in the sub ROM 92. It is determined whether or not to execute (step S1731). Here, if it is determined that the first change effect is not to be executed (step S1731: NO), the effect pattern setting process for the first change effect/related effect is completed, and the process proceeds to step S174 (see FIG. 73). It will be done.

When the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the first change performance (step S1731: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the SP reach will directly develop beyond the SP reach (step S1732). Specifically, based on the information indicating the variable performance pattern set by the process of step S163 in FIG. (See Figure 8 (J)) or SPSP reach (See Figure 8 (K)) Based on whether or not a variation effect pattern that directly develops is set, it is determined whether or not it will develop directly beyond SP reach. .

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the SP reach will not directly develop beyond SP reach (step S1732: NO), the sub CPU 91 indicates the performance pattern of the first change performance (see FIGS. 28(A) and 28(B)) that ends with the first stage performance. The information is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 as setting information of the first change effect (step S1733).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub CPU 91 will directly develop to SP reach or higher (step S1732: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not it will directly develop to SP reach based on the information indicating the above-mentioned fluctuating effect pattern (step S1734). ). Here, if it is determined that it will develop directly into SP reach (step S1734: YES), performance pattern selection processing for the second stage related performance is executed (step S1735). In other words, the second-stage related effect (jackpot reliability: about 9%) that displays the text "The battle is near!" in blue, as described above based on FIGS. 28(D) and FIG. A second-stage related effect (jackpot reliability: about 18%) that displays the words ``Zo!'' in red.

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 stores a table for selecting a performance pattern for the second stage related performance. As this table, a second-stage related performance pattern selection table for jackpots and a second-stage related performance pattern selection table for loses are prepared. In the process of step S1735, the sub CPU 91 first determines whether the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" based on the fluctuation start command related to the first special symbol determination received from the main control board 80. to identify. Here, if it is determined that it is a "jackpot", the second stage related performance pattern selection table for the jackpot is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93, and it is determined that it is not a "jackpot", that is, a "loss". If it is specified that the second stage related effect pattern selection table for losing is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93.

In the second-stage related performance pattern selection table for jackpots and the second-stage related performance pattern selection table for loses, the types of second-stage related performances (second-stage related performances that display blue characters, or The second stage related performance (displaying red characters), the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the random number value to be compared with the first change performance random number are associated. After setting one of the second-stage related effect pattern selection tables, the sub CPU 91 selects the first special symbol variation pattern specified based on the above variation start command and the first special symbol variation pattern obtained by the process of step S1730 above. 1 change performance random number and the type of the second stage related performance corresponding to the second stage related performance pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 by reading out the second stage related performance that displays blue characters; Select one of the second-stage related effects that display red characters.

A detailed explanation of the structure of the second-stage related performance pattern selection table for jackpots and the second-stage related performance pattern selection table for loses will be omitted, but please refer to the second-stage related performance pattern selection table for jackpots. In this case, the second stage related performance that displays red characters is more likely to be selected than the second stage related performance that displays blue characters. In this case, the second stage related performance that displays blue characters is more likely to be selected than the second stage related performance that displays red characters. Furthermore, as the variation time of the variation pattern of the first special symbol becomes longer, the second stage related production that displays red letters is more likely to be selected than the second stage related production that displays blue letters; As the variation time of the variation pattern of one special symbol becomes shorter, the second stage related performance that displays blue characters is more likely to be selected than the second stage related performance that displays red characters.

Based on the selection result in step S1735, the sub CPU 91 ends the first change performance with a second stage performance that is developed from the first stage performance, as shown in FIGS. 28(A), (C), and (D). Then, the information indicating the performance pattern of the first change performance and related performance to execute the second stage related performance selected in the process of step S1735 is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 as setting information of the first change performance and related performance. The area is set (step S1736).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that there is no direct development to SP reach (step S1734: NO), the sub CPU 91 executes performance pattern selection processing for the third stage related performance (step S1737). In other words, the third stage related effect (jackpot reliability: about 26%) that displays the words "Final Battle!!" in red, as described above based on FIGS. 28(F) and FIG. 29, and the "Final Battle!!" !!'' in gold color (Jackpot reliability: approximately 41%).

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 stores a table for selecting a production pattern for the third stage related production. As this table, a third stage related performance pattern selection table for jackpots and a third stage related performance pattern selection table for loses are prepared. In the process of step S1737, the sub CPU 91 first determines whether the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" based on the fluctuation start command related to the first special symbol determination received from the main control board 80. to identify. Here, if it is determined that it is a "jackpot", the third stage related performance pattern selection table for the jackpot is read out from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93, and it is determined that it is not a "jackpot", that is, a "loss". If it is determined that the third stage related effect pattern selection table for losing is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93.

In the third-stage related performance pattern selection table for jackpots and the third-stage related performance pattern selection table for loses, the types of third-stage related performances (third-stage related performances that display red characters, or The third stage related effect of displaying golden letters), the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the random number value to be compared with the first variation effect random number are associated with each other. After setting one of the third stage related performance pattern selection tables, the sub CPU 91 selects the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified based on the above variation start command and the first one obtained by the process of step S1730 above. 1 change performance random number and the type of the third stage related performance corresponding to the third stage related performance pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93, the third stage related performance that displays red characters, Select either the third stage related effect that displays golden letters.

A detailed explanation of the structure of the third stage related performance pattern selection table for jackpots and the third stage related performance pattern selection table for losses will be omitted, but please refer to the third stage related performance pattern selection table for jackpots. In this case, the 3rd stage related performance that displays gold characters is more likely to be selected than the 3rd stage related performance that displays red characters, and conversely, the 3rd stage related performance pattern selection table for losers is more likely to be selected. In this case, the third stage related performance that displays red characters is more likely to be selected than the third stage related performance that displays gold characters. Furthermore, as the variation time of the variation pattern of the first special symbol becomes longer, the third stage related production that displays golden letters is more likely to be selected than the third stage related production that displays red letters; As the variation time of the variation pattern of one special symbol becomes shorter, the third stage related performance that displays red characters is more likely to be selected than the third stage related performance that displays golden characters.

Based on the selection result in step S1737, the sub CPU 91 changes the first change performance from the first stage performance to the second stage performance, as shown in FIGS. The information indicating the first change performance and the performance pattern of the related performance, which ends with the third stage performance developed through step S1737 and executes the third stage related performance selected in the process of step S1737, is added to the first change performance. and set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for related effects (step S1738).

The setting information of the first change effect (and related effects) set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S1733, the process of step S1736, or the process of step S1738 is included in the variable effect start command, and is Through the command transmission process in S40, the command is transmitted to the image-acoustic control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, and processing based on the setting information is executed on these control boards. As a result, the first change effect (and related effects) described above based on FIGS. 28 and 29 will be realized.

[Performance pattern setting process of second change performance/premonition performance by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 80 is a detailed flowchart of the performance pattern setting process for the second change performance/foreshadowing performance in step S174 of FIG. 73. In order to execute and control the foreshadow effect and the second change effect described above based on FIGS. 30 to 35, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of second change effects illustrated in FIG. 80 following the process of step S173 in FIG. Executes performance pattern setting processing for performance and omen performance.

The sub CPU 91 first obtains the second change effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1740). This second change performance random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the second change performance described above based on FIGS. will be added. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time when the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination is received in the normal gaming state as the second change effect random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the second change effect random number obtained by the process of step S1740 matches any of the predetermined random numbers stored in the sub ROM 92, for example. It is determined whether or not to execute (step S1741). Here, if it is determined not to perform the second change effect (step S1741: NO), it is determined whether or not to perform the fake precursor effect (step S1742). As described above with reference to FIG. 32, the false precursor performance here refers to a precursor performance that includes a judge performance (see FIG. 32 (H)) that notifies that the second change performance will not be executed. That's true.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "lose" and a variation pattern for a false precursor production is selected as a variation pattern of the first special symbol, a false precursor production is performed. We are planning to carry out the following. Therefore, the sub CPU 91 determines the determination result of the current first special symbol determination and the first special symbol based on the information included in the fluctuation start command related to the first special symbol determination received from the main control board 80. Identify the variation pattern of and. The sub ROM 92 stores in advance information indicating a variation pattern for a fake precursor effect, and the sub CPU 91 similarly performs the same process when it is determined that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lost". Based on whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the identified first special symbol matches the fluctuation pattern for the false precursor performance indicated by the information stored in the sub ROM 92, it is determined whether or not to execute the false precursor performance. .

If the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the false precursor performance (step S1742: YES), it sets information indicating the performance pattern of the false precursor performance in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 as setting information for the false precursor performance (step S1743). In this way, the setting information for the false precursor effect set in the sub-RAM 93 is included in the variable effect start command and is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process in step S40 in FIG. and processing based on the setting information is executed on these control boards. As a result, the false omen effect described above based on FIG. 32 is realized.

When the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the second change production (step S1741: YES), the sub CPU 91 selects the current first special symbol based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80. It is determined whether the determination result is a "jackpot" (step S1744). Here, if it is determined that it is a jackpot (step S1744: YES), the effect pattern selection table of the second variation effect for the jackpot is read out from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1745). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot (step S1744: NO), the performance pattern selection table for the second variation performance for loses is read out from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1746).

When the sub CPU 91 sets the production pattern selection table of the second variation production for jackpot or loss in the sub RAM 93 through the process of step S1745 or the process of step S1746, it executes the second variation production pattern selection process ( Step S1747).

In the production pattern selection table for the second variation production for the jackpot and the performance pattern selection table for the second variation production for the loss, the performance pattern for the second variation production, the variation pattern for the first special symbol, and The two-change effect random number and the random number value to be compared are associated with each other. After setting the production pattern selection table for either one of the second variation productions, the sub CPU 91 selects the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified based on the above variation start command and the variation pattern obtained by the process of step S1740 above. By reading out the performance pattern of the second change performance corresponding to the second change performance random number from the performance pattern selection table of the second change performance set in the sub RAM 93, one performance pattern of the second change performance is selected. select.

The performance patterns of the second change performance in this embodiment include three performance patterns: a first performance pattern, a second performance pattern, and a third performance pattern. Here, the first performance pattern is a performance pattern that executes a first stage performance (see FIG. 30(F)) and a first stage end performance (see FIG. 30(G)). The second performance pattern is a performance that executes a first stage performance (see Figure 30 (F)), a second stage performance (see Figure 30 (H)), and a second stage end performance (see Figure 30 (I)). It's a pattern. The third performance pattern is 1st stage performance (see Figure 30 (F)), 2nd stage performance (see Figure 30 (H)), 3rd stage performance (see Figure 30 (J)), and 3rd stage end. This is a performance pattern for performing a performance (see FIG. 30(K)).

A detailed explanation of the structure of the production pattern selection table for the second variation production for a jackpot and the production pattern selection table for a second variation production for a loss will be omitted, but the performance pattern selection for the second variation production for a jackpot will be omitted. When the table is referred to, if the three performance patterns are arranged in order from the least likely to be selected to the most likely to be selected, the order will be the first performance pattern, the second performance pattern, and the third performance pattern. In addition, when referring to the performance pattern selection table for the second change performance for losing, if the above three performance patterns are arranged in order from the one that is difficult to select to the one that is easy to select, the third performance pattern, the second performance pattern, The order is the first production pattern.

Regarding the first performance pattern in which the second change performance ends at the first stage, the shorter the variation time of the first special symbol variation pattern, the more likely it is to be selected; There is a tendency that the longer the fluctuation time, the more difficult it is to be selected. In addition, regarding the third performance pattern in which the second change performance ends at the third stage of the upper limit, the shorter the variation time of the first special symbol variation pattern, the more difficult it is to be selected, and conversely, the variation of the first special symbol There is a tendency that the longer the variation time of a pattern, the more likely it is to be selected.

Based on the result of the second change effect pattern selection process in step S1747, the sub CPU 91 sets information indicating the effect pattern of the second change effect in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 as setting information of the second change effect (step S1748). The setting information of the second change effect set in the sub-RAM 93 by the process of step S1748 is included in the change effect start command, and is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board by the command transmission process in step S40 of FIG. 120, and processing based on the setting information is executed in these control boards. As a result, the second change effect described above based on FIGS. 30 to 35 is realized.

Following the process of step S1748, the sub CPU 91 obtains a precursor effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1750). This portent effect random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the portent effect described above based on FIGS. 30 to 35, and is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state as a precursor effect random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93.

Next, the sub CPU 91 executes a precursor effect based on whether or not the precursor effect random number obtained by the process of step S1750 matches any of the predetermined random numbers stored in the sub ROM 92, for example. It is determined whether or not (step S1751). The sub ROM 92 stores, as predetermined random numbers, a jackpot random number that is referenced in the case of a jackpot, and a loss random number that is referenced in the case of a loss. The sub CPU 91 specifies whether or not the determination result of the current first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80. Then, when it is specified that it is a "big hit", it is determined whether or not to execute the precursor performance based on whether the obtained precursor performance random number matches any of the random numbers for the jackpot. If it is determined that it is not a "big hit", it is determined whether or not to execute the precursor performance based on whether the obtained precursor performance random number matches any of the random numbers for loss.

In addition, in this embodiment, as random numbers for jackpots, more random numbers are stored in the sub ROM 92 than random numbers for loses. For this reason, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment this time is a "jackpot", it is easier to judge that the foreshadowing performance will be executed, compared to when it is a "loss". If it is determined in step S1751 that the omen effect is not to be executed (step S1751: NO), the process of setting the effect pattern of the series of second change effects and omen effects is completed, and the process proceeds to step S171 in FIG. 73. .

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the omen effect (step S1751: YES), based on the setting information of the second change effect set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S1748, the sub CPU 91 selects the current first special symbol. It is determined whether the second change effect executed during the variable display ends at the first stage (step S1752). Here, if it is determined that the second change performance ends at the first stage (step S1752: YES), the performance pattern selection table of the precursor performance for the end of the first stage is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1752: YES). S1753).

Further, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the second change effect does not end at the first stage (step S1752: NO), the sub CPU 91 performs the second change effect based on the setting information of the second change effect set in the sub RAM 93. It is determined whether or not the process ends at the second stage (step S1754). Here, if it is determined that the second change performance ends at the second stage (step S1754: YES), the performance pattern selection table for the precursor performance for the end of the second stage is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1754: YES). S1755). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the second change performance does not end at the second stage (step S1754: NO), that is, when the second change performance ends at the third stage, the sub CPU 91 provides a sign for the end of the third stage. The performance pattern selection table for the performance is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S1756).

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S1753, when the process of step S1755 is executed, or when the process of step S1756 is executed, the sub CPU 91 executes the foreshadow effect pattern selection process for selecting the effect pattern of the omen effect ( Step S1757).

The performance pattern selection table for the harbinger performance for the end of the first stage, the performance pattern selection table for the harbinger performance for the end of the second stage, and the performance pattern selection table for the harbinger performance for the end of the third stage are all as follows: Different random numbers are associated with each of the plurality of performance patterns of the precursor performance. In the process of step S1757, the sub CPU 91 selects a performance pattern associated with a random value that matches the random number of portent effects obtained in the process of step S1750, into a performance pattern selection table for portent effects set in the sub RAM 93. A performance pattern of the omen performance is selected by reading from the .

The sub CPU 91 sets information indicating the effect pattern of the omen effect in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the omen effect based on the result of the omen effect pattern selection process in step S1757 (step S1758). The setting information of the precursor effect set in the sub-RAM 93 by the process of step S1758 is included in the variable effect start command, and is sent to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process of step S40 in FIG. The settings information is transmitted, and processing based on the setting information is executed in these control boards. As a result, the foreshadow effects described above based on FIGS. 30 to 35 are realized.

(Production pattern of precursor production for the second change production that ends at the first stage)
Note that when the precursor performance pattern selection process of step S1757 is executed with reference to the performance pattern selection table for the first stage ending precursor performance set in the sub-RAM 93 in the process of step S1753, the final A ticket reversal effect that informs that the total number is one (see FIG. 30 (D)), and a judge effect that informs that the second change effect ends at the first stage (see FIG. 30 (E)). A performance pattern of a precursor performance consisting of , is selected.

FIG. 33(E) shows an example of how two 〇s are exposed due to the ticket reversal effect, but the ticket notifies that the final total number of 〇s is one. In the reversal performance, a performance display is performed to show that one "〇" is exposed due to the ticket reversal performance. Further, FIG. 33(F) shows an example of a success effect in which a happy character and the words "STEP 2!" are displayed as a judge effect. In the judge performance to notify that the change performance ends at the first stage, a performance display is performed to show that a successful performance is being executed by displaying a happy character and the words "STEP 1!".

Furthermore, as described above based on FIG. 30, etc., the precursor effects include a chance ticket acquisition effect (see FIG. 30(B)), a ticket increase/decrease effect (see FIG. 30(C)), and a ticket reversal effect (see FIG. 30(C)). (D)) and a judge performance (see FIG. 30(E)). When a performance pattern for a precursor performance is selected with reference to the performance pattern selection table for a precursor performance for the end of the first stage, a series of performances illustrated below are executed as a chance ticket acquisition performance, a ticket increase/decrease performance, and a ticket reversal performance. be done.

For example, after one ticket is acquired, an effect is performed in which the ticket does not increase or decrease, and the ticket is turned over to reveal one O. Further, for example, after one ticket is acquired, the number of tickets increases to two, and an effect is performed in which these tickets are turned over to reveal one O and one X. Further, for example, after three tickets are obtained, the number of tickets is reduced to one, and an effect is performed in which the ticket is turned over to reveal one O.

The performance patterns of the precursor performance illustrated here, which are executed when the second change performance ends at the first stage, are only part of the performance patterns, and when referring to the performance pattern selection table of the precursor performance for the end of the first stage In order to notify that the second change performance will end at the first stage, precursor performances will be executed in various performance patterns.

(Production pattern of precursor production for the second change production that ends at the second stage)
When the precursor performance pattern selection process of step S1757 is executed with reference to the performance pattern selection table of the precursor performance for the end of the second stage set in the sub-RAM 93 in the process of step S1755, the final total number of 〇 A ticket reversal effect that informs that there are two tickets (for example, see FIG. 33(E)) and a judge effect that alerts that the second change effect ends at the second stage (for example, see FIG. 33(F)) ), and a performance pattern of the omen performance is selected.

The foreshadowing performance in such a performance pattern is as explained based on FIG. 33, and FIG. 33(E) shows an example of how two "〇" are exposed due to the ticket reversal performance. Further, FIG. 33(F) shows an example of a success effect in which a happy character and the words "STEP 2!" are displayed as a judge effect.

When a performance pattern for a precursor performance is selected with reference to the performance pattern selection table for a precursor performance for the end of the second stage, a series of performances illustrated below are executed as a chance ticket acquisition performance, a ticket increase/decrease performance, and a ticket reversal performance. be done.

For example, after acquiring two tickets, an effect is performed in which the tickets do not increase or decrease, and these two tickets are turned over to reveal two O's. Further, for example, after one ticket is acquired, the number of tickets increases to two, and an effect is performed in which these two tickets are turned over to reveal two O's. Also, as illustrated in FIGS. 33(A) to (E), after three tickets are obtained, the number of tickets decreases to two, and these two tickets are turned over so that the two O's are exposed. A crocodile performance is performed. Further, for example, after acquiring one ticket, the number of tickets increases to three, and an effect is performed in which these three tickets are turned over to reveal two O's and one X.

The performance patterns of the precursor performance illustrated here, which are executed when the second change performance ends at the second stage, are only part of the performance patterns, and when referring to the performance pattern selection table of the precursor performance for the end of the second stage In order to notify that the second change performance will end at the second stage, precursor performances will be executed in various performance patterns.

(Production pattern of precursor production for the second change production that ends at the third stage)
If the foreshadowing effect pattern selection process of step S1757 is executed with reference to the effect pattern selection table of the foreshadowing effect for the end of the third stage set in the sub-RAM 93 in the process of step S1756, the final total number of 〇 A ticket reversal effect that informs that there are three (for example, see FIG. 34(E)), and a judge effect that alerts that the second change effect ends at the third stage (see FIG. 34(F)). A performance pattern of a precursor performance consisting of , is selected.

The foreshadowing performance in such a performance pattern is as explained based on Fig. 34, and Fig. 34(E) shows how three O's and one × are exposed by the ticket reversal effect. In addition, FIG. 34(F) shows an example of a success effect in which a happy character and the words "STEP 3 confirmed!" are displayed as a judge effect. .

When a performance pattern for a precursor performance is selected with reference to the performance pattern selection table for a precursor performance for the end of the third stage, a series of performances illustrated below are executed as a chance ticket acquisition performance, a ticket increase/decrease performance, and a ticket reversal performance. be done.

For example, as illustrated in FIGS. 34(A) to 34(E), after acquiring three tickets, the number of tickets increases to four, and these four tickets are reversed to form three O and one. A performance is performed in which x's are exposed. Further, for example, after acquiring one ticket, the number of tickets increases to three, and an effect is performed in which these three tickets are turned over to reveal three O's. Further, for example, after acquiring two tickets, the number of tickets increases to four, and an effect is performed in which these four tickets are turned over to reveal three O's and one X.

The performance patterns of the precursor performance illustrated here, which are executed when the second change performance ends at the third stage, are only part of the performance patterns, and when referring to the performance pattern selection table of the precursor performance for the end of the third stage In order to notify that the second change performance will end at the third stage, precursor performances will be executed in various performance patterns.

[Special button performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 81 is a detailed flowchart of the production pattern setting process for the special button production in step S177 of FIG. 73. In order to execute and control the special button effects described above based on FIGS. 40 to 45, the sub CPU 91, following the process of step S174 in FIG. 73, sets a series of special button effects effect patterns illustrated in FIG. 81. Execute processing.

The sub CPU 91 first determines whether or not to execute a special button effect (step S1770). As described above, when the main CPU 81 selects the variation pattern dedicated to the special button press effect as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 91 changes the variation pattern of the first special symbol by the process of step S1633 in FIG. At the beginning of the variable display, a blue chance effect (see Figure 8 (L)) is executed, and then at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, a hit notification effect (see Figure 8 (N)) or a loss notification effect (see Figure 8 Set a variable effect pattern for the variable effect to execute (see (O)). In addition, when the main CPU 81 selects a variation pattern dedicated to special button single press effect as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 91 performs the variation display of the first special symbol by the process of step S1633 in FIG. At the beginning of the game, a red chance effect (see Figure 8 (P)) is executed, and then at the end of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, a winning notification effect (see Figure 8 (N)) or a loss notification effect (see Figure 8 (C) ) Set the variable effect pattern for the variable effect to be executed.

For this reason, in step S1770, the sub CPU 91 determines which of the variable effect pattern for executing the special button repeated press effect and the variable effect pattern for executing the special button single press effect, by the process of step S1633. Based on whether or not one of the two buttons is set, it is determined whether or not to execute the special button effect. Here, if it is determined that the special button effect is not to be executed (step S1770: NO), that is, a variable effect pattern for executing the special button repeated press effect and a variable effect pattern for executing the special button single press effect. If neither is set, the effect pattern setting process for the special button effect is completed, and the process proceeds to step S178 in FIG. 73.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the special button press effect (step S1770: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether the set variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing the special button press effect. , it is determined whether the special button effect to be executed is a special button continuous press effect (step S1771). Here, if it is determined that the special button effect to be executed is a special button continuous press effect (step S1771: YES), for example, based on the symbol setting information included in the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, , it is determined whether or not the determination result of the current first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" (step S1772).

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the result of the current first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" (step S1772: YES), it executes a jackpot suggesting character selection process (step S1773). In the special button press effect in this embodiment, as described above based on FIGS. A character display effect suggesting a win or loss is executed to display the characters "Unfortunate" (see FIG. 43(B)) in the case of a loss. The sub ROM 92 stores jackpot suggestion characters "BONUS" and loss suggestion characters "unfortunate" as the winning/losing suggestion characters to be displayed in the special button press effect, and the sub CPU 91 stores the jackpot suggesting text "unfortunate" in the process of step S1773. A process is performed in which the characters "BONUS" are read from the sub ROM 92 and set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the determination result of the current first special symbol determination is not a "jackpot" (step S1772: NO), it executes a loss suggesting character selection process (step S1774). Specifically, a process is performed in which a character indicating a loss, ``unfortunate'', is read out from the sub-ROM 92 and set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S1773 or when the process of step S1774 is executed, the sub CPU 91 performs a special button press effect that includes information that can identify the winning/losing suggestion character selected by any of these processes. Information indicating the effect pattern is set in the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the special button continuous press effect (step S1775). By transmitting a variable effect start command including setting information for this special button press effect to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120), the special button press effect described above based on FIGS. 40 to 43 is realized. will be done.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the special button effect to be executed is not a special button repeated press effect (step S1771: NO), that is, if the special button effect to be executed is a special button single press effect, the sub CPU 91 performs step S1772. Similarly to the process, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the current first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" (step S1776).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the result of the current first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" (step S1776: YES), it executes a jackpot suggesting character selection process (step S1777). In the special button single-press effect in this embodiment, as described above based on FIGS. (I)) is executed, and in the case of a loss, a win/loss suggestion character display effect is executed that displays the character "X" (see FIG. 45(B)). The sub ROM 92 stores a jackpot suggestion character "Congratulations" and a loss suggestion character "x" as characters that suggest a jackpot to be displayed by a single press of a special button. A process is performed in which the suggested character ``ho'' is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the determination result of the current first special symbol determination is not a "jackpot" (step S1776: NO), it executes a loss suggesting character selection process (step S1779). Specifically, a process is performed in which a character "X" indicating a loss is read out from the sub-ROM 92 and set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S1777 or the process of step S1779, the sub CPU 91 performs a single press of a special button that includes information that can identify the winning/losing suggestion character selected by either of these processes. Information indicating the performance pattern of the performance is set in the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the special button single press performance (step S1778). By transmitting the variable effect start command including the setting information for this special button single press effect to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120), the special button single press effect described above based on FIGS. 44 and 45 is executed. It will be realized.

[Performance pattern setting process for sub-LCD interlocking button press performance using sub-control board 90]
FIG. 82 is a detailed flowchart of the effect pattern setting process for the sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press effect in step S178 of FIG. 73. In order to execute and control the sub-liquid crystal interlocking button continuous press effects described above based on FIGS. 46 to 50, the sub CPU 91, following the process of step S177 in FIG. 73, presses a series of sub-liquid crystal interlocking buttons illustrated in FIG. Executes performance pattern setting processing for continuous hit performance.

The sub CPU 91 first determines whether or not to execute the sub liquid crystal linked button press effect (step S1780). The sub ROM 92 stores information (variation pattern information) indicating a variation pattern of the first special symbol that can execute the sub liquid crystal interlocking button continuous press effect. In step S1780, when the sub CPU 91 receives a variation start command related to the first special symbol determination from the main control board 80 in the normal gaming state, the sub CPU 91 sets the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the variation start command. Based on the information, a variation pattern of the first special symbol selected by the main CPU 81 is specified. Then, based on whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the identified first special symbol matches the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern information stored in the sub ROM 92, whether or not to execute the sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press effect is determined. Determine. Here, if it is determined that the sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press effect is not to be executed (step S1780: NO), the process proceeds to step S171 in FIG. 73.

When the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the sub-liquid crystal linked button repeated press effect (step S1780: YES), the sub CPU 91 sets a valid period during which the operation of the first effect button 35 is valid in the sub liquid crystal linked button repeated press effect, and stores the setting information. is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 (step S1781). In this embodiment, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in a first special symbol variation pattern that can perform a sub-liquid crystal interlocking button continuous press effect, how long will it take to change the first special symbol after the first variable display starts? The sub ROM 92 stores information indicating at what timing the valid period should start and at which timing the valid period should end, and the sub CPU 91 refers to this information to set the above valid period.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether there is an expected performance to be suggested in the suggested item display success performance in FIG. 47(J) (see FIG. 49(C)) (step S1782). Specifically, for example, the production patterns for various preview productions are set through the processing from step S165 to step S177 in FIG. 73, and the setting information is set in the sub RAM 93. Based on this, whether some kind of preview performance (expected performance) will be executed immediately after the validity period set in the process of step S1781 ends (after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed after the validity period ends). Determine whether or not.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that there is a target expected performance (step S1782: YES), that is, when it determines that some kind of preview performance (expected performance) will be executed immediately after the set validity period ends, the sub CPU 91 executes step Information indicating the performance pattern of the sub-liquid crystal linked button continuous press performance, including information indicating the validity period set in the process of S1781, information indicating the type of preview performance (expected performance) to be executed immediately after the validity period ends is set in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information for the successful pattern of sub-liquid crystal interlocking button press effects (step S1783).

If the sub CPU 91 determines that there is no target expected performance (step S1782: NO), that is, if it determines that no preview performance (expected performance) will be executed immediately after the set validity period ends, the sub CPU 91 performs step S1781. Information indicating the effective period set in the process, information indicating that there is no target expected performance, and information indicating the performance pattern of the sub-LCD linked button repeated press performance, including information indicating the sub-LCD linked button repeated press performance of the failure pattern. The setting information is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S1784).

The setting information for the success pattern sub-liquid crystal linked button repeated press effect (or the setting information for the sub liquid crystal linked button repeated press effect for the failure pattern) set in the sub RAM 93 in this way is included in the variable effect start command and is included in the image sound control. The sub-liquid crystal interlocking described above based on FIGS. 46 to 50 is transmitted to the board 100 (and lamp control board 120), and the image sound control CPU 101 (and lamp CPU 121) executes the effect control based on the variable effect start command. A button-mashing effect will be realized.

[Production pattern setting process for stage change production and expected production by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 83 is a detailed flowchart of the performance pattern setting process for the stage change performance/expected performance in step S176 of FIG. 73. In order to execute and control the stage change performance and expected performance described above based on FIGS. 36 to 39, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of stage change performance and expected performance illustrated in FIG. 83 following the process of step S171 in FIG. Execute performance pattern setting processing for expected performance.

The sub CPU 91 first obtains a stage change effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1760). This stage change performance random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the stage change performance described above based on FIGS. 36 to 39, and is incremented by 1 every time the random number update process described above is performed. Ru. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state as a stage change performance random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93.

Next, the sub CPU 91 executes a stage change effect based on, for example, whether the stage change effect random number obtained through the process of step S1760 matches any of the predetermined random numbers stored in the sub ROM 92. It is determined whether or not to do so (step S1761). Here, if it is determined that the stage change performance is not to be executed (step S1761: NO), the series of stage change performance/expected performance pattern setting processing is completed, and the process proceeds to step S172 in FIG. 73.

When the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the stage change effect (step S1761: YES), it executes the expected effect selection process (step S1762). In this embodiment, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 36, when performing a stage change effect, there are cases where the first stage becomes the final stage, cases where the second stage becomes the final stage, and cases where the third stage becomes the final stage. Sometimes it is the final stage. The above expected performance selection process is performed in the final stage (any of the first to third stages) of the stage change performance, in which the expectation is announced by the expected performance icon confirmation stop performance (for example, see FIG. 36(C)). This is a process for determining the performance.

In this embodiment, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 73, various preview effects such as a special cut-in, a character standby effect, a subjugation effect, a chance effect, a suggestion effect, and other preview effects are executed. The sub CPU 91 selects one expected performance to be executed after the stage change performance is finished from among these preview performances for which a performance pattern is set. For example, if there is only one preview performance that meets this condition, that preview performance is selected as the expected performance. Further, for example, if there are a plurality of preview performances that fall under this upper limit, a lottery is performed using random performance numbers, and one preview performance is selected as the expected performance based on the lottery result. In addition, in this way, when selecting one of the preview performances as the expected performance from among multiple preview performances, the jackpot reliability of these preview performances is compared, and the prediction performance with the highest jackpot reliability is expected. It may be selected as a performance.

Following the processing in step S1762, the sub CPU 91 determines that the determination result of the current first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" based on the symbol setting information included in the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80. It is determined whether there is one (step S1763). Here, if it is determined that it is a jackpot (step S1763: YES), the production pattern selection table for the stage change production for the jackpot is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1764). Conversely, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot (step S1763: NO), the performance pattern selection table for the stage change performance for loses is read out from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1765).

When the sub CPU 91 sets the effect pattern selection table for the step change effect for jackpot or loss in the sub RAM 93 through the process of step S1764 or the process of step S1765, it executes the step change effect pattern selection process (step S1766 ).

The performance pattern selection table for the second change performance for a jackpot and the performance pattern selection table for the second change performance for a loss include the type of expected performance to be announced, the performance pattern for the stage change performance, and the first special The variation pattern of the symbol is associated with a random number value that is compared with the stage change effect random number. After setting the effect pattern selection table for one of the stage change effects, the sub CPU 91 in step S1766 selects the type of expected effect selected in the process of step S1762 and the first effect pattern specified based on the above-mentioned variation start command. 1 The performance pattern of the stage change performance corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the stage change performance random number obtained by the process of step S1760 is read from the performance pattern selection table of the stage change performance set in the sub-RAM 93. By doing so, one performance pattern of the stage change performance is selected.

The performance patterns of the stage change performance in this embodiment can be roughly classified into three types: performance pattern A, performance pattern B, and performance pattern C. Here, the performance pattern A is a performance pattern including a first stage performance (see FIG. 36(A)) and an expected performance icon confirmation stop performance in the first stage (see FIG. 36(C)). Performance pattern B includes a first stage performance (see Figure 36(A)), a development icon confirmation stop performance (see Figure 36(F)), a second stage performance (see Figure 36(G)), and a second stage performance (see Figure 36(G)). This is a performance pattern including an expected performance icon finalization stop performance at each stage (see FIG. 36(I)). Performance pattern C includes a first stage performance (see Figure 36(A)), a development icon finalization stop performance (see Figure 36(F)), a second stage performance (see Figure 36(G)), and a development icon final stage performance (see Figure 36(G)). A performance including a confirmed stop performance (see FIG. 36(L)), a third stage performance (see FIG. 36(M)), and an expected performance icon confirmed stop performance in the third stage (see FIG. 36(O)). It's a pattern.

A detailed explanation of the structure of the performance pattern selection table for the stage change performance for jackpots and the performance pattern selection table for the stage change performance for loses will be omitted, but please refer to the performance pattern selection table for the stage change performance for jackpots. In this case, if the above three effect patterns are arranged in order from the least likely to be selected to the most likely to be selected, the order will be effect pattern A, effect pattern B, and effect pattern C. In addition, when referring to the performance pattern selection table for the stage change performance for losers, if the above three performance patterns are arranged in order from the least likely to be selected to the most likely to be selected, the order is performance pattern C, performance pattern B, and performance pattern A. becomes.

In addition, regarding performance pattern A in which the stage change performance ends at the first stage, the shorter the fluctuation time of the first special symbol's fluctuation pattern, the more likely it is to be selected; The longer it is, the harder it is to be selected. In addition, regarding performance pattern C in which the stage change performance ends at the third stage, which is the upper limit, the shorter the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation pattern, the more difficult it is to be selected, and conversely, the fluctuation of the first special symbol fluctuation pattern There is a tendency that the longer the time, the more likely it is to be selected.

Based on the result of the step change effect pattern selection process in step S1766, the sub CPU 91 sets information indicating the effect pattern of the step change effect in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 as setting information of the step change effect (step S1767). The setting information of the stage change effect set in the sub-RAM 93 by the process of step S1767 is included in the variable effect start command, and is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process in step S40 of FIG. and processing based on the setting information is executed in these control boards. As a result, the stage change effect described above based on FIGS. 36 to 39 will be realized.

Note that there is not one performance pattern classified as performance pattern A in which the stage change performance ends at the first stage, but a large number of performance patterns classified as performance pattern A are prepared. FIG. 37(D) illustrates an icon variation effect that is executed during the first stage effect when the stage change effect ends at the first stage. Further, FIG. 38(B) illustrates an icon variation effect executed during the first stage effect when the stage change effect ends at the third stage. As is clear from the comparison between FIG. 37(D) and FIG. 38(B), even if the icon fluctuation performance is executed during the same first stage performance, the number of icons displayed in a variable manner during the icon fluctuation performance is You can understand that there are many types, combinations, and arrangements available.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, there is production pattern B in which the stage change production ends at the second stage,
Regarding the performance pattern C in which the stage change performance ends at the third stage, a large number of performance patterns are also prepared.

[Related performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 84 is a detailed flowchart of the related effect pattern setting process in step S171 of FIG. 73. Following the process of step S171 in FIG. 73, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of related effect pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG. This related performance pattern setting process allows the player to visually confirm a desired related performance by operating the operating lever 98 regarding the past related performance, present related performance, and future related performance described above based on FIGS. 14 to 16. This is the process to make it so.

The sub CPU 91 first obtains the related effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1720). This related performance random number determines whether or not to execute the related performance, in other words, whether to make the related performance executable in the related performance window 75 (see FIG. 14) in response to the operation of the operating lever 98 by the player. This is a random number for determining whether or not the value is set, and is incremented by 1 every time the random number update process described above is performed. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state as a related performance random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93.

Next, the sub CPU 91 performs a related effect lottery (step S1721). The sub ROM 92 stores a random value (winning value) to be compared with the related effect random number, and the sub CPU 91 determines whether the related effect random number acquired and stored in the process of step S1720 is any of the values stored in the sub ROM 92. It is determined whether or not to execute the related performance based on whether or not it matches the random number value (winning value).

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 stores the above-mentioned random values (winning value) related to the related effect lottery, including a random value for a jackpot (winning value) and a random value for a loss (winning value). , is memorized. When the sub CPU 91 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 uses the acquired and stored related performance random number for the jackpot. Compare with the random value (winning value). On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is determined to be a "lose" based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, the acquired and stored related performance random number is used as the random number for the aforementioned loser. Compare with the numerical value (winning value).

Note that the sub ROM 92 stores a larger number of random numbers as random numbers (winning values) for jackpots related to the related effect lottery than random numbers (winning values) for losers related to the related effect lottery. For this reason, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot", it is likely to be decided to execute the related performance, and conversely, it will be determined that the related performance will be executed. ”, it is difficult to decide to execute the related performance.

If the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of the first special symbol this time is "jackpot", the jackpot reliability is relatively high by the processing of steps S165 to S171 in FIG. 73. A performance pattern of the preview performance is set, and these preview performances with relatively high jackpot reliability are executed during the variable display of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, as described above, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of the first special symbol is "jackpot", the related performance is likely to be executed, and the player By operating 98, it is easy to be provided with an opportunity to display information related to various preview performances with relatively high jackpot reliability in the related performance window 95. Therefore, the synergistic effect of various preview performances with relatively high jackpot reliability and related performances related to these preview performances can effectively raise players' expectations for the execution of the hit notification performance. It is possible to improve. Also, in the case of a "lose", if a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the related performance is likely to be in a state where it can be executed. Therefore, even in the case of a "lose" game, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectations for the execution of the winning notification effect.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the related performance based on the lottery result in step S1721 (step S1722). Here, if it is determined that the related effect is not to be executed (step S1722: NO), the related effect pattern setting process ends and the process returns to step S165 in FIG. 73.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the related effects (step S1722: YES), it executes the past effect selection process (step S1723), the current effect selection process (step S1724), and the future effect selection process. (Step S1725).

The past performance selection process in step S1723 includes, for example, past-related performance A related to performance A, past-related performance B related to performance B, and performance C, as described above based on FIG. 16(A). In the case where it is possible to execute past-related effects C related to An example is the process of selecting performances A to C as shown in FIG. 16(A) from among the performances for which performance patterns have been set by the processes of steps S165 to S171 in step 73.

In addition, the current performance selection process in step S1724 includes, for example, as described above with reference to FIG. 16(B), currently related performance A related to performance A, current related performance B related to performance B, In the case where the current related performance C related to the performance C is made executable, each performance (for example, a reach-to-reach performance, a reach-to-reach performance, etc.) constituting the variable performance for which the performance pattern has been set by the process of FIG. An example is the process of selecting performances A to C as shown in FIG. 16(B) from among the performances for which performance patterns have been set by the processes of steps S165 to S171 in FIG.

Further, as the future effect selection process in step S1725, for example, as described above based on FIG. 16(C), future related effect B related to effect B, future related effect C related to effect C, In the case where it is possible to execute, each performance (for example, a reach effect, a reach effect, etc.) constituting the variable effect for which the effect pattern is set by the process of FIG. 72, and the processes of steps S165 to S171 in FIG. An example is the process of selecting performances B and C as shown in FIG. 16(C) from among the performances for which the performance patterns are set by.

Following the process of step S1725, the sub CPU 91 executes related effect pattern selection process (step S1726). For example, if the past performance selection process in step S1723 selects three performances, performance A, performance B, and performance C shown in FIG. , and past-related performance C, and also performs a process of setting an executable period for each past-related performance.

Further, for example, when three performances, production A, production B, and production C shown in FIG. 16(B) are selected by the current production selection process in step S1724, the sub CPU 91 selects the currently related production A, currently related performance B, and currently related performance C are selected, and processing is performed to set the executable period of each currently related performance.

For example, when the sub CPU 91 selects two performances, production B and production C shown in FIG. The content of each future-related performance C is selected, and processing for setting the executable period of each future-related performance is performed.

In this way, when the sub CPU 91 executes the related effect pattern selection process regarding each effect of the past effect, the current effect, and the future effect in step S1726, the sub CPU 91 stores information indicating the selection result in the sub RAM 93 as related effect pattern setting information. It is stored in a predetermined area (step S1727).

In addition, in this embodiment, during the period in which the executable period of the past-related performance, the executable period of the current-related performance, and the execution period of the future-related performance overlap, the player may perform any of the related performances. An example will be described in which all of the processes from step S1723 to step S1725 are executed in order to enable arbitrary selection by operating the operating lever 98. On the other hand, in other embodiments, only one or two of steps S1723 to S1725 may be performed.

Up to this point, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 84, we have described the processing for setting the performance patterns of various preview performances executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. If there are performances whose timings overlap, and a performance pattern is set for both of these preview performances, there is a possibility that the performances cannot be controlled appropriately. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, priorities are set for each of the preview performances whose execution timings may overlap, and it is determined to execute the preview performance with a higher priority, and the execution timing is determined to be the same. If a pattern is set, the performance pattern setting process for the preview performance with a lower priority is not executed, and even if a performance pattern is set, if the priority of the preview performance is low, the performance pattern setting information is not executed. Performance control is performed such as discarding the preview performance and executing the preview performance with a higher priority.

[Operation reception processing by sub-control board 90]
85 to 87 are detailed flowcharts of the operation acceptance process in step S30 of FIG. 67. Following the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. 67, the sub CPU 91 executes the following process. That is, the sub CPU 91, for example, based on the related effect pattern setting information set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S1727 in FIG. 84 and the elapsed time since the variable display of the first special symbol started, It is determined whether or not the related performance is still valid (step S401).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the past-related performance is still valid (step S401: YES), the sub CPU 91 generates an operation signal that notifies that the lever button has been pressed while the operation lever 98 is tilted backward (towards the front). Based on whether or not has been input, it is determined whether or not the selection lever of the operation lever 98 has been operated (step S402). Here, if it is determined that the selection lever operation after the operation lever 98 has been performed (step S402: YES), a past related performance start command is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S403). Specifically, based on the related effect pattern setting information set in the sub RAM 93, the effect content of the past related effect to be executed in response to the operation of the post-selection lever during the current valid period is specified, and the specified past related effect is executed. A past-related performance start command is set in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the execution of the past-related performance.

This past related performance start command is sent to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S40 of FIG. By executing the processing based on this, the past-related performance instructed by the sub CPU 91 will be started.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S403, when it determines that the past related performance is not within the valid period (step S401: NO), when it determines that the selection lever operation after the operation lever 98 is not performed (Step S402: NO), for example, based on the related effect pattern setting information set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S1727 in FIG. 84 and the elapsed time since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, It is determined whether or not the related performance is currently in the valid period (step S404).

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the related performance is currently in effect (step S404: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether an operation signal notifying that the lever button has been pressed without tilting the operation lever 98 has been input. Based on this, it is determined whether a lever operation without direction selection of the operation lever 98 has been performed (step S405). Here, if it is determined that the lever operation without direction selection of the operation lever 98 has been performed (step S405: YES), the current related performance start command is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S406). Specifically, based on the related effect pattern setting information set in the sub RAM 93, the effect content of the currently related effect to be executed in response to the lever operation without direction selection during the current valid period is specified, and the specified currently related effect is A currently related performance start command for instructing execution of the performance is set in the sub RAM 93.

This current related effect start command is sent to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S40 in FIG. By executing the processing based on this, the currently related effects instructed by the sub CPU 91 will be started.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S406 and determines that the related performance is not currently in the valid period (step S404: NO), the sub CPU 91 determines that the lever operation without direction selection of the operation lever 98 is not performed. (Step S405: NO), for example, based on the related effect pattern setting information set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of Step S1727 in FIG. 84 and the elapsed time since the variable display of the first special symbol started. , it is determined whether or not the future-related presentation is still valid (step S407).

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the future-related effect is still valid (step S407: YES), the sub CPU 91 sends an operation signal notifying that the lever button has been pressed while the operation lever 98 is tilted forward (towards you). Based on whether the input has been made, it is determined whether or not the pre-selection lever of the operation lever 98 has been operated (step S408). Here, if it is determined that the previous selection lever of the operating lever 98 has been operated (step S408: YES), a future-related performance start command is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S409). Specifically, based on the related performance pattern setting information set in the sub-RAM 93, the performance content of the future-related performance to be executed in response to the previous selection lever operation during the current valid period is specified, and the specified future-related performance is executed. A future-related performance start command is set in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the execution of .

This future-related performance start command is sent to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S40 in FIG. 67, and the image and sound control CPU 101 (and lamp CPU 121) receives the future-related performance start command By executing the processing based on this, the future-related performance instructed by the sub CPU 91 will be started.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S409, when it determines that the future-related production is not within the valid period (step S407: NO), when it determines that the previous selection lever of the operation lever 98 has not been operated (Step S408: NO), as illustrated in FIG. 86, by the process of step S1676 described above, setting information indicating that the variable effect pattern of subjugation reach is "variable effect pattern A" is stored in the sub RAM 93. It is determined whether or not (step S411). Here, if it is determined that the setting information indicating that the variable effect pattern of subjugation reach is "variable effect pattern A" is not stored in the sub RAM 93 (step S411: NO), the process proceeds to step S429 of FIG. 87, which will be described later. Processing will proceed.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that setting information indicating that the variation effect pattern of the subjugation reach is "variable effect pattern A" is stored in the sub RAM 93 (step S411: YES), the sub CPU 91 performs the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (Fig. 17(C)) is within the validity period (step S412). Specifically, in this embodiment, information indicating the validity period related to the suppression button repeated press promotion effect is displayed by the process of step S1676 in FIG. The included performance pattern setting information is set in the sub RAM 93. Therefore, the sub CPU 91 determines the effectiveness of the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance based on the information indicating this validity period and the elapsed time since the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in which subjugation reach is executed. Determine whether or not it is during the period.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the valid period for the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance is still in effect (step S412: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the first performance button 35 has been operated (step S413). Here, if it is determined that the first effect button 35 has not been operated (step S413: NO), the process proceeds to step S421, which will be described later.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the first performance button 35 has been operated (step S412: YES), the current operation of the first performance button 35 is the first operation during the validity period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance. It is determined whether or not (step S414). Here, if it is determined that this is the first operation (step S414: YES), as described above based on FIG. ). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current operation of the first performance button 35 is not the first operation during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance (step S414: NO), the above-described operation based on FIG. 18(A) is performed. As such, a subjugation success effect lottery is executed with a 10% probability of winning (step S416).

Then, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the subjugation success effect lottery in step S415 or step S416 has been won (step S417). Here, if it is determined that one of the subjugation success effect drawings has been won (step S417: YES), the validity period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect is terminated (step S418), and the above-mentioned based on FIG. 17(E) is performed. The subjugation success effect is executed (step S419). Specifically, a command is set in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct execution of the subjugation success effect.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the first performance button 35 has not been operated (step S413: NO), the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the second performance button 36 has been operated (step S421). Here, if it is determined that the second performance button 36 has been operated (step S421: YES), whether or not this operation is the first operation of the second performance button 36 during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance. (Step S422).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the operation of the second performance button 36 is the first operation of the second performance button 36 during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance (step S422: YES), the sub CPU 91 performs the operation shown in FIG. ), as described above, a subjugation success effect lottery with a 100% probability of winning is executed (step S423). In this way, since there is a 100% probability of winning the subjugation success effect drawing here, the validity period is ended in the same way as the process in step S418 (step S424), and the subjugation success effect is drawn as in the process in step S419. Execute (step S425).

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the subjugation reach of variable performance pattern A is executed, in response to the first operation of the second performance button 36 during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance, A configuration is adopted in which a subjugation success effect is executed. Therefore, unlike what was described above based on FIG. 18(A), for example, if it is determined that it is the first operation of the second performance button 36 (step S422: YES), the subjugation success performance lottery in step S423 The processing from step S424 onwards may be executed without executing.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the sub RAM 93 does not store the setting information indicating that the variation production pattern of the subjugation reach is "variation production pattern A" (step S411: NO), As such, it is determined whether or not the valid period for the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect is in effect (step S429). Specifically, in the present embodiment, information indicating the validity period related to the suppression button repeated press promotion effect is updated by the process of step S1676 in FIG. In addition, performance pattern setting information including information indicating the validity period of the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance is set in the sub-RAM 93. For this reason, the sub CPU 91 performs the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect based on the information indicating the validity period of the latter and the elapsed time since the variable display of the second special symbol in which the subjugation reach is started. Determine whether it is within the validity period.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the validity period for the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance is still in effect (step S429: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the first performance button 35 has been operated (step S430). When the sub CPU 91 determines that the first production button 35 has been operated (step S430: YES), the sub CPU 91 selects the current second special symbol based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80. It is determined whether the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed at the start of variation is "10R probability variation" (step S431). Here, if it is determined that it is not "10R probability variation" (step S431: NO), the process proceeds to step S439, which will be described later.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that it is "10R probability change" (step S431: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the current operation of the first performance button 35 is the first operation during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance. (Step S432). Here, if it is determined that this is the first operation (step S432: YES), as described above based on FIG. Step S433). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current operation of the first effect button 35 is not the first operation during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect (step S432: NO), the above-described operation based on FIG. 18(B) is performed. As such, a second pursuit success effect lottery is executed with a 15% probability of winning (step S434).

Then, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the second chase success effect lottery in step S433 or step S434 has been won (step S435). Here, if it is determined that one of the second pursuit successful performance drawings has been won (step S435: YES), the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance is ended (step S436), and based on FIG. 17(O) Then, the second pursuit success effect described above is executed (step S437). Specifically, a command is set in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct execution of the second pursuit success effect.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that it is not a "10R probability variation" (step S431: NO), it determines whether it is a "3R probability variation" (step S439). Here, if it is determined that it is "3R definite change" (step S439: YES), whether or not the current operation of the first effect button 35 is the first operation during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect. is determined (step S440). Here, if it is determined that this is the first operation (step S440: YES), as described above based on FIG. Step S441). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current operation of the first effect button 35 is not the first operation during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect (step S440: NO), that is, if it is the second or subsequent operation. , as described above based on FIG. 18(C), the first pursuit success effect lottery is executed with a 20% probability of winning (step S442).

Then, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the first pursuit success effect lottery in step S441 or step S442 has been won (step S443). Here, if it is determined that one of the first pursuit successful performance drawings has been won (step S443: YES), the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance is ended (step S444), and based on FIG. 17(M) Then, the first pursuit success effect described above is executed (step S445). Specifically, a command is set in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct execution of the first pursuit success effect.

[Interruption processing by image and sound control board 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, an explanation will be given of the interrupt processing executed in the image-acoustic control board 100. Here, FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating an interrupt process executed in the image and sound control board 100. The image-acoustic control board 100 repeatedly executes the series of processes illustrated in FIG. 88 at fixed time intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation, excluding special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. .

First, the image-acoustic control CPU 101 executes an image display control process for controlling image display on the display screen 70 based on commands received from the sub-control board 90 (step S71). This image display control process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 89.

Following the process of step S71, the image sound control CPU 101 executes a production sound output control process for outputting various production sounds from the speaker 38 in synchronization with the screen display performed on the display screen 70 or asynchronously. (Step S72).

Following the processing in step S72, the image and sound control CPU 101 executes data transmission control processing (step S73). Specifically, data regarding the image and sound control performed in the image and sound control board 100 is transmitted to the sub control board 90. In contrast, the sub-control board 90 transfers the data received from the image-acoustic control board 100 to the lamp control board 120. As a result, the frame lamp 37, board lamp 5, movable decorative member 14, etc. are controlled in synchronization with the effects performed by the display screen 70 and the speaker 38.

[Image display control processing by image and sound control board 100]
FIG. 89 is a detailed flowchart of the image display control process in step S71 of FIG. 88. The image and sound control CPU 101 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the sub-control board 90 has been received (step S711). Here, if it is determined that no command has been received (step S711: NO), the process proceeds to step S72.

On the other hand, when the image and sound control CPU 101 determines that a command from the sub-control board 90 has been received (step S711: YES), it sets the setting information included in the command in the control RAM 103 (step S712). Based on the setting information set in the control RAM 103, it determines how the effect image should be displayed on the display screen 70, creates a display list for controlling the drawing process of the VDP 104, and stores it in a predetermined area of the control RAM 103. (step S713), and set the display list in the display list storage area of the VRAM 106 (step S714). By the VDP 104 executing the drawing process based on the display list set in the display list storage area, the effect display instructed by the sub-control board 90 is realized.

[others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference invention 1)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
A winning notification effect for notifying that the determining means has determined that the special game has been executed; a first expectation presentation for making the user expect that the winning notification effect will be executed; It is possible to perform a second expectation production that makes you look forward to it,
During the execution of the first expected performance, when the performance content of the first expected performance changes from the first performance content to the second performance content, and when the performance content of the first expected performance changes from the first performance content. There are times when I don't, and times when I don't.
a first probability that the second expected performance is started while the performance content of the first expected performance has not changed from the first performance content to the second performance content; and a first probability that the performance content of the first expected performance is A second probability that the second expected performance is started after changing from the first performance content to the second performance content are different from each other.

According to this gaming machine, the first probability that the second expected performance is started before the performance content of the first expected performance changes from the first performance content to the second performance content, and the performance content of the first expected performance are and a second probability that the second expected performance is started after changing from the first performance content to the second performance content are different from each other. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who expects the second expected performance to be executed pay attention to whether or not the content of the first expected performance changes, and the first expected performance and the second expected performance Due to the synergistic effect, it is possible to obtain high performance effects.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1,
The second probability is higher than the first probability.

According to this gaming machine, after the performance content of the first expected performance changes from the first performance content to the second performance content, the performance content of the first expected performance changes from the first performance content to the second performance content. The second expected performance is more likely to be started than before the change. Therefore, the player who expects the second expected performance to be executed can be made to expect that the performance content of the first expected performance will change from the first performance content to the second performance content. By changing the performance content of the first expected performance, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the second expected performance.

(Reference invention 2)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The effects based on the results of the determination include a first effect executed at a first timing and a second effect executed at a second timing different from the first timing,
The performance control means is
In response to a first operation by a player, a first related performance related to the first performance is executed, and in response to a second operation by the player, a second related performance related to the second performance is executed. It is characterized by the fact that

According to this gaming machine, if the operation by the player is the first operation, the first related performance related to the first performance is executed, and if the operation by the player is the second operation, the second performance is performed. A second related performance related to is executed. Therefore, the player can arbitrarily obtain information regarding either the first performance or the second performance by changing the operation, and the performance corresponding to the operation is fixed regardless of the operation. It is possible to perform an operation-responsive performance with a higher performance effect than in the case of the present invention.

(Reference invention 3)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
Based on the result of the determination, a first operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform the first operation during the first period and a second operation that prompts the player to perform the second operation during the second period after the first period are provided. It is possible to perform a second operation promotion performance that prompts the user to
Performing either a first success performance or a first failure performance in response to the first operation being performed during the first period,
Performing either a second success performance or a second failure performance in response to the second operation being performed during the second period,
When the first success performance is executed, neither the second success performance nor the second failure performance is performed, and when the first failure performance is executed, the second success performance and the second failure performance It is characterized by being able to perform either one of the following.

According to this gaming machine, when the first failure effect is executed, the second operation promotion effect is executed after that, and the second operation during the second period in which the second operation promotion effect is executed. Accordingly, a second success effect may be executed. In this way, even if the first failure performance is executed, the second success performance may be executed after that, so by executing the first failure performance, the player may feel that the success performance will be executed. It is possible to easily and effectively suppress the problem of a significant drop in expectations.

(Reference invention 4)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
A game machine comprising a game control section that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control section that controls the performance,
The game control section includes:
an acquisition means for acquiring a plurality of information including acquisition information and type information;
a determination unit that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired information acquired by the acquisition unit;
determining means for determining the type of the special game based on the type information acquired together with the acquired information used for the determination when the determining means determines that the special game is to be executed;
special game execution means for executing the special game determined by the determination means;
A game control means that controls the game in any one of a plurality of game states, including a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state;
a reservation means capable of suspending the right of judgment;
prior determination means for making a preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute the special game before the determination is made on the rights reserved by the reservation means;
Transmitting means for transmitting information to the production control section,
The performance control unit is
receiving means for receiving information transmitted by the transmitting means;
and a performance execution means for performing a performance based on the information received by the receiving means,
The acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means includes at least first acquisition information and second acquisition information,
The determining means is
In the first game state, when the first acquisition information is acquired by the acquisition means, it is determined that the special game is to be executed, while when the second acquisition information is acquired by the acquisition means, the special game is determined to be executed. It is determined that the special game will not be executed,
In the second gaming state, the acquiring means determines to execute the special game in both cases where the first acquired information is acquired and when the second acquired information is acquired. ,
The game control section includes:
When the second acquisition information is acquired by the acquisition means, special game information that allows the type of special game to be identified based on the type information acquired by the acquisition means together with the second acquisition information. Further comprising a special game information acquisition means that can be obtained,
The transmitting means includes:
When the second acquisition information is acquired by the acquisition means, the preliminary determination information indicating the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means and the special game information acquired by the special game information acquisition means are It can be sent to the production control department,
The performance execution means is
The present invention is characterized in that a predetermined performance can be executed based on the advance determination information and the special game information received by the receiving means.

According to this gaming machine, when it is determined that the special game will not be executed in the first gaming state, and the second acquired information is acquired that determines that the special game will be executed in the second gaming state, the prior determination is made. In addition to the preliminary determination information indicating the result, special game information that allows the type of special game to be specified is transmitted to the performance control section. Therefore, at the time when the determination by the determination means is suspended, it is determined in advance that the special game will not be executed because the state is in the first gaming state, but when the determination by the determination means is actually made, it is in the second gaming state. Even in the case where it is determined that a special game is to be executed, since special game information is transmitted, it is possible to execute an effective predetermined performance based on the advance determination information and special game information.

(Reference invention 5)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, a symbol display control means causes a predetermined special symbol display means to variably display a special symbol and then stop and display a special symbol indicating the result of the determination;
special game execution means for executing the special game when a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined that the special game is to be executed is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display means;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
executing a variable performance in which a performance pattern is variably displayed in accordance with the variable display of the special pattern, and a stop performance in which a performance pattern indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed in conjunction with the stop display of the special pattern;
The stop performance includes a first stop performance that notifies that the special game will be executed, and a second stop performance that notifies that the special game will not be executed,
The performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to execute the second stop effect that foretells that the first stop effect will be executed.

By the way, if the period in which the second stop effect (notifying that the special game will not be executed) is repeatedly executed without the first stop effect (notifying that the special game will be executed) continues for a long time, There is a concern that the player's expectations for the execution of the special game will decrease, and as a result, the player will feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described above, a second stop performance that foretells the execution of the first stop performance (notifying that a special game will be executed) may be executed. Therefore, by executing the second stop effect, it is possible to make the player expect that the special game will be executed, and it is possible to reduce the above-mentioned discomfort felt by the player.

(Reference invention 6)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, symbol display control means causes a predetermined symbol display means to variably display a symbol and then stop and display a symbol indicating the result of the determination;
special game execution means for executing the special game when a symbol indicating that the determination means has determined that the special game is to be executed is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
Based on the result of the determination, a winning notification effect that notifies that the special game will be executed, an expectation presentation that makes people expect that the winning notification effect will be executed, and a possibility that the winning notification effect will be executed. There is a suggestion that it is possible to perform,
The suggestive performance includes a low suggestive performance that suggests that the possibility is relatively low, and a high suggestive performance that suggests that the possibility is relatively high,
The performance control means is
When executing the expected performance and the suggestion performance while the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, it is possible to execute suggestion performance control that executes the low suggestion performance without executing the high suggestion performance during the fluctuating display of the symbol. can be,
The possibility is higher if the expected performance and the low suggestion performance are executed than if the low suggestion performance is executed without the expected performance.

A high-suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility that a winning notification performance will be executed, whereas a low-suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that the probability that a winning notification performance will be executed is relatively low. This is a performance that suggests this. For this reason, the player expects the high suggestion performance to be executed more than the low suggestion performance, and if the low suggestion performance is frequently executed without the high suggestion performance being executed, the hit notification performance There is a concern that players' expectations for the execution of the game will be significantly lowered. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described above, when the expected performance is executed while the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the high suggestion performance is not executed and the low suggestion performance is executed while the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. . Furthermore, it is more likely that the expected performance and the low suggestion performance are executed (the winning notification performance is executed) than when the expected performance is not executed and the low suggestion performance is executed. For this reason, by executing the hit notification performance in response to the execution of the low suggestion performance in conjunction with the expected performance, it is said that the low suggestion performance is a performance that cannot be expected to be executed. In addition to improving the player's impression, low-suggestive performances can give players a good impression that, when combined with expected performances, it is a performance that can be expected to execute a winning notification performance, and low-suggestive performances are frequently performed. It is possible to easily and effectively suppress the above-mentioned problem in which the player's expectations for the execution of the winning notification effect are significantly lowered due to the execution of the winning notification effect.

(Reference invention 7)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
It is possible to perform a change production that can be changed step by step to any one of multiple stages,
The present invention is characterized in that, when the change performance is executed in which a certain stage of the plurality of stages is the final stage, a related performance unique to the final stage that is related to the final stage performance is performed. be.

According to this gaming machine, when a change performance in which a certain stage among a plurality of stages is the final stage is executed, a related performance unique to the final stage related to the final stage performance is executed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the changing performance has ended at a certain stage based on the related performance, and the synergistic effect of the final stage performance and the related performance increases the interest. It is possible to perform high performance.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1,
The final stage performance is a performance that displays a first performance image representing a predetermined display object,
The related performance is characterized in that it is a performance that displays a second performance image that is different from the first performance image and represents a display object that is common to the display object.

According to this gaming machine, in the related performance, although a performance image different from the performance in the final stage is displayed, the same display object as the display object displayed in the final stage is displayed. Therefore, the continuity between the final stage performance and the related performance is improved, and it is possible to perform the final stage performance and the related performance without any discomfort.

(Reference invention 8)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
Based on the result of the determination, it is possible to execute a winning notification effect that notifies that the special game will be executed;
It is possible to perform a change performance that can be changed step by step to any stage below a predetermined stage, and a precursor performance that is a precursor to the change performance,
The change performance is a performance that increases the possibility that the winning notification performance will be executed as the change performance changes,
The foreshadowing performance is characterized in that it is a performance that can suggest the possibility that the change performance will change to one stage below the predetermined stage.

According to this gaming machine, the more the change effect changes, the higher the possibility that a winning notification effect will be executed. It is suggested that there is a possibility that this will change. Therefore, the player can recognize in advance how likely the changing performance is to change to the 1st level based on the precursory performance, and the player can use the precursory performance to predict that the changing performance will be executed. While creating expectations, it is possible to effectively suggest the possibility that the change production will change to the first stage.

(Reference invention 9)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
Based on the result of the determination, a stage change performance that can be changed in stages from a predetermined stage as an upper limit to any stage below the predetermined stage, and a winning notification performance that notifies that the special game will be executed; It is possible to perform an expectation performance that makes the user expect that the winning notification performance will be executed,
Displaying a corresponding image corresponding to the expected performance in a possibility-suggesting state indicating that the expected performance may be executed while the first stage of the stage change performance is being executed. First production control,
changing the display state of the corresponding image from the possibility suggesting state to a confirmed notification state that definitively notifies that the expected performance corresponding to the corresponding image will be executed; a second performance control that terminates at the first stage and executes the expected performance corresponding to the corresponding image in the confirmed notification state;
changing the stage change performance being executed from the first stage performance to the next stage performance without changing the display state of the corresponding image from the possibility suggestion state to the confirmed notification state; 3 performance control.

According to this gaming machine, when the display state of the corresponding image changes from the possibility suggestion state to the confirmed notification state, the stage change performance ends at one stage and the expected performance is executed, while the corresponding image If the display state does not change from the possibility suggestion state to the confirmed notification state, the stage change performance changes from the first stage performance to the next stage performance. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the flow of subsequent effects based on the display state of the corresponding image, and the display state of the corresponding image changes from the possibility suggestion state to the confirmed notification state. It is possible to enjoy the game while hoping that the display state of the corresponding image will not change from the possibility suggestion state to the confirmed notification state.

(Reference invention 10)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 is
an input means that allows input by a player;
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
A performance control means for controlling the performance based on the result of the determination,
The performance control means is
displaying a validity suggestion image in a first display mode that suggests that the input to the input means is valid during a predetermined period when the input is valid;
The input means operates in a predetermined operation direction in response to input to the input means,
The performance control means is
A change in which, in response to an input to the input means, the valid suggestion image changes in a second display mode different from when it is displayed in the first display mode in a common direction that is common to the movement direction. It is characterized in that it is possible to perform a performance display.

According to this gaming machine, during the predetermined period when the input to the input means is valid, the validity suggestion image of the first display mode that suggests that the input is valid is displayed, indicating that the input to the input means has been made. In response to this, a change effect display is executed in which the effective suggestion image changes in a second display mode (different from the first display mode) in a common direction that is common to the operating direction of the input means. In this way, in addition to the function of suggesting that the input to the input means is valid, the validity suggestion image has a change effect that changes in conjunction with the movement of the input means after the input to the input means is made. It has a display function. Therefore, due to the synergistic effect of these functions that the effective suggestion image has, it is possible to perform an effective performance using the effective suggestion image.

(Reference invention 11)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 is
an input means that allows input by a player;
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
A performance control means for controlling the performance based on the result of the determination,
The performance control means is
When an intermittent input promotion image that prompts a player to perform intermittent input to the input means is displayed in the first display area, a repetitive motion effect image showing a predetermined display object performing a specific repetitive motion is displayed in the first display area. It is characterized in that it can be displayed in a second display area different from the first display area.

According to this gaming machine, when the intermittent input promotion image is displayed in the first display area, a repetitive action effect image showing a predetermined display object performing a specific repetitive action (the first display area is (different) second display area. Therefore, by visually recognizing the repetitive motion effect image, the player can intuitively recognize that intermittent input to the input means is being encouraged, and the display of the intermittent input promoting image and the repetitive motion Due to the synergistic effect of displaying the effect images, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to make intermittent inputs to the input means.

(Reference invention 12)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 is
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
A performance control means for controlling the performance based on the result of the determination,
The performance control means is
It is possible to display the second effect image superimposed on the first effect image,
It is possible to execute a display change effect that changes the display of the first effect image so that the first effect image changes from a first attitude to a second attitude, and an effect that changes the attitude of the second effect image. It is characterized by restricting the execution of.

According to this gaming machine, while it is possible to execute a display change effect that changes the display of the first effect image so that the first effect image changes from the first attitude to the second attitude, the second effect image Execution of performances that change posture is restricted. Therefore, while suppressing the problem that the visibility of the second effect image is reduced due to a change in the posture of the second effect image, it is possible to improve the game's interest through the display change effect using the first effect image. It is possible to achieve this goal.

Note that the inventions of Reference Inventions 1 to 12 above may be combined.

[Modified example]
In the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a type of pachinko game machine called a so-called V-ST machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a type of pachinko game machine called a variable loop type, The present invention may be applied to other gaming machines such as a single type pachinko gaming machine called a so-called ST machine, and a pachinko gaming machine called a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed type pachinko gaming machine.

Further, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized even with other configurations and operation modes. Furthermore, the processing order, set values, random values, threshold values used for determination, etc. in the above-described flowchart are merely examples, and the present invention may be applied to other orders or values as long as they do not depart from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say, it is possible to achieve this. The drawings and the like illustrated in the above embodiments are merely examples, and other aspects may be used.

1 gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), 7 image display device, 21 first starting port, 22 second starting port, 23 opening/closing member, 26 first grand prize opening, 28 second grand prize opening, 41 first special symbol display device, 42 second special symbol display, 51 first sub liquid crystal, 52 second sub liquid crystal, 57 sub liquid crystal drive control circuit, 70 display screen, 75 related effect window, 76 past window, 77 present window, 78 future window, 80 Main control board, 81 Main CPU, 90 Sub-control board, 91 Sub-CPU, 98 Operation lever, 100 Image-acoustic control board, 101 Image-acoustic control CPU, 141 Decorative proximity image, 211 First starting port sensor, 215 First starting Mouth lamp, 221 2nd starting opening sensor, 261 1st winning opening sensor, 262 1st winning opening solenoid, 281 2nd winning opening sensor, 282 2nd winning opening solenoid, 283 V winning opening sensor, 284 Exhaust Exit sensor, 285 slide member, 286 V winning port solenoid, 287 V winning port, 510 first sub-screen, 520 second sub-screen, 700 background image.

Claims (1)

an input means that allows input by a player;
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
A performance control means for controlling the performance based on the result of the determination,
The performance control means is
Displaying a validity suggestion image in a first display mode that suggests that the input to the input means is valid during a predetermined period when the input is valid;
The input means operates in a predetermined operation direction in response to input to the input means,
The performance control means is
As inputs to the input means are continuously performed a plurality of times during the predetermined period , the valid suggestion image is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. It is possible to perform a change effect display that gradually changes in a common direction that is common to the movement direction ,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second display mode is a display mode that makes you expect that the special game will be executed .

Images